HS50&HS60 XH50&XH60 v2.05.00-00 En-Us

SAMSUNG MEDISON
DIAGNOSTIC ULTRASOUND SYSTEM
Version 2.05
HS50/HS60
XH50/XH60
User Manual
English
Copyright © 2018 By SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD. All rights reserved.

WARRANTY
Samsung Medison provides the following warranty to the purchaser of this unit. This warranty covers all
problems caused by faulty workmanship or faulty material. Samsung Medison will, as sole and exclusive remedy,
replace any such defective unit returned to Samsung Medison within the designated warranty period.
The warranty does not cover damages and loss caused by outside factors including, but not limited to, fire, flood,
storm, tidal wave, lightning, earthquake, theft, abnormal conditions of operation, and intentional destruction of
the equipment. Damage caused by equipment relocation is not covered.
The warranty is void in cases where the equipment has been damaged as a result of an accident, misuse, abuse,
dropping, or when attempts to modify or alter any part or assembly of the equipment have taken place.
Parts with cosmetic defects or deterioration will not be replaced. Replacement of batteries, training materials,
and supplies are not covered.
Samsung Medison will not be responsible for incidental or consequential damages of any kind arising from or
connected with the use of the equipment.
Samsung Medison will not be responsible for any loss, damage, or injury resulting from a delay in services
rendered under the warranty
This limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied, including warranties of merchant
ability or fitness for any particular use. No representative or other person is authorized to represent or assume
for Samsung Medison any warranty liability beyond that set forth herein.
Defective equipment shipped from you to Samsung Medison must be packed in the replacement cartons.
Shipping and insurance costs are the responsibility of the customer. To return defective material to Samsung
Medison contact the Samsung Medison Customer Service Department.
Samsung Medison or a local distributor will make available, upon request, circuit diagrams, a component parts
list, descriptions, calibration instructions and other information which will assist your appropriately qualified
technical personnel to repair those parts of the equipment which are designed by Samsung Medison as
repairable.
Subject to the applicable laws of the relevant territory, Samsung Medison reserves the right to accommodate
service requests by
(1) replacing the product presented for repair with a refurbished product of the same model or
(2) repairing the product with refurbished parts.
The refurbished products and parts shall be subject to the same inspection, quality control procedures as for
new products and parts.
CAUTION: United State federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of physicians.
Manufacturer: SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD.

3366, Hanseo-ro, Nam-myeon, Hongcheon-gun, Gangwon-do 25108, REPUBLIC OF KOREA
Customer Service Department: SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD.
Website: www.samsunghealthcare.com
EC Representative: Samsung Electronics GmbH
Am Kronberger Hang 6, 65824 Schwalbach am Taunus, GERMANY
United States Agent: NEUROLOGICA CORPORATION
14 Electronics Avenue, Danvers, MA 01923 USA
Service Center: +1 888-564-8561
PROPRIETARY INFORMATION AND SOFTWARE LICENSE
The Customer shall keep confidential all proprietary information furnished or disclosed to the
Customer by Samsung Medison unless such information has become part of the public domain
through no fault of the Customer. The Customer shall not use such proprietary information,
without the prior written consent of Samsung Medison, for any purpose other than the
maintenance, repair or operation of the goods.
Samsung Medison systems contain Samsung Medison proprietary software in machine-readable
form. Samsung Medison retains all its rights, title and interest in the software except that
purchase of this product includes a license to use the machine-readable software contained
in it. The Customer shall not copy, trace, disassemble or modify the software. Transfer of this
product by the Customer shall constitute a transfer of this license that shall not be otherwise
transferable. Upon cancellation or termination of this contract or return of the goods for reasons
other than repair or modification, the Customer shall return to Samsung Medison all such
proprietary information.
Safety Standards
Classifications
X Type of protection against electrical shock: Class I or Internally powered ME equipment
X Degree of protection against electrical shock (when the patient is in physical contact):
Type BF applied part (Probes), Defibrillation-Proof Type CF applied part (ECG)
X Degree of protection against the ingress of harmful liquids: Ordinary equipment
(Ultrasound System), IPX7 (Probes), IPX8 (Foot Switch)
X Degree of safety of use in the presence of flammable anesthetic agent mixed with air,
oxygen, or nitrous oxide: Not suitable for use near flammable anesthetic agent mixed
with air, oxygen, or nitrous oxide
X Mode of operation: Continuous operation
Electromechanical Safety Standards Met

X Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Basic Safety and
Essential Performance [IEC 60601-1]
X Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements for Basic Safety and
Essential Performance [ANSI/AAMI ES60601-1]
X Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1-2: General Requirements for Basic Safety and
Essential Performance – Collateral Standard: Electromagnetic Compatibility –
Requirements and Tests [IEC 60601-1-2]
X Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 1-6: General Requirements for Basic Safety and
Essential Performance – Collateral Standard: Usability [IEC 60601-1-6]
X Medical Electrical Equipment, Part 2-37: Particular Requirements for the Basic Safety
and Essential Performance of Ultrasonic Medical Diagnostic and Monitoring Equipment
[IEC 60601-2-37]
X Medical Devices – Application of Risk Management to Medical Devices [ISO 14971]
X Biological Evaluation of Medical Devices, Part 1: Evaluation and Testing within a Risk
Management Process [ISO 10993-1]
Statements
The Nemko-CCL mark with “C” and “US” identifiers indicates that
the product is compliant with and certified to the applicable U.S.
and Canadian standards.
This mark certifies that the product conforms to applicable EEC

standards and has been certified by the European certification
agency.
This mark certifies that the product conforms to applicable EEC

standards.
The GMP symbol indicates the Good Manufacturing Practice in

accordance with the Korean quality management regulations.
Precautions for Use
You should be familiar with all of these areas before attempting to use this manual or your
ultrasound system.
X Please keep this user guide close to the product as a reference when using the system.
X For safe use of this product, you should read ‘Safety’ and ‘Maintenance’ in this manual, prior to
starting to use this system.
X This manual does not include diagnosis results or opinions. Also, check the measurement
reference for each application’s result measurement before making the final diagnosis.
X This product is an ultrasound scanner and cannot be used from a user’s PC. We are not
responsible for errors that occur when the system software is run on a user’s PC.
X Only medical doctors or persons supervised by medical doctors should use this system.
Persons who are not qualified must not operate this product.
X The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage to this product caused by carelessness
and/or neglect by the user.
X Please note that orders are based on the individually agreed specifications and may not
contain all features listed in the user manual.
X It might be possible that some features, options or probes are NOT available in some
countries.
X All references to standards/regulations and their revisions are valid for the time of
publication of the user manual.
X The figures in the user manual for illustrational purposes only and may be different from what
you see on the screen or device.
X Information contained in this user manual is subject to change without prior notice.
X Products that are not manufactured by Samsung Medison are marked with the trademark of
their respective copyright holders.
X Revised versions of this manual will be published to reflect any upgrades to the product.
Please make sure that your operation manual is appropriate for your product version.
X Please download the latest user manual from the company website at:
http://www.samsunghealthcare.com
1. After signing up on the website, you can download the multilingual manual files by
entering the Serial Number of the product, found on the ID Label on the back of the
product purchased, in the Download section.
2. Product names and Revision numbers are indicated on the cover of all manuals. Please
make sure that the manual you want matches the product’s Revision number before
selecting your language.
Should you have questions regarding the product, please contact Samsung Medison’s
Customer Service Department or your local vendor, or visit the following website.
X Website: http://www.samsunghealthcare.com
DANGER: Disregarding this instruction may result in death, serious injury, or other dangerous
situations.
WARNING: Follow these instructions to prevent a serious accident or damage to property.
CAUTION: Follow these instructions to prevent a minor accident or damage to property.
NOTE: The accompanying information covers installation, operation, and maintenance

procedures that require careful attention from the user but have little chance of directly
leading to a dangerous situation.
Revision History
The revision history of this manual is as follows.
VERSION DATE NOTE
v2.05.00-00 2023.06.30 SW Improvement
Product Upgrade and Manual Update

Samsung Medison Ultrasound is committed to innovation and continued improvement. Upgrades
may be announced that consist of hardware or software improvements. Updated manuals will
accompany those system upgrades.
Check if this version of the manual is correct for the system version. If not, please contact the
Customer Service Department.
If You Need Assistance

If you need any assistance with the equipment, like the service manual, please contact the
Samsung Medison Customer Service Department or one of their worldwide customer service
representatives, immediately.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Safety
Indications for Use....................................................................................................1-3
Contraindications....................................................................................................................................1-3
Safety Information.................................................................................................. 1-4

Guidelines for Safe Usage......................................................................................................................1-4
Safety Symbols........................................................................................................................................1-5
Labels........................................................................................................................................................ 1-7
Electrical Safety....................................................................................................... 1-8

Prevention of Electric Shocks...............................................................................................................1-8
ECG-Related Information....................................................................................................................1-10
ESD..........................................................................................................................................................1-10
EMI............................................................................................................................................................1-11
EMC...........................................................................................................................................................1-11
Mechanical Safety..................................................................................................1-21
Moving the Equipment......................................................................................................................... 1-21
Precautions for Use...............................................................................................................................1-22
Biological Safety.................................................................................................... 1-24

ALARA Principle....................................................................................................................................1-24
Protecting the Environment................................................................................. 1-40
13
User Manual
Chapter 2 Introduction
Product Specifications............................................................................................ 2-3
Product Configuration............................................................................................ 2-8
Monitor....................................................................................................................................................2-10
Control Panel.........................................................................................................................................2-12
Console...................................................................................................................................................2-19
Peripheral Devices............................................................................................................................... 2-22
Probes.....................................................................................................................................................2-27
Accessories........................................................................................................................................... 2-28
Optional Functions.............................................................................................................................. 2-29
Chapter 3 Utilities
Setup........................................................................................................................ 3-3
System..................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Imaging...................................................................................................................................................3-19
Application............................................................................................................................................ 3-27
Measurement........................................................................................................................................ 3-29
Report....................................................................................................................................................3-48
Annotation............................................................................................................................................ 3-52
BodyMarker........................................................................................................................................... 3-57
Customize...............................................................................................................................................3-61
Peripherals............................................................................................................................................ 3-66
Connectivity...........................................................................................................................................3-72
Service................................................................................................................................................... 3-96
Help........................................................................................................................................................ 3-96
ECG (Option)........................................................................................................... 3-97

EzCompare™..........................................................................................................3-99
StressEcho (Option).............................................................................................3-100
Setting up a Protocol.........................................................................................................................3-100
Starting a Protocol and Acquiring Images..................................................................................... 3-105
Reviewing an Image........................................................................................................................... 3-111
14
Table of Contents
Strain+ Image (Option).........................................................................................3-117

Strain+...................................................................................................................................................3-118
Auto EF..................................................................................................................................................3-125
TMAD.................................................................................................................................................... 3-132
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Operational Environment Safety........................................................................... 4-3
Maintenance............................................................................................................4-4
Management cycle................................................................................................................................ 4-4
Cleaning and Disinfection.................................................................................................................... 4-6
Electrical Safety Check........................................................................................................................ 4-11
Accuracy Check...................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Battery Pack Management....................................................................................4-12

Replacing the Battery Pack.................................................................................................................4-12
Recharging the Battery Pack..............................................................................................................4-13
Disposing of the Battery Pack............................................................................................................4-13
Information Maintenance..................................................................................... 4-14

User Setting Backup............................................................................................................................ 4-14
Patient Information Backup............................................................................................................... 4-14
Software................................................................................................................................................ 4-14
Network..................................................................................................................................................4-15
Cybersecurity.........................................................................................................................................4-17
15
User Manual
Chapter 5 Probes
Probes....................................................................................................................... 5-3
Using Ultrasound Gel.......................................................................................................................... 5-28
Using Sheaths.......................................................................................................................................5-30
Probe Safety Precautions....................................................................................................................5-31
Using and Infection Control of the Probe........................................................................................ 5-32
Electric Shock....................................................................................................................................... 5-33
Cleaning, Disinfecting, and Sterilizing the Probe.......................................................................... 5-34
MPTEE Probe (Option)..........................................................................................................................5-51
Biopsy..................................................................................................................... 5-59
Biopsy Kit Components.......................................................................................................................5-60
Using Biopsy Kit....................................................................................................................................5-61
Assembling the Biopsy Kit................................................................................................................. 5-64
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Biopsy Kit........................................................................................ 5-69
Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

System Power.......................................................................................................... 6-3
Powering On........................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Powering Off........................................................................................................................................... 6-5
Probes and Applications......................................................................................... 6-6

Selecting Probes and Applications......................................................................................................6-7
Creating UserPreset...............................................................................................................................6-7
Modifying UserPreset............................................................................................................................6-7
Deleting UserPreset...............................................................................................................................6-7
Patient Information................................................................................................. 6-8

Patient Information for Each Application.........................................................................................6-13
Searching Patient Information..........................................................................................................6-20
16
Table of Contents
Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Information...............................................................................................................7-3
Basic Mode................................................................................................................7-6
2D Mode....................................................................................................................................................7-6
S-Detect™ for Breast............................................................................................................................7-29
S-Detect™ for Thyroid......................................................................................................................... 7-40
M Mode.................................................................................................................................................. 7-54
Color Doppler Mode..............................................................................................................................7-56
Power Doppler Mode............................................................................................................................ 7-61
PW Spectral Doppler Mode................................................................................................................. 7-63
CW Spectral Doppler Mode..................................................................................................................7-69
TDI Mode................................................................................................................................................. 7-71
TDW Mode.............................................................................................................................................. 7-72
ElastoScan™ Mode...............................................................................................................................7-73
MV-Flow™..............................................................................................................................................7-81
Combined Mode..................................................................................................... 7-84

2D/C/PW Mode..................................................................................................................................... 7-84
2D/PD/PW Mode.................................................................................................................................. 7-84
2D/C/CW Mode..................................................................................................................................... 7-84
2D/C/M Mode........................................................................................................................................ 7-84
2D/TDI/TDW Mode............................................................................................................................... 7-85
Dual Live Mode..................................................................................................................................... 7-85
Multi-Image Mode................................................................................................. 7-86

Dual Mode............................................................................................................................................. 7-86
Quad Mode.............................................................................................................................................7-87
3D/4D Mode........................................................................................................... 7-88

3D Stand By............................................................................................................................................7-96
3D View – MPR.................................................................................................................................... 7-100
Orientation Dot................................................................................................................................... 7-110
Render Setup....................................................................................................................................... 7-110
VOCAL (Virtual Organ Computer Aided analysis).......................................................................... 7-114
3D XI...................................................................................................................................................... 7-121
XI VOCAL............................................................................................................................................... 7-131
17
User Manual
XI STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)................................................................................7-138

3D MXI...................................................................................................................................................7-142
RealisticVue™...................................................................................................................................... 7-152
CrystalVue™........................................................................................................................................7-154
Chroma.................................................................................................................................................7-156
Preset.................................................................................................................................................... 7-157
5D NT™.................................................................................................................................................7-158
5D Follicle™......................................................................................................................................... 7-161
5D Heart Color™.................................................................................................................................7-164
Slab 3D..................................................................................................................................................7-166
Chapter 8 Measurements
Measurement Accuracy........................................................................................... 8-3
Causes of Measurement Errors........................................................................................................... 8-3
Optimization of Measurement Accuracy........................................................................................... 8-5
Measurement Accuracy Table...............................................................................................................8-7
Basic Measurements............................................................................................... 8-9

Distance Measurement........................................................................................................................8-13
Circumference and Area Measurement........................................................................................... 8-23
Volume Measurement......................................................................................................................... 8-26
Measurements by Application.............................................................................. 8-29

Things to Note...................................................................................................................................... 8-29
Common Measurement Methods...................................................................................................... 8-33
OB Measurements .............................................................................................................................. 8-38
Fetal Heart Measurements................................................................................................................ 8-47
Gynecology Measurements................................................................................................................8-50
Cardiac Measurements....................................................................................................................... 8-53
Abdomen Measurements................................................................................................................... 8-67
Pediatric Hips Measurements............................................................................................................ 8-69
Urology Measurements........................................................................................................................8-71
Small Parts Measurements.................................................................................................................8-72
Musculoskeletal Measurements........................................................................................................8-76
Vascular Measurements......................................................................................................................8-77
18
Table of Contents
Reports...................................................................................................................8-86
Viewing Reports ..................................................................................................................................8-86
Report Preview..................................................................................................................................... 8-87
Editing Report (Worksheet)...............................................................................................................8-90
Adding Comments............................................................................................................................... 8-93
Print Reports......................................................................................................................................... 8-95
Saving Reports..................................................................................................................................... 8-95
Store SR................................................................................................................................................. 8-96
Images.................................................................................................................................................... 8-96
OB Graph...............................................................................................................................................8-98
Description.......................................................................................................................................... 8-103
Closing Reports.................................................................................................................................. 8-105
Chapter 9 Image Managements

Cine/Loop................................................................................................................. 9-3
Annotating Images.................................................................................................. 9-5
Annotation ............................................................................................................................................. 9-5
BodyMarker .......................................................................................................................................... 9-10
Saving, Playing and Transferring Images.............................................................9-12

Saving Images.......................................................................................................................................9-12
Playing Images......................................................................................................................................9-13
Transferring Images.............................................................................................................................9-14
Printing Images..................................................................................................... 9-15

Printing Images.....................................................................................................................................9-15
SonoView Mode..................................................................................................... 9-16

Exam List................................................................................................................................................9-17
Review – Exam Mode............................................................................................................................9-19
Review – Compare Mode.................................................................................................................... 9-23
DICOM Q/R............................................................................................................................................ 9-29
19
User Manual
Chapter 10 Appendix
Beyond Experience™.......................................................................................................................... 10-3
Cybersecurity........................................................................................................................................ 10-3
Crystal Clear Cycle™........................................................................................................................... 10-3
CrystalLive™......................................................................................................................................... 10-3
Dynamic Vision™................................................................................................................................. 10-4
Ergonomic Transducer Design........................................................................................................... 10-4
Low Noise.............................................................................................................................................. 10-4
Measure Navigation............................................................................................................................ 10-4
Solid State Drive (SSD)........................................................................................................................ 10-4
S-Vue Transducer™............................................................................................................................. 10-5
WideScreen........................................................................................................................................... 10-5
Reference Manual
A Reference Manual (English) is supplied with this product.
20
Chapter 1
Safety
Indications for Use....................................1-3

Contraindications.....................................................1-3
Safety Information...................................1-4
Guidelines for Safe Usage...................................... 1-4
Safety Symbols.........................................................1-5
Labels......................................................................... 1-7
Electrical Safety.......................................1-8
Prevention of Electric Shocks............................... 1-8
ECG-Related Information......................................1-10
ESD............................................................................1-10
EMI............................................................................ 1-11
EMC........................................................................... 1-11
Mechanical Safety..................................1-21
Moving the Equipment..........................................1-21
Precautions for Use................................................1-22
Biological Safety.....................................1-24
ALARA Principle.................................................... 1-24
Protecting the Environment................ 1-40

Chapter 1 Safety
Indications for Use

The ultrasound diagnostic system and probes are designed to obtain ultrasound images and
analyze body fluids.
The clinical applications include: Fetal/Obstetrics, Abdominal, Gynecology, Pediatric, Small
Organ, Neonatal Cephalic, Adult Cephalic, Trans-rectal, Trans-vaginal, Muscular-Skeletal
(Conventional, Superficial), Urology, Cardiac Adult, Cardiac Pediatric, Trans-esophageal (Cardiac)
and Peripheral vessel.
NOTE: For detailed information on applications and presets, please refer to ‘Introduction’ and
‘Probes’ in this user manual.
Contraindications
This product must not be used for ophthalmological applications, or any other use that involves
the ultrasound beam passing through the eye.
CAUTION:
X Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
X The method of application or use of the device is described in the manual ‘Starting Modes
of Operation’ and ‘Modes of Operation’.
1-3
User Manual
Safety Information
Please read the following safety information before using this product. It is relevant to the
ultrasound system, the probes, the recording devices, and any of the optional equipment.
Guidelines for Safe Usage

DANGER:
X This product is intended for use by, or by the order of, and under the supervision of, a
licensed physician who is qualified for direct use of medical devices.
X This product must not be used for ophthalmological applications, or any other use that
involves the ultrasound beam passing through the eyeball.
CAUTION:
X The manufacturer is not responsible for any injury or damage that may result from using
the product for purposes not specified or not following the safety information.
X Make sure that you use the three-dimensional ultrasound diagnostic imaging system for
its intended purposes only, since using it for a long period of time for purposes other than
diagnosing the fetus, such as keepsake images or videos, may have an adverse effect on
the fetus.
X According to the IEC 60601-2-37 Annex CC, when used for cardiac scanning, the lung
surfaces may be exposed to ultrasonic beam; therefore, recommend minimizing the MI
value.
X Detergents or disinfectants may cause skin irritation. Avoid leaving residues on the
product.
1-4
Chapter 1 Safety
Safety Symbols
These are safety and notice symbols for medical electronic equipment. The International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) has established the part of the symbols.
Symbols Description Symbols Description
WARNING: Warnings to prevent

a serious accident, or damage to Print remote output
property
CAUTION: Precautions to
prevent a minor accident or Foot switch port
damage to property
Refer to the user manual. ECG port
Follow the user manual. USB port
CAUTION: Risk of electric shock Network port
Type BF applied part

Dripping-proof device: Protected
(Classification based on degree
against vertically falling water
of protection against electric
drops
hazard)
Defibrillation-proof type CF Immersion-proof device:

applied part (Classification Protected against the effects of
based on degree of protection non-continuous immersion in
against electric hazard) water
Submersion-proof device:
Power on/off Protected against the effects of
continuous immersion in water
CAUTION: Electrostatic sensitive

Power on
devices (ESD)
Power off Do not sit on the product.
Power on for part of the product Do not push the product.
1-5
User Manual
Power off for part of the product Do not lean against the product.
Be mindful of the space. Do not

Alternating current voltage
place a finger, and or any part of
source
your body in the space.
DANGER: Do not place your

Direct current voltage source fingers, hands, or any parts of
your body in the space.
Dangerous voltage (Indicates Do not place objects heavier

dangerous voltages over 1000V than the weight specified next to
AC or 1500V DC) the symbol.
Do not place heavy objects on

Protective earth (ground) the monitor while the monitor
mount is folded.
Do not push down on the

Equipotentiality monitor while the monitor
mount is folded.
Federal law restricts this device

Data output port to sale by or on the order of a
physician.
The Authorized European

Data input port Representative’s address is
provided.
The Swiss Authorized

Microphone port Representative’s address is
provided.
The manufacturer’s name and

Probe port
address are provided.
This equipment is a medical

Data input/output port
device.
Input port Consult the latest information.
1-6
Chapter 1 Safety
Indicates the need for the user to

consult electronic instructions
for use.
Output port
(You can access to it by pressing
help on the product or download
www.samsunghealthcare.com
it from the website.)
Labels
Phrases containing the words ‘WARNING’ and/or ‘CAUTION’ are displayed on the product’s
surface in order to protect it.
1-7
User Manual
Electrical Safety
This product is categorized as a Class I device.
CAUTION:
X As for US requirement, the LEAKAGE CURRENT might be measured from a center-tapped
circuit when the equipment connects in the United States to 240V supply system.
X To help assure grounding reliability, connect to a “hospital grade” or “hospital only”
grounded power outlet.
Prevention of Electric Shocks

In a hospital environment, hazardous current can form due to potential differences between
exposed conductive parts and connected devices. The solution to the problem is consistent
equipotential bonding. Medical equipment is connected with connecting leads made up of
sockets which are angled to the equipotential bonding network in medical rooms.
[Figure 1.1 Equipotential Bonding]
Additional equipment connected to medical electrical equipment must comply with the
respective IEC standards (e.g. IEC 60950/EN 60950 for data processing equipment, IEC 60601-1/
EN 60601-1/ANSI AAMI ES60601-1 for medical devices). Furthermore, all configurations shall
comply with the requirements for medical electrical systems (see IEC 60601-1/EN 60601-1/
ANSI AAMI ES60601-1). Anybody connecting additional equipment to signal input and output
ports of medical electrical equipment should make sure that the equipment complies with
IEC 60601-1/EN 60601-1/ANSI AAMI ES60601-1.
1-8
Chapter 1 Safety
WARNING:
X Electric shock may result if this system, including all of its externally mounted recording
and monitoring devices, is not properly grounded.
X Never open the cover of the product. Hazardous voltages are present inside. All internal
adjustments and replacements must be made by qualified Samsung Medison Customer
Support Department personnel.
X Always check the product’s housing, cables, cords, and plugs before using the product.
Disconnect the power source and do not use the equipment if the housing is damaged
such as cracked, and chipped, or if the cable is worn.
X Always disconnect the system from the wall outlet prior to cleaning the system.
X All patient-contact devices, such as probes, must be detached from the patient prior to
using a high-voltage defibrillator.
X The use of flammable anesthetic gas or oxidizing gases (N2O) should be avoided. There is a
risk of explosion.
X Avoid installing the system in such a way that it is difficult for the operator to disconnect it
from the power source.
X Do not use together with HF surgical equipment. HF surgical equipment may be damaged,
which may result in fire.
X The system must only be connected to a supply mains with protective earth to avoid risk
of electric shock.
CAUTION:
X The system has been designed for 100-240VAC; you should select the input voltage of any
connected printer and VCR. Prior to connecting a peripheral power cord, verify that the
voltage indicated on the power cord matches the voltage rating of the peripheral device.
X An isolation transformer protects the system from power surges. The isolation transformer
continues to operate when the system is in standby.
X Do not immerse the cable in liquids. Cables are not waterproof.
X Make sure that the inside of the system is not exposed to or flooded with liquids. In such
cases, fire, electric shock, injury, or damage to the product may occur.
X The auxiliary socket outlets installed on this system are rated 100-240VAC with maximum
total load of 150VA. Use these outlets only for supplying power to equipment that is
intended to be part of the ultrasound system. Do not connect additional multiple-socket
outlets or extension cords to the system.
X Do not connect any peripheral devices that are not listed in this manual to the auxiliary
socket outlet of the system. It may cause an electrical hazard.
X Do not touch SIP/SOP and the patient simultaneously. There is a risk of electric shock
from leakage current.
1-9
User Manual
ECG-Related Information
WARNING:
X This device is not intended to provide a primary ECG monitoring function, and therefore
does not have means of indicating an inoperative electrocardiograph.
X Do not use ECG electrodes with HF surgical equipment. HF surgical equipment may be
damaged, which may result in fire.
X Do not use ECG leads and electrodes in an operating room.
CAUTION: Using ECG electrodes with a cardiac pacemaker or an electrical stimulator at the
same time may cause interference with the ECG signals.
ESD
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), commonly referred to as a static shock, is a naturally occurring
phenomenon. ESD is most prevalent during conditions of low humidity, which can be caused by
heating or air conditioning. The static shock or ESD is a discharge of the electrical energy build-
up from a charged individual to a less or non-charged individual or object. An ESD occurs when
an individual with an electrical energy build-up comes into contact with conductive objects such
as metal doorknobs, file cabinets, computer equipment, and even other individuals.
CAUTION:
X The level of electrical energy discharged from a system user or patient to an ultrasound
system can be significant enough to cause damage to the system or probes.
X Always perform the pre-ESD preventive procedures before using connectors marked with
the ESD warning label.
– Apply anti-static spray to carpets or linoleum.
– Use anti-static mats.
– Ground the product to the patient table or bed.
X It is highly recommended that the user be given training on ESD-related warning symbols
and preventive procedures.
1-10
Chapter 1 Safety
EMI
Although this system has been manufactured in compliance with existing EMI (ElectroMagnetic
Interface) requirements, use of this system in the presence of an electromagnetic field can cause
degradation of the ultrasound image or product damage.
If this occurs often, Samsung Medison suggests a review of the environment in which the system
is being used, to identify possible sources of radiated emissions. These emissions could be from
other electrical devices used within the same room or an adjacent room. Communication devices
such as cellular phones and pagers can cause these emissions. The existence of radios, TVs, or
microwave transmission equipment nearby can also cause interference.
CAUTION: In cases where EMI is causing disturbances, it may be necessary to relocate this
system.
EMC
Testing of the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) of this system has been performed according
to the international standard for EMC with medical devices (IEC 60601-1-2). This IEC standard
was adopted in Europe as the European norm (EN 60601-1-2).
Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration – Electromagnetic Emission

This product is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of this product should ensure that it is used in such an environment.
Emission Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance
The Ultrasound System uses RF energy only for its internal

RF Emission functions. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are
Group 1
CISPR 11 not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.
RF Emission
Class A
CISPR 11
The Ultrasound System is suitable for use in all
Harmonic Emission establishments other than domestic and those directly
Class A
IEC 61000-3-2 connected to the public low-voltage power supply network
that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Flicker Emission
Complies
IEC 61000-3-3
1-11
User Manual
Approved Cables, Probes and Peripherals for EMC
Cables
Cables connected to this product may affect its emissions; use only the cable types and
lengths listed in the table below.
Cable Type Length
VGA Shielded Normal
USB Shielded Normal
LAN (RJ45) Twisted pair Any
S-Video Shielded Normal
Foot Switch Shielded 2.99m
Audio R.L Shielded Normal
Parallel Shielded Normal
HDMI Shielded Normal
MIC Unshielded Any
ECG 3-lead Shielded Normal
Probes
The image probe used with this product may affect its emission. The probe listed in
‘Probes’ when used with this product, have been tested to comply with the group1 Class A
emission as required by International Standard CISPR 11.
Peripherals
Peripherals used with this product may affect its emissions.
CAUTION: When connecting other customer-supplied accessories to the system, it is the

user’s responsibility to ensure the electromagnetic compatibility of the system.
WARNING: The use of cables, probes, and peripherals other than those specified may result in
increased emission or decreased Immunity of the Ultrasound System.
1-12
Chapter 1 Safety
IEC 60601 Test Electromagnetic Environment

Immunity Test Compliance Level
Level – Guidance
Floors should be wood,
concrete, or ceramic tile.
Electrostatic ±8 kV contact ±8 kV contact
Discharge (ESD) If floors are covered with
±2 kV, ±4 kV, ±8 kV, ±2 kV, ±4 kV, ±8 kV,
synthetic material, a relative
IEC 61000-4-2 ±15 kV air ±15 kV air
humidity of at least 30% is
recommended.
±2 kV (for power ± 2 kV (for power
Electrical fast Mains power quality should be
supply lines) supply lines)
transient/burst that of a typical commercial or
±1 kV (for input/ ± 1 kV (for input/
IEC 61000-4-4 hospital environment.
output lines) output lines)
±0.5 kV, ±1 kV ±0.5 kV, ±1 kV
Mains power quality should be
Surge differential mode differential mode
that of a typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-5 ±0.5 kV, ±1 kV, ±2 ±0.5 kV, ±1 kV, ±2
hospital environment.
kV common mode kV common mode
0% Uт (100% dip 0% Uт (100% dip Mains power quality should be

Voltage in Uт) for 0.5/1 in Uт) for 0.5/1 that of a typical commercial
dips, short cycles cycles or hospital environment. If the
interruptions, and user of this product requires
70% Uт (30% dip 70% Uт (30% dip
voltage variations continued operation during
in Uт) for 25/30 in Uт) for 25/30
on power supply power mains interruptions,
cyclesa cyclesa
input lines it is recommended that this
0% Uт (100% dip 0% Uт (100% dip product be powered from an
IEC 61000-4-11 in Uт) for 250/300 in Uт) for 250/300 uninterruptible power supply
cyclesa cyclesa or a battery.
Power frequency magnetic

Power frequency
fields should be at levels
magnetic field
30 A/m 30 A/m characteristic of a typical
(50/60 Hz)
commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-8
environment.
8 A/m 8 A/m
30 kHz CW 30 kHz CW
Proximity Modulation Modulation
magnetic field 65 A/m 65 A/m Magnetic field applies only to
immunity 134.2 kHz 134.2 kHz exterior surface or accessible
(9 kHz – 13.56 MHz) PM 2.1 kHz PM 2.1 kHz components in intended use.
IEC 61000-4-39 7.5 A/m 7.5 A/m
13.56 MHz 13.56 MHz
PM 50 kHz PM 50 kHz
NOTE: Uт is the main voltage (AC) prior to the application of the test level.
a
For example, 10/12 means 10 cycles at 50 Hz or 12 cycles at 60 Hz.
1-13
User Manual
IEC 60601 Compliance

Immunity Test Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance
Test Level Level
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz – equipment should not be used closer to any part
80 MHz of the Ultrasound System, including cables, than
the recommended separation distance. This is
Outside ISM
calculated using the equation applicable to the
bandsc
frequency of the transmitter.
6 Vrms 6 Vrms Recommended Separation Distance
150 kHz – 1.2
80 MHz
In ISM IEC 60601-1-2: 2007
bandsc
1.2 80 MHz to 800 MHz
2.3 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
IEC 60601-1-2: 2014

2.0 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m Where P is the transmitter’s maximum output
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz – power rating in watts (W) according to the
transmitter’s manufacturer and d is the
2.7 GHz
recommended separation distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmittersa, as
determined by an electromagnetic site survey,
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency rangeb.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not be applicable in some situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected
by absorption and reflection of structures, objects, and people.
a
F ield strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio, (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcasts, and TV broadcasts cannot be predicted
with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic
site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength, in the location in which the Ultrasound
System is used, exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the Ultrasound System should be
observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be
necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the Ultrasound System or using a shielded location with a
higher RF shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation.
b
hen the frequency range exceeds 150 kHz - 80 MHz, the electric field strength should be not higher than
W
3 V/m.
c
T he ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 MHz to 6.795MHz;
13.553 MHz to 13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz to 27.283 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz.
1-14
Chapter 1 Safety
Recommended Distance Between Wireless Communication Device and

this Product
This product is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment, in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of this product can help prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and
mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and this product. These distances
are recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
Separation Distance in Relation to Frequency of Transmitter [m]

Rated Maximum IEC 60601-1-2: 2007 IEC 60601-1-2: 2014
Output Power of
Transmitter 150 kHz – 80 MHz – 800 MHz – 150 kHz – 80 MHz –
[W] 80 MHz 800 MHz 2.5 GHz 80 MHz 2.7 GHz
1.2 1.2 2.3 1.2 2.0
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23 0.12 0.20
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73 0.38 0.63
1 1.2 1.2 2.3 1.2 2.0
10 3.8 3.8 7.3 3.8 6.3
100 12 12 23 12 20
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where p is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W), according
to the transmitter’s manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: T
hese guidelines may not be applicable in some situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection of structures, objects, and people.
1-15
User Manual
Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration – Electromagnetic Immunity

This product is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. Potrable RF communications equipments shoud be used no
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to any parts of the product. Otherwise, the performance of this
equipment could be degraded.
Banda IEC 60601 Compliance

Immunity Test Servicea Modulationb
(MHz) Test Level (V/m) Level (V/m)
Proximity fields Pulse
from RF wireless 380 – 390 TETRA 400 modulationb 27 27
communications 18 Hz
equipment
FMc
IEC 61000-4-3 GMRS 460
430 – 470 ±5 kHz deviation 28 28
FRS 460
1 kHz sine
Pulse
704 – 787 LTE Band 13, 17 modulationb 9 9
217 Hz
GSM 800/900
TETRA 800 Pulse
800 – 960 iDEN 820 modulationb 28 28
CDMA 850 18 Hz
LTE Band 5
GSM 1800
CDMA 1900 Pulse
1700 – 1990 GSM 1900 modulationb 28 28
DECT 217 Hz
LTE Band 1, 3, 4, 25 UMTS
Blue Tooth
WLAN Pulse
2400 – 2570 802.11 b/g/n modulationb 28 28
RFID 2450 217 Hz
LTE Band 7
Pulse
5100 – 5800 WLAN 802.11 a/n modulationb 9 9
217 Hz
NOTE: I f necessary to achieve the IMMUNITY TEST LEVEL, the distance between the transmitting antenna and the
ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM may be reduced to 1 m. The 1 m test distance is permitted by IEC 61000-4-3.
a
For Some services, only the uplink frequencies are included.
b
The carrier shall be modulated using a 50% duty cycle square wave signal.
c
s an alternative to FM modulation, 50% pulse modulation at 18 Hz may be used because while it does not
A
represent actual modulation, it would be worst case.
1-16
Chapter 1 Safety
WARNING:
X Use of this equipment adjacent to or stacked with other equipment should be avoided
because it could result in improper operation. If such use is necessary, this equipment
and the other equipment should be observed to verify that they are operating normally.
X Use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified or provided by the
manufacturer of this equipment could result in increased electromagnetic emissions or
decreased electromagnetic immunity of this equipment and result in improper operation.
X Portable RF communications equipment (including peripherals such as antenna cables
and external antennas) should be used no closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to any part of the
ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM, including cables specified by the manufacturer.
X Failure to use this equipment in the specified type of shielded location could result in
degradation of the performance of this equipment, interference with other equipment or
interference with radio services.
X This equipment has been tested for radiated RF immunity only at selected frequencies,
and use nearby of emitters at other frequencies could result in improper operation.
NOTE: The EMISSIONS characteristics of this equipment make it suitable for use in industrial
areas and hospitals (CISPR 11 Class A). If it is used in a residential environment (for which
CISPR 11 Class B is normally required) this equipment might not offer adequate protection to
radio-frequency communication services. The user might need to take mitigation measures,
such as relocating or re-orienting the equipment.
1-17
User Manual
Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance

It is recommended to use ultrasound systems in shielded locations offering RF shielding
effectiveness, with shielded cables. Field strengths outside the shielded location from fixed
RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, should be less than 3V/m.
It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded
location be verified to ensure that they meet the minimum specification.
CAUTION: If the system is connected to other customer-supplied equipment, such as a local

area network (LAN), Samsung Medison cannot guarantee that the remote equipment will
work correctly in the presence of electromagnetic emission phenomena.
1-18
Chapter 1 Safety
Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference

Typical interference on Ultrasound Imaging Systems varies depending on Electromagnetic
phenomena. Please refer to the following table:
Imaging Mode ESD1 RF2 Power Line3

For sector imaging probes,
white radial bands or
flashes in the centerlines of
White dots, dashes,
the image.
diagonal lines, or diagonal
2D For linear imaging
lines near the center of the
probes, white vertical
image.
bands, sometimes more
pronounced on the sides of
Change of operating the image.
mode, system
settings, or system Increase in the image White dots, dashes,
M reset. Brief flashes background noise or white diagonal lines, or increase
in the displayed or M mode lines. in image background noise
recorded image.
Color flashes, radial or
Color flashes, dots, dashes,
vertical bands, increase
Color or changes in the color
in background noise, or
noise level.
changes in color image.
Horizontal lines in the Vertical lines in the

spectral display or tones, spectral display, popping
Doppler
abnormal noise in the type noise in the audio, or
audio, or both. both.
1. ESD caused by discharging of electric charge build-up on insulated surfaces or persons.

2. RF energy from RF transmitting equipment such as portable phones, hand-held radios, wireless
devices, commercial radio and TV, and so on.
3. Conducted interference on powerlines or connected cables caused by other equipment, such as
switching power supplies, electrical controls, and natural phenomena such as lightning.
1-19
User Manual
A medical device can either generate or receive electromagnetic interference. The EMC
standards describe tests for both emitted and received interference.
Samsung Medison’s ultrasound products do not generate electromagnetic interference in
excess of standard levels established for such devices.
An Ultrasound System is designed to receive signals at radio frequency and is therefore
susceptible to interference generated by RF energy sources. Examples of other sources of
interference are medical devices, information technology products, and radio and television
transmission towers. Tracing the source of radiated interference can be a difficult task.
Customers should consider the following in an attempt to locate the source:
X Is the interference intermittent or constant?
X Does the interference show up only with one transducer operating at the same frequency
or with several transducers?
X Do two different transducers operating at the same frequency have the same problem?
X Is the interference present if the system is moved to a different location in the facility?
The answers to these questions will help determine if the problem resides with the system
or the scanning environment. After you answer the questions, contact the Samsung Medison
Customer Support Department.
1-20
Chapter 1 Safety
Mechanical Safety
Moving the Equipment
WARNING: Special caution should be taken during movement. Careless transportation of the
product may result in product damage or personal injury.
X Before transporting the product, check that the brakes on the wheels are unlocked. Also,
make sure to retract the monitor arm completely so that it is secured in a stationary position.
X Always use the handles at the back of the console and move the product slowly.
This product is designed to resist shocks. However, excessive shock, for example, if the product
falls over, may cause serious damage.
If the system operates abnormally after repositioning, please contact the Samsung Medison
Customer Support Department.
Precautions on Ramps
Always make sure that the control panel is facing the direction of movement.
WARNING: Be aware of the castors, especially when moving the system. Samsung Medison
recommends that you exercise caution when moving the product up or down ramps.
If you leave the product on an inclined surface, the product may fall over even if the brakes
are engaged. Do not rest the product on a ramp.
1-21
User Manual
Precautions for Use

CAUTION:
X Do not press the control panel excessively.
X Never attempt to modify the product in any way.
X Check the operational safety when using the product after a prolonged break in service.
X Make sure that other objects, such as metal pieces, do not enter the system.
X Do not block the ventilation slots.
X Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the product. Doing so might damage the cord and
cause the product to short-circuit, or the cord itself to break. Unplug the cord by pulling
on the plug itself.
X Excessive bending or twisting of cables on patient-applied parts may cause failure or
intermittent operation of the system.
X Improper cleaning or sterilization of a patient-applied part may cause permanent damage.
X Servicing the product, including repairs and replacement of parts, must be done by
qualified Samsung Medison service personnel. Assuming that the product is used in
accordance with the guidelines contained in this manual and maintained by qualified
service personnel, the expected service life of the product is approximately 7 years.
Please refer to ‘Maintenance’ for detailed information on protection, cleaning, and disinfecting
the equipment.
1-22
Chapter 1 Safety
Caution for Using Monitor

When adjusting the height or position of the monitor, be careful of the space in the middle of
the monitor arm. Catching your fingers or other body parts in it may result in injury.
[Figure 1.2 Safety Note for Monitor]
Caution for Using Control Panel
CAUTION:
X Do not push the control panel with excessive force or lean on it.
X Do not sit on the control panel or exert excessive force on it.
X Do not lift the product using the handles on the control panel.
When adjusting the height or position of the control panel, pay attention to the space
between the control panel and the lift. Catching your fingers or other body parts in it may
result in injury.
[Figure 1.3 Safety Note for Control Panel]
1-23
User Manual
Biological Safety
For safety instructions concerning probes and biopsies, refer to “Probes”.
WARNING:
X Ultrasound waves may have damaging effects on cells and, therefore, may be harmful to
the patient. If there is no medical benefit, minimize the exposure time and maintain the
ultrasound wave output level at low. Please refer to the ALARA principle.
X Do not use the system if an error message appears on the video display indicating that a
hazardous condition exists. Note the error code, turn off the power to the system, and call
Samsung Medison customer service department.
X Do not use a system that exhibits erratic or inconsistent functioning. Discontinuities in the
scanning sequence are indicative of a hardware failure that should be corrected before
use.
X The system limits the maximum contact temperature to 43 degrees Celsius, and the
ultrasonic wave output observes American FDA regulations.
ALARA Principle
Guidance for the use of diagnostic ultrasound is defined by the “As Low As Reasonably
Achievable“ (ALARA) principle. The decision as to what is reasonable has been left to the
judgment and insight of qualified personnel. No set of rules can be formulated that would
be sufficiently complete to dictate the correct response to every circumstance. By keeping
ultrasound exposure as low as possible, while obtaining diagnostic images, users can minimize
ultrasonic bioeffects.
Since the threshold for diagnostic ultrasound bioeffects is undetermined, it is the sonographer’s
responsibility to control the total energy transmitted into the patient. The sonographer must
reconcile exposure time with diagnostic image quality. To ensure diagnostic image quality and
limit exposure time, the Ultrasound System provides controls that can be manipulated during
the exam to optimize the results.
The ability of the user to abide by the ALARA principle is important. Advances in diagnostic
ultrasound, not only in the technology but also in its applications, have resulted in the need
for increased and improved information to guide the user. The output indices are designed to
provide that important information.
There are a number of variables, which affect the way in which the output display indices can be
used to implement the ALARA principle. These variables include mass, body size, location of the
bone relative to the focal point, attenuation in the body, and ultrasound exposure time. Exposure
time is an especially useful variable, because the user controls it. The ability to limit the index
values over time supports the ALARA principle.
1-24
Chapter 1 Safety
Applying ALARA
The system imaging mode used depends upon the information needed. 2D mode and M mode
imaging provide anatomical information, while Doppler, Power, and Color imaging provide
information about blood flow. Scanned modes, like 2D mode, Power, or Color, disperse or
scatter the ultrasonic energy over an area, while an unscanned mode, like M mode or Doppler,
concentrate the ultrasonic energy. Understanding the nature of the imaging mode being
used allows the sonographer to apply the ALARA principle with informed judgment. The
probe frequency, system set-up values, scanning techniques, and operator experience aid
the sonographer in meeting the ALARA principle. The decision as to the amount of acoustic
output is, in the final analysis, up to the system operator. This decision must be based on the
following factors: type of patient, type of exam, patient history, ease or difficulty of obtaining
diagnostically useful information, and the potential localized heating of the patient due to
probe surface temperatures. Prudent use of the system occurs when patient exposure is
limited to the lowest index reading for the shortest amount of time necessary to achieve
acceptable diagnostic results.
Although a high index reading does not mean that a biological effect is actually occurring,
it should be taken seriously. Every effort should be made to reduce the possible effects of a
high index reading. Limiting exposure time is an effective way to accomplish this goal.
There are several system controls that the operator can use to adjust the image quality and
limit the acoustic intensity. These controls are related to the techniques that an operator
might use to implement ALARA and can be divided into three categories: direct, indirect, and
receiver control.
Direct Controls
Application selection and the output intensity control directly affect acoustic intensity. There
are different ranges of allowable intensity or output depending on your selection. Selecting
the correct range of acoustic intensity for the application is one of the first things required
during any exam. For example, peripheral vascular intensity levels are not recommended for
fetal exams. Some systems automatically select the proper range for a particular procedure,
while others require manual selection. Ultimately, the user bears the responsibility for proper
clinical use. Samsung Medison systems provide both automatic and user-definable settings.
Output has direct impact on acoustic intensity. Once the application has been established,
the output control can be used to increase or decrease the output intensity. The output
control allows you to select intensity levels less than the defined maximum. Prudent use
dictates that you select the lowest output intensity consistent with good image quality.
1-25
User Manual
Indirect Controls
The indirect controls are those that have an indirect effect on the acoustic intensity. These
controls affect the imaging mode, pulse repetition frequency, focus depth, pulse length, and
probe selection.
The choice of imaging mode determines the nature of the ultrasound beam. 2D mode is a
scanning mode, Doppler is a stationary or unscanned mode. A stationary ultrasound beam
concentrates energy on a single location. A moving or scanned ultrasound beam disperses the
energy over a wide area and the beam is only concentrated on a given area for a fraction of
the time necessary in unscanned mode.
The pulse repetition frequency or rate refers to the number of ultrasound bursts of energy
over a specific period of time. The higher the pulse repetition frequency, the more pulses
of energy in a given period of time. Several controls affect pulse repetition frequency: focal
depth, display depth, sample volume depth, color sensitivity, number of focal zones, and
sector width controls.
The focus of the ultrasound beam affects the image resolution. To maintain or increase
resolution at a different focus requires a variation of output over the focal zone. This variation
of output is a function of system optimization. Different exams require different focal depths.
Setting the focus to the proper depth improves the resolution of the structure of interest.
Pulse length is the time during which the ultrasonic burst is turned on. The longer the pulse,
the greater the time-average intensity value. The greater the time-average intensity, the
greater the likelihood of temperature increase and cavitations. Pulse length, burst length or
pulse duration is the output pulse duration in Pulsed Doppler. Increasing the Doppler sample
volume, increases the pulse length.
Probe selection affects intensity indirectly. Tissue attenuation changes with frequency. The
higher the probe operating frequency, the greater the attenuation of the ultrasonic energy.
Higher probe operating frequencies require higher output intensity to scan at an increased
depth. To scan deeper at the same output intensity, a lower probe frequency is required. Using
more gain and output beyond a point, without corresponding increases in image quality, can
mean that a lower frequency probe is needed.
Receiver Controls
Receiver controls are used by the operator to improve image quality. These controls have
no effect on output. Receiver controls only affect how the ultrasound echo is received.
These controls include gain, TGC, dynamic range, and image processing. The important
thing to remember, relative to output, is that receiver controls should be optimized before
increasing output. For example; before increasing output, optimize gain to improve image
quality.
1-26
Chapter 1 Safety
Additional Considerations
Ensure that scanning time is kept to a minimum, and ensure that only medically required
scanning is performed. Never compromise quality by rushing through an exam. A poor exam
will require a follow-up, which ultimately increases the scanning time. Diagnostic ultrasound
is an important tool in medicine, and, like any tool, should be used efficiently and effectively.
Output Display Features

The system output display comprises two basic indices: a mechanical index and a thermal
index. The thermal index consists of the following indices: soft tissue (TIs), bone (TIb) and
cranial bone (TIc). One of these three thermal indices will be displayed at all times. The
thermal index to be displayed is determined by the system preset or user choice, depending
upon the application.
The mechanical index is continuously displayed over the range of 0.0 to 1.9, in increments of
0.1. The thermal index consists of the three indices, and only one of these is displayed all the
time. Each diagnostic probe application has a default selection. The TIb or TIs is continuously
displayed over its range of 0.0 to maximum output, based on the probe and application, in
increments of 0.1.
The default setting of the application-specific nature is also an important factor of index
selection. A default setting is a system control state which is preset by the manufacturer or
the operator. The system has default index settings for the probe application. The default
settings are applied automatically by the ultrasound system when the power is turned on,
new patient data is entered into the system database, or a change of application takes place.
The decision as to which of the three thermal indices to display should be based on the
following criteria:
Appropriate index for the application: TIs is used for imaging soft tissue, and TIb for a focus at
or near a bone. Some factors might create artificially high or low thermal index readings (e.g.
presence of fluid or bone, or the flow of blood). A highly attenuating tissue path, for example,
may cause the potential for local zone heating to be lower than the thermal index indicates.
The selection of scanned modes or unscanned modes of operation also affect the thermal
index. For scanned modes, heating tends to be near the surface; for unscanned modes, the
potential for heating tends to be deeper in the focal zone.
Always limit ultrasound exposure time. Do not rush the scanning. Ensure that the indices
are kept to a minimum, and that exposure time is limited without compromising diagnostic
sensitivity.
1-27
User Manual
Mechanical Index (MI) Display

Mechanical bioeffects are threshold phenomena that occur when a certain level of output
is exceeded. The threshold level varies, however, with the type of tissue. The potential
for mechanical bioeffects varies with peak pressure and ultrasound frequency. The
MI accounts for these two factors. The higher the MI value, the greater the likelihood
of mechanical bioeffects occurring. However, there is no specific MI value that means
that a mechanical bioeffect will actually occur. The MI should be used as a guide for
implementing the ALARA principle.
Thermal Index (TI) Display

The TI informs the user of potential temperature increase occurring on the body surface,
within body tissue, or at the point of focus of the ultrasound beam on bone. The TI is an
estimate of the temperature increase in specific body tissues. The actual amount of any
temperature rise is influenced by factors such as tissue type, vascularity, and modes of
operation. The TI should be used as a guide for implementing the ALARA principle.
The bone thermal index (TIb) informs the user about potential heating at or near the focus
after the ultrasound beam has passed through soft tissue or fluid, such as the skeletal
structure of a 2-3 month old fetus. The cranial bone thermal index (TIc) informs the user
about the potential heating of bone at or near the surface, for example, the cranial bone.
The soft tissue thermal index (TIs) informs the user about the potential for heating within
soft homogeneous tissue. TIc is displayed when you select a trans-cranial application.
You can select the TI to display at Setup > Imaging > Application/Preset > Thermal Index
Type.
Mechanical and Thermal Indices Display Precision and Accuracy

The Mechanical and Thermal Indices on the system are precise to 0.1 units.
The MI and TI display accuracy estimates for the system are given in the manual‘s Acoustic
Output Tables. These accuracy estimates are based on the variability ranges of probes and
systems, inherent acoustic output modeling errors, and the measurement variability, as
described below.
The displayed values should be interpreted as relative information to help the system
operator achieve the ALARA principle through prudent use of the system. The values
should not be interpreted as actual physical values of investigated tissue or organs.
The initial data that is used to support the output display is derived from laboratory
measurements based on the AIUM measurement standard. The measurements are then
put into algorithms to calculate the displayed output values.
1-28
Chapter 1 Safety
Many of the assumptions used in the process of measurement and calculation are
conservative in nature. Over-estimation of actual in situ exposure, for the vast majority
of tissue paths, is built into the measurement and calculation process. For example, the
acoustic output values measured underwater are derated using a conservative, industry
standard, attenuation coefficient of 0.3dB/cm-MHz.
Conservative values for tissue characteristics were selected for use in the TI models.
Conservative values for tissue or bone absorption rates, blood perfusion rates, blood heat
capacity, and tissue thermal conductivity were selected.
A steady state temperature rise is assumed in the industry standard TI models, and the
assumption is made that the ultrasound probe is held steady in one position long enough
for a steady state to be reached.
A number of factors are considered when estimating the accuracy of display values:
Hardware deviation, algorithm accuracy, and measurement deviation. Deviation among
probes and systems, in particular, is an important factor. Probe deviation results from
piezoelectric crystal efficiencies, process-related impedance differences, and sensitive
lens focusing parameter variations. Differences in the system pulser voltage control and
efficiencies are also a contributor to variability. There are inherent uncertainties in the
algorithms used for estimating acoustic output values over the range of possible system
operating conditions and pulser voltages. Inaccuracies in laboratory measurements are
related to differences in hydrophone calibration and performance, positioning, beam
alignment and digitization tolerances, and variability among test operators.
The conservative assumptions of the output estimation algorithms of linear propagation,
at all depths, through a 0.3 dB/cm-MHz attenuated model are not taken into account in
calculation of the accuracy estimate displayed. Neither linear propagation nor uniform
attenuation at the 0.3 dB/cm-MHz rate occurs in underwater measurements, or in
most tissue paths in the body. In the body, different tissues and organs have dissimilar
attenuation characteristics. In water, there is almost no attenuation. In the body, and
particularly in underwater measurements, non-linear propagation and saturation losses
occur as pulser voltages increase.
The display accuracy estimates take into account the variability ranges of probes and
systems, inherent acoustic output modeling errors, and the measurement variability.
Display accuracy estimates are measured according to AIUM measurement standards
but not based on errors caused during the measurement or inherent errors. They are also
independent of the effects of non-linear loss on the measured values.
1-29
User Manual
Control Effects – Controls Affecting the Indices

As various system controls are adjusted, the TI and MI values may change. This will be most
apparent as the Power control is adjusted; however, other system controls will also affect the
on-screen output values.
Power
Power controls the system acoustic output. Two real-time output values are on the screen:
a TI and a MI. They change as the system responds to Power adjustments.
In combined modes, such as simultaneous Color, 2D mode, and Pulsed Doppler, the total TI
is the sum of TIs of the individual modes. Each mode is a vital contributor to this total; the
displayed MI will be from the mode with the largest peak pressure.
2D Mode Controls
2D Mode Size
Narrowing the sector angle may increase the frame rate. This will increase the TI.
The pulser voltage may be automatically adjusted down by the software controls to keep
the TI below the system maximum. A decrease in pulser voltage will decrease MI.
Zoom
Increasing the zoom magnification may increase frame rate. This will increase the TI. The
number of focal zones may also increase automatically to improve the resolution. This
action may change the MI, since the peak intensity can occur at a different depth.
Number of Focal Zones

Increasing the number of focal zones may change both the TI and MI by automatically
changing the frame rate or focal depth. Lower frame rates decrease the TI. The MI
displayed will correspond to the focal zone with the largest peak intensity.
Focus
In general, higher MI values will occur when the focal depth is near the natural focus of the
probe (transducer).
1-30
Chapter 1 Safety
Color and Power Controls
Color Sensitivity
Increasing the color sensitivity may increase the TI. More time is required for the scanning
of color images. Color pulses are the dominant pulse type in this mode.
Color Sector Width

Narrowing color sector width will increase color frame rate as well as the TI. The system
may automatically decrease the pulser voltage to stay below the system maximum
allowable value. A decrease in pulser voltage will decrease the MI. If pulsed doppler is also
enabled, then pulsed doppler will remain as the primary mode and the TI change will be
minimal.
Color Sector Depth

Deeper color sector depth may automatically decrease color frame rate, or select a
new color focal zone or color pulse length. The TI will change due to the combination
of these effects. Generally, the TI will decrease with increased color sector depth. MI
will correspond to the peak intensity of the dominant pulse type, which is a color pulse.
However, if Pulsed Doppler is also enabled, then Pulsed Doppler will remain the dominant
mode and the TI change will be small.
Scale
Using the scale control to increase the color velocity range may increase the TI. The system
will automatically adjust the pulser voltage to stay below the system maximum allowable
value. A decrease in pulser voltage will also decrease MI.
2D Mode Size
A narrower 2D mode sector width in Color imaging will increase color frame rate. The TI
will increase. MI will not change. If Pulsed Doppler is also enabled, then Pulsed Doppler
will remain the dominant mode and the TI change will be small.
1-31
User Manual
M Mode and Doppler Controls
Simultaneous and Update Methods

Use of combination modes affects both the TI and MI through the combination of pulse
types. During Simultaneous mode, the TI is an ancillary element. During auto-update and
duplex, the TI will display the dominant pulse type. The displayed MI will be from the mode
with the largest peak pressure.
Sample Volume Depth

When the Doppler sample volume depth increases, the Doppler PRF decreases
automatically. A decrease in PRF will decrease TI. The system may also decrease the pulser
voltage to remain below the system maximum allowable value. A decrease in pulser
voltage will decrease MI.
Other
2D, Color, M Mode, PW and CW

When a new imaging mode is selected, both the TI and the MI will change to their default
settings. Each mode has a corresponding pulse repetition frequency and maximum
intensity point. In combined or simultaneous modes, the TI is the sum of the contribution
from the modes enabled, and the MI is the value for the focal zone of the mode with the
largest derated intensity. If a mode is turned off and then reselected, the system will
return to the previously selected settings.
Probe
Each probe model available has unique specifications for the contact area, beam shape,
and center frequency. Defaults are initialized when you select a probe. Samsung Medison’s
manufacturer default settings vary, depending on the probe, application, and mode
selected. Defaults have been chosen that are below the FDA limits for intended use.
Depth
An increase in the 2D mode depth will automatically decrease the 2D mode frame rate.
This would decrease the TI. The system may also automatically choose a deeper 2D mode
focal depth. A change of focal depth may change the MI. The MI displayed is that of the
zone with the largest peak intensity.
1-32
Chapter 1 Safety
Application
Acoustic output defaults are set when you select an application. Samsung Medison’s
manufacturer default settings vary, depending on the probe, application, and mode
selected. Defaults that are below the FDA limits have been chosen for intended use.
Related Guidance Documents

For more information about ultrasonic bioeffects and related topics, refer to the following;
X Medical Ultrasound Safety (AIUM, 2014).
X AIUM Consensus Report on Potential Bioeffects of Diagnostic Ultrasound: Executive
Summary, J. Ultrasound in Medicine, 2008, Vol. 27, Num. 4.
X WFUMB. Symposium on Safety of Ultrasound in Medicine: Conclusions and
Recommendations on Thermal and Non-thermal Mechanisms for Biological Effects.
Ultrasound in Med. & Biol; 1998, 24: Supplement 1.
X Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound (AIUM, 1993)
X Guidelines for the safe use of diagnostic ultrasound equipment. (BMUS, 2009)
X Information for Manufacturers Seeking Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound
Systems and Transducers (U.S. FDA - 2008)
X Particular requirements for the basic safety and essential performance of ultrasonic
medical diagnostic and monitoring equipment. (IEC, 2007)
X Acoustic Output Labeling Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (AIUM, 2008)
X Standard Means for the Reporting of the Acoustic Output of Medical Diagnostic Ultrasonic
Equipment. (IEC, 2007)
X Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices On
Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (AIUM/NEMA, 2004)
X Ultrasonics - Field characterization - Test methods for the determination of thermal and
mechanical indices related to medical diagnostic ultrasonic fields (IEC, 2005)
X Measurement and Characterization of Medical Ultrasonic Fields up to 40 MHz. (IEC, 2007)
X Ultrasonics - Power Measurements - Radiation Force Balances and Performance
Requirements. (IEC, 2006)
X Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment.
(AIUM/NEMA, 2004)
1-33
User Manual
Acoustic Output and Measurement

Since the first usage of diagnostic ultrasound, the possible human biological effects
(bioeffects) of ultrasound exposure have been studied by various scientific and medical
institutions. In October 1987, the American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine (AIUM) ratified
a report prepared by its Bioeffects Committee (Bioeffect Considerations for the Safety of
Diagnostic Ultrasound, J Ultrasound Med., Sept. 1988: Vol.7, No.9 Supplement), sometimes
referred to as the Stowe Report, which reviewed available data on possible effects of
ultrasound exposure. Another report, “Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound”, dated
January 28, 1993, provides more up to date information. In addition, periodically updated
reports on biological effects, results, and guidelines on safe usage have been published by
groups such as the WFUMB (World Federation of Ultrasound in Medicine and Biology), AIUM,
and BMUS.
The Acoustic output for this system has been measured and calculated in accordance with
the Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices On
Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (AIUM/NEMA, 2004) and Acoustic Output Measurement
Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (AIUM/NEMA, 2004).
1-34
Chapter 1 Safety
In Situ, Derated, and Water Value Intensities

All intensity parameters are measured in water. Since water does not absorb acoustic energy,
these water measurements represent the largest possible value. Biological tissue absorbs
acoustic energy. The true value of the intensity at any point depends on the amount and type
of tissue, and the frequency of the ultrasound that passes through the tissue. The intensity
value in the tissue, In Situ, has been estimated using the following formula:
In Situ = Water [e - (0.23 alf)]
Where: In Situ = In Situ Intensity Value
Water = Water Value Intensity
e = 2.7183
a = Attenuation Factor
Tissue a (dB/cm-MHz)
Brain 0.53
Heart 0.66
Kidney 0.79
Liver 0.43
Muscle 0.55
l = Skin line to measurement depth (cm)
f = Center frequency of the transducer/system/mode combination (MHz)
Since the ultrasonic path during an examination is likely to pass through varying lengths and
types of tissue, it is difficult to estimate the true In Situ intensity. An attenuation factor of
0.3 is used for general reporting purposes; therefore, the In Situ value is commonly reported
using this formula:
In Situ (derated) = Water [e - (0.069 lf)]
Since this value is not the true In situ intensity, the term “derated“ is used.
The maximum derated and maximum water values do not always occur under the same
operating conditions. Therefore, the reported maximum water and derated values may not be
related to the In Situ (derated) formula. For example, a multi-zone array transducer has the
greatest water value intensities at its deepest zone. The same transducer may have its largest
derated intensity at one of its shallowest focal zones.
1-35
User Manual
Terms and Symbols Related to Acoustic Output and Measurement

The terms and symbols used in the acoustic output tables are defined in the following
paragraphs.
fawf The ACOUSTIC WORKING FREQUENCY. Center frequency. (Unit: MHz)
Ipa,α at zpii,α The ATTENUATED PULSE-AVERAGE INTENSITY at the depth of maximum

ATTENUATED SPATIAL-PEAK TEMPORAL-AVERAGE INTENSITY. (Unit: Watts per
square centimeter)
Ita (z) The TEMPORAL-AVERAGE INTENSITY at axial distance z.

(Unit: Milliwatts per square centimeter)
Ita, α (z) The ATTENUATED TEMPORAL-AVERAGE INTENSITY at axial distance z.

(Unit: Milliwatts per square centimeter)
MI The MECHANICAL INDEX is a displayed parameter representing potential

cavitation bioeffects (Unit: N/A)
npps The number of acoustic pulses travelling along a particular ULTRASONIC SCAN
LINE.
P The time-average ultrasonic OUTPUT POWER radiated by the transducer for

the transmit pattern(s) associated with the reported Index. (Unit: mW)
P1x1 Maximum value of the time average acoustic output power emitted from any
one-centimeter square region of the active area of the transducer, the one-
centimeter square region having 1 cm dimensions in the x- and y-directions.
(Unit: mW)
Pr at zpii The PEAK-RAREFACTIONAL ACOUSTIC PRESSURE at the depth of maximum

SPATIAL-PEAK TEMPORAL-AVERAGE INTENSITY. (Unit: Megapascals)
Pr,α at zMI The ATTENUATED PEAK-RAREFACTIONAL ACOUSTIC PRESSURE associated

with the transmit pattern giving rise to the reported value of MI.
(Unit: Megapascals)
prr The reciprocal of the continuous PULSE REPETITION PERIOD at which it

represents the recorded MI value. (Unit: Pulses per second or Hz)
1-36
Chapter 1 Safety
srr The SCAN REPETITION RATE is reciprocal of the SCAN REPETITION PERIOD
when time interval between identical points on two successive frames,
sectors, or scans, applying to automatic scanning systems with a periodic scan
sequence only. (Unit: Pulses per second or Hz)
TIB The BONE THERMAL INDEX is a thermal index for applications such as fetal
(second and third trimester), in which the ultrasound beam passes through
soft tissue and a focal region is in the immediate vicinity of bone. (Unit: N/A)
TIC The CRANIAL BONE THERMAL INDEX is a thermal index for applications in
which the ultrasound beam passes through bone near the beam entrance into
the body, such as pediatric and adult cranial or neonatal cephalic applications.
(Unit: N/A)
TIS The SOFT TISSUE THERMAL INDEX is a thermal index related to soft tissues
including all body tissues and fluids except skeletal tissues. (Unit: N/A)
zb The distance where TIB_non-scan is determined. For non-scanned modes,

Distance along the beam axis to the plane where the product of the
ATTENUATED OUTPUT POWER and ATTENUATED TEMPORAL-AVERAGE
INTENSITY (Pα(z) x Ita,α(z)) maximizes, where z >= zbp. (Unit: cm)
zMI Depth on the BEAM-AXIS from the EXTERNAL TRANSDUCER APERTURE to the
plane of maximum ATTENUATED PULSE INTENSITY INTEGRAL (pii,α).
(Unit: cm)
zs The distance where TIS_non-scan is determined. The axial distance

corresponding to the location of max[min(Pα(z), Ita,α(z)x1 cm2)], where z >= zbp.
(Unit: cm)
zpii,α Position of maximum ATTENUATED SPATIAL-PEAK TEMPORAL-AVERAGE

INTENSITY for NONSCANNING MODE components, determined beyond the
BREAK-POINT DEPTH, zbp, on the BEAM-AXIS. (Unit: cm)
1-37
User Manual
Acoustic Measurement Precision and Uncertainty

The Acoustic Measurement Precision and Acoustic Measurement Uncertainty are described
below:
Quantity Precision Total Uncertainty
pii α (attenuated pulse intensity integral) 3.2% +21% to -24%
P (acoustic power) 6.2% ±19%
Pr,α (attenuated rarefaction pressure) 5.4% ±15%
fawf (acoustic working frequency) < 1% ±4.5%
Systematic Uncertainties
For the pulse intensity integral, attenuated rarefaction pressure, center frequency, and
pulse duration, the analysis includes considerations of the effects on accuracy of:
Hydrophone calibration drift or errors.
Hydrophone/Amp frequency response.
Spatial averaging.
Alignment errors.
Voltage measurement accuracy, including.
X Oscilloscope vertical accuracy.
X Oscilloscope offset accuracy.
X Oscilloscope clock accuracy.
X Oscilloscope Digitization rates.
X Noise.
The acoustic power is measured using a Radiation Force for systematic uncertainties
through the use of calibrated NIST acoustic power sources.
We also refer to a September 1993 analysis conducted by the working group of the
IEC technical committee 87 and prepared by K. Beissner, as a first supplement to IEC
publication 1161.
1-38
Chapter 1 Safety
The document includes analysis and discussion of the sources of error/measurement effects
due to:
X Balance system calibration.
X Absorbing (or reflecting) target suspension mechanisms.
X Linearity of the balance system.
X Extrapolation to the moment of switching the ultrasonic transducer (compensation for
ringing and thermal drift).
X Target imperfections.
X Absorbing (reflecting) target geometry and finite target size.
X Target misalignment.
X Ultrasonic transducer misalignment.
X Water temperature.
X Ultrasonic attenuation and acoustic streaming.
X Coupling or shielding foil properties.
X Plane-wave assumption.
X Environmental influences.
X Excitation voltage measurement.
X Ultrasonic transducer temperature.
X Effects due to nonlinear propagation and saturation loss.
Training
The users of this ultrasound system must familiarize themselves with the ultrasound
system to optimize the performance of the device and to detect possible malfunctions. It is
recommended that all users receive proper training before using the device. You can receive
training on the use of the product from the Samsung Medison service department, or any of
the customer support centers worldwide.
1-39
User Manual
Protecting the Environment

CAUTION:
X For disposal of the system or accessories that have come to the end of their service lives,
contact the vendor or follow appropriate disposal procedures.
X Waste must be disposed of in compliance with local regulations.
X The lithium ion battery used in the product must be replaced by a Samsung Medison
service engineer or an authorized dealer.
EU WEEE Directive
For Correct disposal of this product.

Please visit: http://www.samsung.com/weee.pdf
EU REACH Regulation
For information on Samsung’s environmental commitments and product specific regulatory
obligations e.g. REACH visit:
www.samsung.com/uk/aboutsamsung/sustainability/environment/our-commitment/data/
EU Battery Directive
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in countries with separate battery return systems.)
The marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the battery
in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste. Where
marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains
mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66.
The battery incorporated in this product is not user replaceable. For information
on its replacement, please contact your service provider. Do not attempt to
remove the battery or dispose it in a fire. Do not disassemble, crush, or puncture
the battery. If you intend to discard the product, the waste collection site will
take the appropriate measures for the recycling and treatment of the product,
including the battery.
1-40
Chapter 2
Introduction
Product Specifications............................ 2-3
Product Configuration............................ 2-8

Monitor.................................................................... 2-10
Control Panel..........................................................2-12
Console.....................................................................2-19
Peripheral Devices................................................ 2-22
Probes..................................................................... 2-27
Accessories............................................................. 2-28
Optional Functions................................................ 2-29
Product Specifications
Height: 1,345–1,685 mm (with Monitor)
Width: 525 mm
Physical Dimensions Depth: 750 mm (with Keyboard)
Weight: 79.8 kg (without accessories)
Weight: Approx. 98 kg (with Safe Working Load)
2D Mode
M Mode
Color Doppler Mode
Pulsed Wave (PW) Spectral Doppler Mode
Continuous Wave (CW) Spectral Doppler Mode
Tissue Doppler Imaging (TDI) Mode
Imaging Modes Tissue Doppler Wave (TDW) Mode
Power Doppler (PD) Mode
ElastoScan™ Mode
3D/4D Mode
Dual Mode
Quad Mode
Combined Mode
Gray Scale 256 (8 bits)
Transmit focusing, maximum of eight points (four points simultaneously

Focusing selectable)
Digital dynamic receive focusing (continuous)
2-3
User Manual
HS50/XH50
Linear Array
LA3-14AD, LA3-16A, LA2-9A, LA3-16AI, LA4-18BD
Curved Array
CA1-7AD, CA2-9AD, CA2-6BM, CF4-9, CA3-10A, CA4-10M
Endo Cavity
ER4-9, EVN4-9, EA2-11AR, EA2-11AV
Phased Array
PA3-8B, PE2-4, PA4-12B, PA1-5A
3D
CV1-8AD, V5-9, EV2-10A
CW
CW6.0, DP2B
TEE
MMPT3-7
HS60/XH60
Probes
(Type BF/IPX7) Linear Array
LA3-14AD, LA2-9A, LA3-16AI, LA4-18BD, LA3-16A
Curved Array
CA1-7AD, CA2-9AD, CA2-6BM, CF4-9, CA3-10A, CA4-10M
Endo Cavity
EA2-11B, VR5-9, EA2-11AR, EA2-11AV, ER4-9, EVN4-9
Phased Array
PA1-5A, PA3-8B, PA4-12B
3D
CV1-8AD, V5-9, EV2-10A
CW
CW6.0, DP2B, DP8B
TEE
MMPT3-7
NOTE: CW6.0 Probe is not supported for XH50 and XH60.
2-4
3 Probe Connectors, 4 Probe Connectors for option
NOTE:
HS50/XH50 HS60/XH60
Probe Connections
3 PORT O X
4 PORT O (Option) O
CW Probe Connector
Main Monitor
Number of Pixel: 1,920 x 1,080
21.5 inch LCD Monitor (LED Backlight unit, hereafter referred to as
“LCD monitor”)
Monitor
Touchscreen Monitor
Number of Pixel: 1,280 x 800
10.1 inch LCD Monitor (LED Backlight unit, hereafter referred to as
“LCD monitor”)
ECG USB Type (Defibrillation-proof type CF)
Audio Output Port (Right/Left)

VGA Monitor
Rear Panel
S-Video Output
Input/Output
LAN
Connections
USB Port
HDMI Output
Maximum 45,000 frames for Cine memory

Image Storage Maximum 14,000 Lines for Loop memory
Image filing system
Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology, Abdomen, Cardiac, Vascular, Small Parts,

Application
MSK, Pediatric
100-240VAC, 800VA, 50/60Hz

Electrical Parameters
Battery: 14.4VDC, 6900mAh
Abdomen, Obstetrics, Gynecology, MSK, Pediatric, Small Parts, Urology,

Measurement
Vascular, Cardiac, Fetal Heart
Packages
*R
efer to the ‘Measurements’ for additional information.
2-5
User Manual
Acoustic Power Control

Signal Processing Dynamic Aperture Control
(Pre-Processing) Dynamic Apodization Control
Dynamic LPF Control
Digital TGC Control

Slider TGC Control
Mode-Independent Gain Control
Black Hole/Noise Spike Filtering
1D Lateral/Axial Filtering
Signal Processing
2D Edge/Blurring Filtering
(Post-Processing)
Frame average
M/D Mode Sweep Speed Control
Zoom
Image View Area Control
Image Orientation (left/right and up/down)
Trackball operation of multiple cursors

X 2D Mode: Linear measurements and area measurements using elliptical
Measurement approximation or trace
X M Mode: Continuous readout of distance, time, and slope rate
X Doppler Mode: Velocity and trace
DVD Multi-Drive
Digital B/W Video Printer
Digital Color Video Printer
USB Printer
DVD Recorder
Auxiliary
Foot switch (IPX8)
USB Flash Memory Media
USB HDD
USB ECG
Monitor
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Russian, Chinese,

User Interface
Ukraine
Operating: 700 – 1060hPa

Pressure Limits
Storage: 700 – 1060hPa
2-6
Operating: 30 – 75%
Humidity Limits
Storage & Shipping: 20 – 90%
Operating: 10 – 35°C
Temperature Limits
Storage & Shipping: -25 – 60°C
2-7
User Manual
Product Configuration
This product consists of monitor, control panel, console, peripheral devices and probes.
1 Monitor
2 Monitor arm
3 Keyboard
1 2 4 Control panel
5 Lift
6 Probe holder
7 DVD drive
8 USB port
4
9 Speaker
0 Probe port
8
! Wheel
6 $
3 @ Location of ID Label
% # Brake
5
$ Gel warmer
7
% Internal peripheral
devices outlet
0 @
[Figure 2.1 Front of the Product]
2-8
1 Handle
2 Storage compartments
3 Ventilation
4 Rear panel
5 Power connection part
6 ID label
1
2
5
4
[Figure 2.2 Back of the Product]
2-9
User Manual
Monitor
Ultrasound images and other information are displayed on the color LCD monitor.
Screen Layout
The monitor displays ultrasound images, operation menus and a variety of other information.
5
4
[Figure 2.3 Monitor Display]
1 Title Area
Displays patient information, hospital name, application, frame rate, depth, probe
information, acoustic output information, and the current date and time.
2 Image Area
Displays ultrasound images. Image information, annotation, and measurement
information are also displayed.
3 Thumbnail Area
Images saved by pressing the preset Store button are shown in the thumbnails. When you
save Single screens, up to 4 images are shown in a list; for Quad screens, up to 12 images
are shown. Click it with the pointer to enlarge the preview image.
4 User Information and Status Information Area
Information that is useful to the user, such as current system status, image information,
selectable items, etc., is displayed.
2-10
BatteryAssist™
Tips!
BatteryAssist™ provides the system with battery power. It enables users to perform scans
and transport the ultrasound system to other locations in environments where AC power may
not be available temporarily.
Please check the battery capacity before use.
Icon Desciption Tool Tip Message
Charged (at least 81% charged)
Charging (61–80%)
Battery/‘Valid Capacity %’
Charging (41–60%)
Battery
55%
Charging (21–40%)
Remaining battery level (11–20%)
Remaining battery level (10% or below)
5 User Key (User Defined Key) Area

Settings for User Defined Keys, including the positions of Set and Exit buttons, are
displayed. You can change the setting of each button in Setup > Customize > Buttons.
NOTE: For information on User Key Setup, please refer to ‘Utilities’.
Principles of Operation of the Diagnostic Ultrasound System

Tips!
Medical ultrasound images are created by digital memory and computer when they convert
the high-frequency wave signals that are transmitted and received by the probe.
As ultrasound waves propagate through the human body, they generate reflected signals
whenever they encounter a change in density. For example, reflected signals are generated
when signals pass from fatty tissues to muscle tissues. Reflected signals return to the probe,
where they are converted into electronic signals. The reflected signals are amplified and
processed by analog and digital circuits that have filters for various frequencies and response
time options. Then they are again converted into high-frequency electronic signals, and
saved as a series of digital image signals. The monitor displays the image signals stored on
the storage device in real time.
The entire process of transmitting, receiving, and processing signals is controlled by the
computer.
2-11
User Manual
Control Panel
The system can be controlled by using the control panel.
[Figure 2.4 Control Panel]
The control panel consists of a keyboard, soft menus, buttons, dials, dial-buttons, a slider, and a
trackball.
The dial-button can be used both as a dial and a button.
2-12
Functions of the Control Panel

The following are the descriptions and instructions for the controls on the control panel. For
more information on controls with multiple functions, see ‘Utilities’ and later in this manual.
Button Turns the system on/off.

On/Off
Finishes the exam of the currently selected patient and resets the
Button
related data.
End Exam
Button Displays the screen for viewing and managing stored images.
SonoView
Displays the Report screen that shows the measurement results of the
Button
current application and other information.
Report
When you press the dial-button, the menu items that are available in
the current scan mode are shown on screen. Rotating the Menu dial-
Dial-button
button to the right selects the menu one row above the current menu
selected, and rotating it to the left selects the menu one row below.
X Marker: Allows the user to enter a BodyMarker over an image.
Dial-button
X Ref: Moves the reference slice horizontally in 3D View.
Adjusts the angle of the sample volume in Spectral Doppler mode.
Dial-button It is also used to adjust the Arrow’s angle or the probe angle for a
BodyMarker.
Button In this mode, only the image is displayed on the screen.
Button Compares four independent images.
Compares two independent images. The active image mode is on the

Button
left.
Compares two independent images. The active image mode is on the

Button
right.
Switch Adjusts the scanning depth of the image.
Switch Moves the focus to the target area for observation.
2-13
User Manual
Makes the Zoom Box appear.

Dial-button
In order to close the Zoom mode, press the Exit button.
Press this button to turn the QuickScan™ function on. The ‘Q Scan’
Button mark will appear at the top of an image. It can be used in applications
of all probes.
Button Pauses/resumes scanning.
Stands for User Key; functions can be assigned to these buttons as

Button desired. The function for each button can be assigned in Setup >
Customize > Buttons > User Key.
Start or end M Mode. Rotate this dial-button to adjust Gain. Also,

Dial-button turning this dial-button when in 3D View rotates the image along the
x-axis.
Press this button to start/stop PW Spectral Doppler mode. Rotate this
Dial-button dial-button to adjust Gain. Also, turning this dial-button, when in 3D
View rotates the image along the y-axis.
Press this button to start/stop Color Doppler mode. Rotate this dial-
Dial-button button to adjust Gain. Also, turning this dial-button when in 3D View
rotates the image along the z-axis.
Button Press this button to start/stop Power Doppler mode.
Press this button to start/stop CW Spectral Doppler mode.

Button
Available only with the phased array probe.
Press this button to start 2D mode. Rotate this dial-button to adjust

Dial-button
Gain.
Button Press this button to turn 3D/4D Mode on/off.
Set or Exit function may be assigned to this button. The function for
each button can be assigned in Setup > Customize > Set/Exit Key.
X Set: Select an item or value using the trackball. Also used to change
Button
the function of the trackball.
Set/Exit
X Exit: Exits the function currently being used and returns to the
previous state.
2-14
Deletes text, Arrow, BodyMarker, measurement results, etc. displayed

Button
on an image.
Clear
When this is pressed, an arrow marker appears to point to parts of the

Button
displayed image.
Pointer
Button Changes the current trackball function.

Change
Button Allows the user to place text on an image.
Button Starts measurements by application.

Calculator
Trackball Moves the cursor on the screen. Also scrolls through Cine images.
Trackball
2-15
User Manual
Keyboard
The keyboard is used to type in text.
[Figure 2.5 Keyboard]
Help Displays the Help Manual on the screen.
Patient Displays the General Information on the screen.
Patient Info. Shows or hides the patient information on the screen.
Image Info. Shows or hides the Image Parameters on the screen
DICOM Spooler Displays the DICOM Spooler on the screen.
Arrow Initiates Arrow mode.
Home Moves the cursor to the Home position in Annotation mode.
Set Home Specifies the Home position in Annotation mode.
Delete Word Deletes the last text entered in Annotation mode.
Delete All Deletes all the text that has been entered in Annotation mode.
Setup This displays the Setup screen.
Insert Select an input method.
Delete Deletes text.
Turns up the speaker volume.
Turns down the speaker volume.
2-16
Touchscreen
The touchscreen is an operating tool that can be touched by the user to input data. The
functions that are available in the current mode are shown in the form of buttons or a dial-
button.
Touchscreen Layout
4
3
[Figure 2.6 Touchscreen Display]
1 These buttons are always displayed on the touchscreen. Buttons that are in use are
shown in blue and buttons that cannot be used are deactivated.
The Patient Information screen will appear, where you can select a
Patient
Patient ID in the list or enter new patient information.
It displays the Probe Selection screen where you can select and modify
Probe
the probe and application.
With one touch, the user can select the most common transducer and
preset combinations. QuickPreset increases efficiency to make a full day
QuickPreset 1–4
of scanning simple and easy. It shows up to 4 Preset buttons configured
at Setup.
The general system settings that do not have a direct bearing on imaging
Setup
are explained below.
NOTE: For further details about setting up QuickPreset, please refer to ‘Setup > System >
QuickPreset’ in ‘Utilities’.
2-17
User Manual
2 Displays the mode that is currently used.

3 This is the TGC area. Adjust TGC Slide when TGC Curve is activated on the touchscreen.
Move the slider to the right to increase Gain and brighten the image. TGC stands for
Time Gain Compensation.
CAUTION: Too great a difference in the gain value settings of adjacent TGC sliders may cause
stripes in an image.
4 Menu Area: The menu items that are available in the current input mode are shown
in the form of buttons. The user can access the desired menu item by pressing the
corresponding button. The menu currently in use is shown in blue. To change the values
in the menu, use the ◁ and ▷ buttons.
5 Soft Menu Area: The Soft Menu items that are available in the current input mode are
shown. Press or rotate the dial-buttons right below each menu.
When there are Two Soft Menus

Tips!
When there are two menus available – upper and lower, both menus can be adjusted with
the corresponding dial-button. Or tap the button for the menu you want to use on the
touchscreen and then use the dial-button.
Adjusting the Control Panel
CAUTION:
X Do not apply excessive force to the control panel.
X Use the handle at the back of the product when moving it.
Adjusting to the Right and Left

Hold the control panel handle and move it carefully to the right or left.
Adjusting the Height

Press the lever on the handle of the control panel and move it carefully up or down.
2-18
Console
The console consists of two parts – the inner and outer units. The interior of the console mainly
contains devices that produce ultrasound images. On the exterior of the console are various
connectors, probe holders, storage compartments, handles, and wheels, etc.
Rear Panel
A monitor and other peripheral devices, like a printer, are connected via the rear panel at the
back of the system.
1 HDMI Port (Output): Outputs digital signals to the

monitor. (Input: Not supported.)
1 3 2 USB Port: Used to connect to peripheral USB devices.

3 Audio Port (Output): Outputs audio signal. (Input: Not
2 supported.)
5 4 Network Port: Connect to a network. You can transfer
patient information to another server via DICOM
4
network.
6 5 R.G.B Port (Output): Provides analog signal output to
be displayed on the monitor.
7 6 S-VHS Port (Output): Provides an S-VHS connection for
a VCR.
[Figure 2.7 Rear Panel]
7 Microphone Port (Input): Connects a microphone.
2-19
User Manual
Power Connection Part

The power connection part is located at the bottom on the rear panel.
1
2
3
[Figure 2.8 Power Connection Part]
1 Power switch/breaker: Turns on the power of the product, and cuts off power if
overcurrent or overvoltage occurs.
2 Power inlet: Accepts the power cord, which connects to an external power supply.
3 Equipotential Terminal: This should be connected to the equipotential connection part in
the exam room.
2-20
Probe Holder
Probe holders are mounted at the left and right-hand sides of the control panel.
The holder can be separated for easy cleaning.
The six probe holders on the

control panel can be attached
and removed.
Hold the marked area at the top Pull the holder up to detach it.
of the holder and pull it in the
direction shown by the arrow.
[Figure 2.9 Removing the Probe Holder]
Hockey Stick Probe Holder

Tips!
Insert the Hockey stick probe holder into the probe holder to mount. It is provided as an
option.
2-21
User Manual
Peripheral Devices
Peripheral devices can be connected to their corresponding ports on the left/right or rear sides
of the console, as needed.
CAUTION:
X Do not install peripheral devices that are not listed in this user manual in the patient
environment. If you install an unlisted device in the patient environment, it may cause an
electrical hazard.
X Do not connect additional external peripheral devices to the auxiliary socket outlet. Doing
so may decrease safety level.
1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
[Figure 2.10 Patient Environment]
NOTE: Refer to the user manual of the peripheral device for its operating information.
2-22
The following products are recommended:
CAUTION: When using a peripheral device via a USB port, always turn the power off before
connecting/disconnecting the device. Connection/disconnection of USB devices while the
power is on may lead to malfunction of the system and the USB devices.
NOTE: The console’s USB ports are located on the rear panels of both the control panel and
the console. We recommend that you connect USB storage devices (flash memory media,
etc.) to the ports on the control panel, and other USB peripheral devices to the rear panel for
convenience.
Digital Video Printer

X Black and White: Sony UP-D897, UP-X898MD, UP-D898MD
X Color: Sony UP-D25MD
NOTE: Sony UP-D897, and Sony UP-D897MD are not available in the US and Canada.
USB Printer
Samsung CLP-620NDK, Samsung ML-2950 Series
CAUTION:
X Be sure to check the English OS version first to install a compatible printer and driver.
Contact Samsung Medison customer support division for inquiries about printer driver
installation.
X When connecting the printer, ensure that the printer is configured under Microsoft
Windows or system setup and has been chosen as the default printer.
X Please check the port that the printer uses before connecting. Printers should be
connected to the printer port while the USB printer should be connected to the USB port.
2-23
User Manual
Foot Switch
X 3 Pedals HID Type
To configure the foot switch function, go to Setup > Customize > General > Foot Switch.
You can select Exit, Freeze, U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, U6, Update, Single, or Quad.
CAUTION: Connecting or removing the Foot Switch while the product is turned on may cause
the system to malfunction.
2-24
Wi-Fi Adaptor
Wi-Fi Adaptor (USB Type): Archer T4U (TP-LINK AC1300), Archer T4UH (TP-LINK AC1200),
Netis WF2120
NOTE: For detailed information about how to connect wireless network, please refer to ‘Setup
> Connectivity > Network > Wireless’ in ‘Utilities’.
The product’s transmitter/receiver protocol specifications may vary depending on the

Wi-Fi Adaptor in use.
Archer T4U Archer T4UH

Model Netis WF2120
(TP-LINK AC1300) (TP-LINK AC1200)
IEEE 802.11ac IEEE 802.11ac

IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11a IEEE 802.11b
Protocol IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11n IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11g IEEE 802.11n
IEEE 802.11b IEEE 802.11b
5 GHz 5 GHz
11ac: Up to 867 Mbps 11ac: Up to 867 Mbps
(dynamic) (dynamic)
11n: Up to 300 Mbps 11n: Up to 300 Mbps
(dynamic) (dynamic)
11a: Up to 54 Mbps 11a: Up to 54 Mbps
(dynamic) (dynamic)
Signal Rate Up to 150 Mbps
2.4 GHz 2.4 GHz
11n: Up to 400 Mbps 11n: Up to 300 Mbps
(dynamic) (dynamic)
11g: Up to 54 Mbps 11g: Up to 54 Mbps
(dynamic) (dynamic)
11b: Up to 11 Mbps 11b: Up to 11 Mbps
(dynamic) (dynamic)
Frequency 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz 2.4-2.4835 GHz
Transmit Power <20 dBm (EIRP) <20 dBm (EIRP) <20 dBm (EIRP)
Support 64/128 bit WEP Support 64/128 bit WEP

Support 64/128 bit WEP
Wireless Security WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
802.1x 802.1x
2-25
User Manual
The transmitter/receiver specifications, such as frequency or bandwidth, may vary

depending on the Wi-Fi Adaptor in use and the protocol of the connected device.
IEEE 802.11 Network PHY Standards
Frequency Bandwidth
Protocol Stream Data Rate (Mbit/s) Modulation
(GHz) (MHz)
802.11a 5 20 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 OFDM
802.11b 2.4 22 1, 2, 5.5, 11 DSSS
802.11g 2.4 20 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 OFDM
20 Up to 288.8
802.11n (Wi-Fi 4) 2.4/5
40 Up to 600
20 Up to 346.8
MIMO-OFDM
40 Up to 800
802.11ac (Wi-Fi 5) 5
80 Up to 1733.2
160 Up to 3466.8
Other
Flash Memory Media
NOTE:
X The system cannot recognize USB 1.1 flash memory. Remove the flash memory from the
console and equip again with an appropriate device.
X Regarding file formats that are not ordinarily saved: Please check first to see if it is
possible to save the file format on a desktop PC before trying to save the file on flash
memory.
CAUTION:
X Do not use flash memory media which contain anti-virus programs or are defective.
Otherwise, the product may fail to work properly.
X Please use a flash drive compatible with Windows 10. Otherwise, some features may not
work correctly.
2-26
Probes
Probes are devices that generate ultrasound waves and process reflected wave data for the
purpose of image formation.
NOTE: For information on probes, refer to ‘Probes’ and the Reference Manual.
Connecting Probes
Be sure to connect or disconnect probes when the power is off to ensure the safety of the
system and the probes.
1. Connect probes to the probe connectors on the front panel of the system. Up to four
(options inclusive) (five including CW) probes may be connected.
2. Turn the connector-locking handle clockwise.
[Figure 2.11 Probe Connector]
CAUTION:
X When connecting a probe, make sure that the connector is not exposed to any liquid or
foreign substance. Otherwise, fire, electric shock, injury, or damage to the product may
occur.
X If the probe does not connect properly, try reconnecting it after removing any foreign
objects.
2-27
User Manual
Accessories
An accessory box containing the items below is supplied with the product.
SONO GEL GROUND CABLE
MANUAL USER GUIDE
[Figure 2.12 Accessories]
NOTE: Supplied accessories vary by region.
2-28
Optional Functions
HS50 and HS60 products have the following options based on the version:
Option HS50/XH50 HS60/XH60
4D O O
3D XI O O
DICOM O O
EzExam+™ O O
MultiVision O Basic option
5D NT™ O O
CW Function O O
Cardiac Measurement O O
Strain+ O O
AutoIMT+ O O
ElastoScan™ O O
E-Strain™ O O
Panoramic+ O O
XI STIC O O
SEE Stream (RU region only) O O
NeedleMate+™ O O
CEUS+ X O
RealisticVue™ O O
HDVI™ X O
5D Follicle™ O O
StressEcho O/X O/X
2D NT O O
5D Heart Color™ X O
CrystalVue™ X O
S-Detect™ for Breast O O
2-29
User Manual
Option HS50/XH50 HS60/XH60
3D MXI X O
HQ-Vision™ O O
LaborAssist™ O O
2D Follicle™ O O
Windows 10 O O
Expanded Storage (1TB) O O
Auto EF O O
S-Detect™ for Thyroid O O
MV-Flow™ X O
LumiFlow™ O O
System Activation O O
Mobile Export O O
For further information about optional functions, please refer to the relevant chapters in this
manual.
NOTE:
X XH50 and XH60 do not support ‘StressEcho’.
X CrystalLive™ is part of the package v.2.04; it does not refer to a specific feature.
2-30
Chapter 3
Utilities
Setup......................................................... 3-3
System....................................................................... 3-4
Imaging................................................................... 3-19
Application............................................................. 3-27
Measurement.........................................................3-29
Report.....................................................................3-48
Annotation.............................................................. 3-52
BodyMarker............................................................ 3-57
Customize............................................................... 3-61
Peripherals.............................................................3-66
Connectivity........................................................... 3-72
Service.....................................................................3-96
Help.........................................................................3-96
ECG (Option)........................................... 3-97
EzCompare™.......................................... 3-99
StressEcho (Option)............................3-100
Setting up a Protocol..........................................3-100
Starting a Protocol and Acquiring Images...... 3-105
Reviewing an Image............................................. 3-111
Strain+ Image (Option)........................ 3-117

Strain+....................................................................3-118
Auto EF.................................................................. 3-125
TMAD..................................................................... 3-132
Chapter 3 Utilities
Setup
General system settings that do not have direct bearing on imaging are explained. The setup can
be modified depending on your specific needs or preferences.
1. Tap button on the touchscreen or press Setup button on the keyboard.
2. Setup screen will appear on the monitor and the touchscreen. Select a tab that contains items
you want to specify.
Selecting a Tab
Tips!
You can select the tab you want in either one of two ways. Select the method that suits you.
X Use the trackball and the Set button to select a tab.
X Tap the corresponding button on the touchscreen.
3. Specify the settings for each item.

4. Save settings and exit. Click Exit on the monitor screen, or tap Exit on the touchscreen, or
press the Exit button on the control panel to switch to Scan Mode.
[Figure 3.1 Setup – Touchscreen]
3-3
User Manual
System
In the Setup screen, select System tab. Or tap System on the touchscreen. From this tab, you can
configure the general system settings.
General
In the Setup screen, select General tab in the System category.
[Figure 3.2 Setup – System – General]
Location
You can specify the information that is displayed in the title area on the screen.
Institute
Enter the name of the hospital/institution where the product is installed. Special
characters can be entered.
Language
Select the system language. (Supported languages: English, German, French, Spanish,
Italian, Simplified Chinese, Russian, Portuguese (Brazilian), Ukrainian).
3-4
Chapter 3 Utilities
Date and Time

Set the date and time for use in the system.
CAUTION:
X Before starting diagnosis, please confirm the time, date and time zone and modify the
settings if necessary.
X Make sure to set the date and time to the time zone in which the system is installed. If it
is not set, the date and time can be automatically synchronized to the time zone of the
country of the manufacturer.
NOTE:
X You cannot change the date and time when a patient ID has been registered. To change
the date and time, you should finish the current diagnosis by pressing the End Exam
button on the control panel.
X When the system time and date are changed, the change is not reflected in the time and
date indicated in previous diagnosis results.
Date Format
Specify the date format. Select a date format using the combo button. The date format
that you specify will be applied to various date fields in Patient Information.
Time Format
Specify the time format. Press the combo button to select the preferred display format
(12 Hour or 24 Hour).
Date and Time

Select settings for date and time. When you press this button, the Date and Time screen
appears.
1. Set the date and time by using the trackball and the Set button on the control panel.
2. Press Save to apply the settings. Tap Cancel or press Exit button on the control panel to
cancel.
3-5
User Manual
Time Zone
Specify the local time zone where the system is used. When you press this button, the Time
Zone Settings screen appears.
1. Press Time Zone.
2. Specify the time zone by using the trackball and the Set button for the combo button.
3. Press OK to apply the settings. Tap Cancel to cancel.
Temperature
Temperature Unit
Set the temperature unit.
Trackball Speed
Scan Mode
Specify the trackball speed in Scanning Mode as Slow, Normal, or Fast.
Measurement
Used to specify the trackball’s speed during measurement. Select Slow, Normal, or Fast.
Slower speeds allow for more precise measurements.
Video
Format
Choose between NTSC or PAL.
3-6
Chapter 3 Utilities
Beep Sound
Touchscreen
Set the sound level when using the touchscreen. Turn it on or off by using the trackball.
Control Panel
Set the sound level of sound when using buttons and dial-buttons in the control panel.
You can turn it on or off by using the trackball.
In particular, for Set/Exit, Freeze, Save, and Other buttons and dial-buttons, you can turn
them on or off.
Account
Register a user ID and password.
User Account Manager

This is the exclusive administrator function for approval and management of accounts.
X User Login: You can enable the user account (login) function. When turned on, this
applies to the following cases:
– Screen Saver
– System startup
X Password Expiry Period (Days): Set the password expiration period to None, 30, 60, or 90.
X Login Attempts for Account Lockout (times): Set the number of failed login attempts
that are allowed before an account is locked out to None or 5.
X User Account List: You can manage user accounts.
X Create: Fill out the User ID, Password, Name, and Authority fields. Then, press the
OK button to create a new ID. You can specify the Grade (i.e., Admin or User) of the
created account. When you create a User Grade account, you can restrict the following
functions:
– Export (SonoView, Report, External Storage)
– Backup & Restore (SonoView)
– Delete (Patient, SonoView)
– Connectivity (Setup)
3-7
User Manual
X Modify: Save the changes.

X Delete: Delete the selected ID.
X Close: Close Settings.
Emergency
Tips!
This is an Emergency Login function provided in case of an emergency. You can use this
function on the User Login screen. When you log in using Emergency Login, the existing
function for using patient information is disabled.
Login
You can set a User Account ID after logging in to the Admin account. Please contact the
service engineer to learn how to reset user account information including the Admin
account.
NOTE:
X The Admin account can be configured when you run ‘User Account Manager’ at Setup for
the first time.
X The Admin account cannot be deleted.
X Once the user account function is activated, you cannot load exams without logging in.
X The password must be 8 to 16 characters and composed of at least three of the following:
– English alphabet upper case
– English alphabet lower case
– Numbers
– Special characters
X If you exceed the maximum number of invalid password attempts, you cannot login for a
certain period of time.
Logout
Close the account.
3-8
Chapter 3 Utilities
Storage Management
Manages the storage space.
Auto Delete
When ‘On’, you can set the Auto Delete by pressing Set. When you turn on the system at the
specified Auto Delete time, all exams will be deleted. When a pop-up message appears,
select a deletion option.
X Delete by Period: Deletes exams based on the period set by the user.
– Delete per: Sets a cycle to delete exams.
– Delete Range
X Delete All: Deletes all exams.
X Delete Except for: Deletes all exams except for the exams within the chosen
period.
X Delete only Image and SR Data: Deletes only the images and the SR data.
X Delete by Capacity: Automatically deletes exams based on the capacity set by the user.
– Delete All When Capacity is: Deletes exams when the capacity exceeds the entered
capacity threshold.
– Delete only Image and SR Data: Deletes only the images and the SR data.
Date Scheduled to be Deleted

Displays a date when exams will be automatically deleted.
Delete Range
Displays a range of exams that will be automatically deleted.
3-9
User Manual
Display
In the Setup screen, select Display tab in the System category. Configure the settings for
displaying images.
[Figure 3.3 Setup – System – Display]
3-10
Chapter 3 Utilities
Display
System Logo
Choose one of SAMSUNG or HS50/HS60/XH50/XH60.
Direction Marker
Set the Direction Marker. Among SAMSUNG HS50/HS60/XH50/XH60, HS50/HS60/XH50/
XH60, and S Marker, select a desirable shape.
Screen Saver
Select the wait time (in minutes) for the screen saver.
System Power Button

X Ask me what to do: Set a message to recheck the Off status when it is shut down.
X Shut Down: The power will turn off.
Option
X Auto Freeze: Automatically switch to freeze state. Set the Freeze time by clicking the
– and + buttons.
X Prompt for Save on Exit: Use the checkbox to select whether to save or not.
– Check On: Set a message to recheck whether to save the changes when closing the
setup.
– Check Off: Set it to automatically save changes when closing the setup.
X Boot up Caps Lock On: When the checkbox is selected, Caps Lock is turned on after
completing the system booting.
Touchscreen Brightness
By using the trackball, adjust brightness of the touchscreen from 0 to 100 in the units of
10. Adjust it by pressing – and + buttons.
3-11
User Manual
Patient
In the Setup screen, select the Patient tab in the System category.
[Figure 3.4 Setup – System – Patient]
Patient Data
Name Display
X Last, First Middle: Display the name of the patient in the order of last name, first name,
then middle name.
X First Last Middle: Display the name of the patient in the order of first name, last name,
then middle name.
Title Display
Show or hide patient information in the Title area of the screen.
X None: Patient information is not displayed.
X Date of Birth: Displays the patient's date of birth.
X Age: Displays the patient's age.
X Gender: Select this checkbox to display the patient's gender. Note that the patient's
gender can only be displayed if their date of birth or age is also displayed.
3-12
Chapter 3 Utilities
Title LMP/GA/EDD Display

X LMP/GA: The last menstruation date and estimated gestation weeks are shown on the
screen.
X EDD/GA: The expected delivery date and estimated gestation weeks are shown on the
screen.
Save Patient Page as First Image

If On is checked, Patient information is saved as the first image.
Other ID
When a Patient record is created, a GUI for text input is displayed for you to enter the Other
ID.
X Other ID Format: Any, Numbers, Letters and Numbers, and NHS Numbers are available.
Except Any, inputs in each format type can only be entered as text.
Temp ID
Choose whether to use a Temp ID. When ‘On’, a Temp ID will be created automatically when
an exam begins.
X Send DICOM during Exam: When you perform an exam using a Temp ID, choose whether
to send it to DICOM by pressing the U Key to which the Send DICOM function has been
mapped.
User Defined List

You may enter information related to studies beforehand, so that you can assign the
information easily when entering patient information.
X Keep Last Physician/Operator Name: Decide whether or not the last name entered should
also be used for the next patient.
Use the Change, Delete All, Delete, Up, and Down buttons to add, edit, or delete
information; you may create a list of up to 20 for each item.
X Operator: You can save the name of the operator who scanned the patient.
X Diag. Physician: The name of the physician who diagnosed the patient can be saved.
X Ref. Physician: You can save the name of the referring physician.
X Indication: You can save information about the patient's medical history.
X Description: You can save up to 20 diagnostic memos per application.
3-13
User Manual
QuickPreset
In the Setup screen, select QuickPreset tab in the System category.
[Figure 3.5 Setup – System – QuickPreset]
QuickPreset
After selecting the Probe, Application, and Preset connected to the port, save them to
QuickPreset. Up to 4 sets can be saved. By using Preview, you can preview the saved preset.
X In the Operation modes, the saved Probe and Preset are shown as a button on the
touchscreen.
3-14
Chapter 3 Utilities
EzExam+™
EzExam+™ enables you to build or use a predefined protocol, and assign protocols for
examinations that are regularly performed in the hospital in order to reduce the number of steps
that you have to go through. For fetus diagnosis, in particular, you can arrange the examination
order according to the fetus position using the touchscreen, and automatically apply the
BodyMarker, Annotation, Measurement, etc.
In the Setup screen, select the EzExam+™ tab in the System category.
!
1
3
4
5
9 6
0
2
7
8
[Figure 3.6 Setup – System – EzExam+™]
3-15
User Manual
Protocol List
Provides a protocol list for the application. EzExam+™ in the Default List cannot be deleted or
edited. Adding a new EzExam+™ is not allowed.
X Show EzExam+™ Guide Image: On the Protocol List, liver-related guide protocols will
show a guide image appropriate for the task at the bottom left side.
1 Category: A list of available applications is shown.
2 If previously configured Exam are available, they will be shown in the Preset Lists when
an application is selected.
3 New Protocol: An EzExam+™ Creator window is created; upon opening the window, a
new protocol is created automatically.
4 Edit: Edits any protocol selected in the protocol list.
5 Rename: Modifies the name of the protocol selected from the protocol list.
6 Delete: Deletes a protocol selected from the protocol list.
7 Import: Imports the protocol data.
8 Export: Exports the protocol selected from the protocol list.
9 Move Up Button: Moves the protocol selected from the protocol list up one row.
0 Move Down Button: Moves the protocol selected from the protocol list down one row.
! Task List: Provides a task list which belongs to the protocol selected from the protocol
list.
3-16
Chapter 3 Utilities
EzExam+™ Creator
[Figure 3.7 Setup – System – EzExam+™ Creator]
1 Options in Function Window

X New: Creates a new protocol.
X Open: Loads an existing protocol.
X Save: Saves the current protocol. It is activated at any time even when there is no
change of data.
X Save As: Saves the current protocol with a different name.
X Undo/Redo: Undoes the last performed function, or restores the last undone function.
(Up to 50 Undo/Redo actions can be done; this function will be inactive if it cannot be
performed.)
X Format Painter: Applies the format settings from one protocol to another.
2 View Preview: Automatically runs a report when a task is performed.
3-17
User Manual
[Figure 3.8 Setup – System – EzExam+™ New Protocol]
X Add Task(↑): Creates a new task on the row above the task selected from the task list.
X Add Task(↓): Creates a new task on the row below the task selected from the task list.
X Copy: Copies a task selected from the task list.
X Cut: Cuts a task selected from the task list.
X Paste: Pastes a task below the task selected from the task list.
X Delete: Deletes a task selected from the task list.
X Move Up: Moves a task selected from the task list up one row.
X Move Down: Moves a task selected from the task list down one row.
X Task List: Provides the task list which belongs to the protocol.
X Task Parameter: Provides a parameter which belongs to the protocol selected from the
protocol list.
3-18
Chapter 3 Utilities
Imaging
In the Setup screen, select the Imaging tab. Or tap Imaging on the touchscreen. Configure the
settings for displaying images.
Common
Common settings apply to all applications.
You can select multiple items. Use the trackball and Set button to select items and set the
checkbox.
[Figure 3.9 Setup – Imaging – Common]
General Settings
HPRF
In PW Spectral Doppler Mode, this detects blood flow velocity that exceeds the maximum
speed at the depth you want to obtain the Sample Volume from.
Color Map Auto Invert (on Linear)

Turns the Color Map’s Invert function on or off when Steer is changed.
3-19
User Manual
Write Zoom Rearrangement

Enable this to align the Write Zoom image with the center. When disabled, the Write Zoom
image is displayed in the same shape as the observed position.
Update 2D in Cursor Moving

Enable this so that in PW Only Mode, moving the SV stops tracing and changes the mode
to 2D Live, while stopping the SV resumes tracing.
Relative Focal Position

Enable this so that when adjusting the 2D Depth value, a similar pre-modification ratio of
depth to focus position can be maintained.
Enable MultiVision in Dual Live Mode

Enable this so that in Dual Live, MultiVision is applied to the left image regardless of the
configuration of the right image. Note that in B/BC Dual Live Mode, MultiVision will be
applied to both images regardless of this setting.
Enable ClearVision in Dual Live Mode

Enable this so that in Dual Live, ClearVision is applied to the left image regardless of the
configuration of the right image. Note that in B/BC Dual Live Mode, ClearVision will be
applied to both images regardless of this setting.
Auto Calc./Trace Type

Type 1 is a general mode while Type 2 is the bradycardia mode. The Auto Calc. and Auto
Trace detection ranges change in PW Mode depending on the setting.
Zoom Box Reference Position

Select a reference position for the Zoom Box.
Preferred Probe Port

Select the Probe Port that takes the highest priority when the system starts or when you
select a probe.
Color Velocity Unit

Select the units of velocity in Color Mode.
3-20
Chapter 3 Utilities
Doppler Scale Unit

Select the units of measurement for the axis scale in Spectral Doppler Mode.
Strain+
Apical View Order: Provides each view in the order of LAX, A2C, A4C or A2C, A4C, and LAX.
Display Settings
Show Image Info

Show or hide the image information. If the image information intrudes too much on the
screen, when it is turned off, it hides the image information.
Show Horizontal Scale Bar

Show or hide the Horizontal Scale Bar in the Scan UI.
Display Tx Frequency
Specify how to display the Tx Frequency for each probe. If checked, the current state will
be indicated in MHz; if unchecked, the state will be indicated as PEN, GEN, or RES.
Display Linear Full Image in Single Mode

Show the full image of the Linear (including virtual convex) probe in Single Mode. When
the sides of an ultrasound image are not visible at a low depth, use this function to view
the entire image.
Display Linear Full Image in Dual Mode

Show the full image of the Linear (including Virtual Convex) probe in Dual (or Dual Live)
Mode. When the sides of an ultrasound image are not visible at a low depth, use this
function to view the entire image.
Live Scan Display at EzCompare™

When EzCompare™ is executed, you can locate the live images to the left or right.
3-21
User Manual
TGC Window Auto Close (sec)

Specify how much time must elapse before the TGC Control Window on the touchscreen
automatically closes because of a lack of user input. You can select among Off, 3, 5, 10, 15,
or 20 seconds. If Off is ticked, it does not automatically close. You must press the Close
button.
TGC Curve Display

Specify how long the TGC Curve is displayed for in Scan UI (On: Always displayed, Off:
Never displayed, Auto: Displayed for a specific length of time and then disappears).
Biopsy Guideline Type

Select the type of Biopsy Guide Line displayed. Select one from Center Line Only, Outer
Line Only, or Both.
Wide Dual View

Dual mode screen is provided in wide mode. Select one from Dual, Dual Live, CEUS+, or
ElastoScan™.
Wide Single View

Single mode screen is provided in wide mode.
Quad: Active Window Sequence

Set the Window Change Order in Quad Mode to Zigzag or Clockwise.
X Zigzag: Set in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.
X Clockwise: Set in the order of 1 → 2 → 4 → 3.
3-22
Chapter 3 Utilities
Application/Preset
These settings specifically apply to the selected application.
You can select multiple items. Use the trackball and the Set button to select and check or
uncheck items.
[Figure 3.10 Setup – Imaging – Application/Preset]
Application Settings
Select Application
Set up the measurement application.
Seamless Dual Mode

Select whether or not to use Seamless Dual Mode in Dual Mode.
When checked, no space will be shown between the left and right images in the Dual
Mode, while when unchecked, a space will be shown between the left and right images.
Enable Doppler Cursor Mode

Select whether or not to enter Cursor Mode before Doppler Mode.
3-23
User Manual
Enable M Cursor Mode

Select whether or not to enter Cursor Mode before M Mode.
Activated Mode When Image is Frozen

Select which mode will activate upon freezing an image.
Choose one of the following: Cine, Measurement, Annotation, BodyMarker, or Arrow.
X When you select Measurement, the D or M Mode Only button is enabled; If you tick it,
Measurement is enabled in D or M Mode only.
Preset Settings
Select Preset
Check the Probe, Application, and Preset.
ECG
Enable or disable ECG for each Preset.
Thermal Index Type

Set the TI shown on the screen from among TIs (Soft tissue thermal Index), TIb (Bone
thermal index), TIc (Cranial bone thermal index). You can specify indices by Preset.
Limit MI
Set the limit value for the Mechanical Index (MI). You can select one for each preset.
Limit TI
Set the limit value for the Thermal Index (TI). You can select a limit value for the Thermal
Index Type chosen for each preset.
3-24
Chapter 3 Utilities
S-Detect™
On the Setup screen, select the S-Detect™ tab. Enable or disable the settings for Breast.
[Figure 3.11 Setup – Imaging – S-Detect™]
S-Detect™ for Breast
Description
Select whether to display the BI-RADS® to use. Turn this option ‘Off’ to hide the category
description from the screen.
Sensitivity Setting
Select High Sensitivity, High Accuracy, or High Specificity.
Classification
Select the classification to use: BI-RADS®2003 or BI-RADS®2013.
Default Position
Choose the desired direction.
Recalculation
When ‘On’, if you modify the results, you can have them calculated again.
3-25
User Manual
S-Detect™ for Thyroid
Description
Choose whether to display the desired TI-RADS. When ‘Off’, category description is not
provided on the screen.
Sensitivity Setting
Select High Sensitivity, High Accuracy, or High Specificity.
Reference
Select the item that you wish to use.
Recalculation
When recalculation is active, set the sub-functions.
X When the K-TIRADS is set, the Possibly B/M type is supported.
3-26
Chapter 3 Utilities
Application
In the Setup screen, select the Application tab. Or tap Application on the touchscreen.
General
[Figure 3.12 Setup – Application – General]
Probe
Select a probe.
Application
Select an application.
Preset
Select the Preset that is supported by the selected application.
3-27
User Manual
Select Library
Annotation
Setup a text library.
BodyMarker
Setup a BodyMarker library.
Measurement
X Application: Setup the measurement application.
X Package: Setup a package for the measurement application.
3-28
Chapter 3 Utilities
Measurement
Specify various setup options for measurements. The setup can be modified depending on your
specific needs or preferences.
1. Press Setup on the touchscreen or keyboard. When the Setup screen appears, select the
Measurement tab.
2. When the Measurement screen appears, select the tab that contains the items you wish to
configure.
3. Specify the settings for each item.
4. Press the Save button to save the settings and finish. You can click Exit on the monitor screen
or tap Exit on the touchscreen to exit the Setup screen and switch to Scan Mode.
General
In the Setup screen, select the General tab in the Measurement category. You can specify basic
measurement options.
[Figure 3.13 Setup – Measurement – General]
3-29
User Manual
Menu
Directions
Select the Direction Type to be applied to the measurement target in the initial system
status. The options are Left and Right.
Location
Select the Location Type to be applied to the measurement target in the initial system
status. The options are Prox, Mid, and Dist.
Hide the menu on Unfreeze

Hide or show the Measurement menu on the screen after taking measurements. Show the
Scan Mode (On) or hide the Measurement menu (Off).
Display
2D Line Type
Select the type of line to use for measurement in 2D mode (Solid: Solid line, Dot: Dotted
line, None: Start and end points).
Ellipse Cross Line

Show (On) or hide (Off) the long axis and the short axis of an ellipse while taking Ellipse
measurements.
Clear Measurement(s) on Unfreeze

Show or hide measurement results on the screen when switching to Scan Mode after
taking measurements. Select this checkbox to show measurement results in 2D or M/D
Mode.
Zoom Window
Generate an enlarged image centered around the marker. You can select On or Off.
3-30
Chapter 3 Utilities
Result
Select how measurement results are displayed.
Position on 2D Mode
Reposition the measurement results when 2D Mode is selected.
X Left-Top: Measurement results are displayed in the top left corner of the screen.
X Left-Bottom: Measurement results are displayed in the bottom left corner of the
screen.
X Right-Bottom: Measurement results are displayed in the bottom right corner of the
screen.
X Right-Top: Measurement results are displayed in the top right-hand corner of the
screen.
X Custom: Measurement results are displayed in a location selected by the user.
Position on M/D Mode

Move the measurement results.
X Left-Top: Measurement results are moved towards the top left corner of the screen.
X Left-Bottom: Measurement results are moved towards the bottom left corner of the
screen.
X Right-Bottom: Measurement results are moved towards the bottom right corner of the
screen.
X Right-Top: Measurement results are moved towards the top right corner of the screen.
X Custom: Measurement results are moved to a location selected by the user.
Font Size
Select the size of the font used for the measurement results.
Show Background
Turn the background of the measurement results transparent (On) or opaque (Off).
3-31
User Manual
Key
Trackball Operation
Set the motion of the trackball when using Caliper or Measure.
X Marker: Stand-by and ready to measure; display the basic marker on the measurement
screen.
X Cine: Ready to select a Cine frame by using the trackball.
Set Measurement on Store

Turn the function on or off that automatically completes measurements when the Store
key on the control pad is pressed while a measurement is being taken.
Set Measurement on Unfreeze

Turn on or off the function that completes measurements when the image is unfreezed by
using Freeze Key while a measurement is being taken.
Cursor
Cursor Type
Select the shape of the default caliper cursor displayed on the screen. Select between
‘Cross’ shape (+) and ‘X’.
Arrow Head Marker

Show or hide the Head Marker when measuring a small area.
Size
Select the size of the default caliper cursor displayed on the screen. Select Small, Medium,
or Large.
3-32
Chapter 3 Utilities
Library
In the Setup screen, select the Library tab in the Measurement category.
[Figure 3.14 Setup – Measurement – Library]
Measure
Library in the Measure category is shown. Latest, Average, Max, or Min may be selected for
each item.
Application
Create Group
Create a USERGROUP other than default group.
Create Label
Enter a preferred Name for the created group.
NOTE: ‘Create Label’ can be edited.
3-33
User Manual
Delete
Delete a newly created name or group in ‘Create Label’ or ‘Create Group’, respectively.
Caliper
Specify whether additional information will be shown along with the basic measurement
values when basic measurements are taken by pressing the control panel’s Caliper button.
If this option is selected, the additional information will be saved as an output along with the
measurement results.
Setting ‘Application’ to General will change the items in ‘D Trace’. Setting ‘Application’ to
Cardiac will change the items in ‘D Trace’ and ‘D Velocity’.
NOTE: ‘Cardiac’ setting is activated when the probe setting is Cardiac.
Select the default tool that functions in the measurement cursor state for each Image mode.
Distance, Trace, Trace Length, Ellipse, Open Spline, Closed Spline, Distance Stenosis,
Trace Length Stenosis, Open Spline Stenosis, Ellipse Stenosis, Trace Stenosis, Closed
2D Mode
Spline Stenosis, Ellipse Trace Stenosis, 2 Lines Angle, 3 Point Angle, 1 Dist Volume, 2
Dist Volume, 3 Dist Volume, Ellipse Volume, Ellipse + Dist Vol, Disk Volume
Velocity, Velocity (Cardiac), Accel, Time(D), HR(D), RI, Auto Trace, Limited Trace, Manual
Trace, Auto Trace(Cardiac), Limited Trace(Cardiac), Manual Trace(Cardiac), Dist Volume
Flow, Trace Length Volume Flow, Open Spline Volume Flow, Ellipse Volume Flow,
Trace Volume Flow, Closed Spline Volume Flow, S/D Ratio, D/S Ratio, V1/V2 Ratio,
D Mode Velocity(F), Velocity(F) (Cardiac), Auto Trace(F), Limited Trace(F), Manual Trace(F), Auto
Trace(F) (Cardiac), Limited Trace(F) (Cardiac), Manual Trace(F) (Cardiac), Dist Volume
Flow(F), Trace Length Volume Flow(F), Open Spline Volume Flow(F), Ellipse Volume
Flow(F), Trace Volume Flow(F), Closed Spline Volume Flow(F), S/D Ratio(F), D/S
Ratio(F), V1/V2 Ratio(F)
M Mode Distance, Slope, Time(M), HR(M)
3-34
Chapter 3 Utilities
Menu
In the Setup screen, select the Menu tab in the Measurement category.
[Figure 3.15 Setup – Measurement – Menu]
Library
Measurement items provided for each application are shown in a list.
3-35
User Manual
Menu
Package
Select the Packages that are supported by each application.
Image Mode
View the Menu and the Touch Menu for each Image mode.
Group View
Group View lists the groups shown in the Menu. When Group View is activated, you can
delete any of the groups shown, and change the layout of the groups shown in the Menu
and the Touch Menu.
Label View
Label View lists the items shown in the Menu. When Item View is activated, you can delete
any of the items shown and change the layout of the items shown in the Menu and the
Touch Menu.
Auto Sequence
It is activated when the Auto Sequence box is checked. It provides a function for executing
selected items in a group in sequential order. It also supports the sequential measurement
function for measuring AFI and Volume in OB.
Up, Down
Adjust the order of the groups or items in Label View.
Remove
Delete a group or item selected in Group View or Item View.
3-36
Chapter 3 Utilities
Touch
A Group or an Item can be placed on the touchscreen or shown in the Group View or Item
View.
X Click the Touch button to display a dialog box that shows the touch button.
X Clear All: Delete all groups and items.
X Add Page: Add a page.
X Remove Page: Delete a page.
X Click the touch button to display the groups and items that may be assigned to the
button.
X Select Empty in the groups and items shown to delete the groups and items currently
assigned to the touch button.
X Deleted groups and items from the Touch will be removed from the Group View or Item
View when closing the dialogue box by clicking the Save button.
Reset Defaults
Press the Reset Defaults button and then select OK to go to the initial state.
3-37
User Manual
Applications
In the Setup screen, select the Applications tab in the Measurement category.
[Figure 3.16 Setup – Measurement – Applications]
Caliper
Caliper then Assign

After taking a Basic Measurement, the measurement result may be set as a Label. You can
enable or disable each Image Mode by selecting On or Off.
Default Tool
You can set up a maximum of three default tools for each Image Mode, which can function
when the measurement cursor is active.
X 2D Mode: Distance, Trace, Trace Length, Ellipse, Open Spline, Closed Spline,
%Stenosis(D), %Stenosis(A), 2 Lines Angle, 3 Points Angle,1 Dist Volume, 2 Dist Volume,
3 Dist Volume, Ellipse Volume, Ellipse Dist Vol, Disk Volume
X D Mode: Velocity, Accel, Time(D), HR(D), RI, Limited Trace, Manual Trace, Volume
Flow(D), Volume Flow(A), S/D Ratio, D/S Ratio, V1/V2 Ratio
X M Mode: Distance, Slope, Time(M), HR(M)
3-38
Chapter 3 Utilities
Default Tool Category

Select the default tool for each measurement category.
X %Stenosis(D): Distance Stenosis, Trace Length Stenosis, Open Spline Stenosis
X %Stenosis(A): Ellipse Trace Stenosis, Ellipse Stenosis, Trace Stenosis, Closed Spline
Stenosis
X Volume Flow(D): Dist Volume Flow, Trace Length Volume Flow, Open Spline Volume
Flow
X Volume Flow(A): Ellipse Volume Flow, Trace Volume Flow, Closed Spline Volume Flow
Menu
X Caliper then Calc: Clicking the Calculator button switches the mode back and forth from
Caliper to Calc.
X Calc. then Caliper: Clicking the Calculator button switches the mode back and forth from
Cal. to Caliper.
X Caliper Only: Clicking the Calculator button switches the mode to Calc.
X Calc. Only: Clicking the Calculator button switches the mode to Caliper.
Tips! When the Menu Type is set to Caliper Only or Calc. Only, pressing the Measurement Key on
the control panel during measurements will exit the user.
Doppler
Display Absolute Value

The doppler measurement is displayed as an absolute value.
Heart Rate
X Cycle: Select the number of heart rate (HR) cycles.
X Manual: Enter the heart rate manually when conducting a measurement.
X Automatic: Heart rate is entered automatically by the ECG while conducting a
measurement.
3-39
User Manual
Additional Options
In the Setup screen, select the Additional Options tab in the Measurement category.
[Figure 3.17 Setup – Measurement – Additional Options]
Application
Cardiac
X RAP Default Value: Configure the default value of RAP. You may select 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, or
25mmHg.
X LV Volume Method: Specify how the volume of the left ventricle is measured. Select
Teichholz, Gibson, or Cubed. For more information on calculation formulae, please refer
to the reference manual.
X LV Study On Straight Line: The measurement direction can be set for each LV
measurement. If it is On, the initial measurement direction is fixed. If it is Off,
measurement can be conducted in any desirable direction.
3-40
Chapter 3 Utilities
OB
X SD/Percentile Type: Select None, SD, or Percentile.
X NT Marker: Select the indicator symbol for measuring NT. You can select either Cross or
Line type.
X 2D NT Line Type: Select the type of the line for measuring 2D NT.
X Clear Measurement(s) on Unfreeze: You can set whether to delete the results at
Unfreeze. Select either of 2D or M/D or both of them.
– 2D: Set whether to delete the values shown in the 2D image.
– M/D: Set whether to delete the values shown in the Trace image.
X Fetal Weight Unit: Specify the units for fetal weight measurement.
X LaborAssist™: Set the default measurement method for LaborAssist™ to Auto or
Manual.
X BiometryAssist™: Select a measurement item amongst BPD, HC, AC, and FL to display
the selected item on the screen. The measurement standard for the BPD Method can
be set to either Outer-Inner or Outer-Outer.
Vascular
ICA/CCA Ratio: Select a measurement item to use to calculate the ICA/CCA ratio. You can
select Max, Prox, Mid, or Dist as PS and ED for ICA and CCA, individually.
GYN
X 2D Follicle™
Stage: You can set the Early, Middle, or Post stage.
NOTE: You may select this when the application is OB, GYN, Vascular, or Cardiac.
3-41
User Manual
AutoCalc.
In the Setup screen, select the AutoCalc. tab in the Measurement category. AutoCalc. is a
Spectral Doppler Mode feature that automatically performs specific calculations based on
measured values.
NOTE: The specified items will only appear on the screen when the AutoCalc. button on the
touchscreen is tapped in Power Doppler Mode.
[Figure 3.18 Setup – Measurement – AutoCalc.]
AutoCalc. Setting
Add and remove automatic calculations by using the check boxes.
When the Peak Systolic Velocity and End Diastolic Velocity values are 0, not all results for the
items will be displayed on the screen.
3-42
Chapter 3 Utilities
Tables
In the Setup screen, select the Tables tab in the Measurement category. View and edit the Tables
and Equations to be used in each measurement item of OB.
[Figure 3.19 Setup – Measurement – Tables]
Select Category
Select a category from Fetal Age, Fetal Growth, EFW (Estimated Fetal Weight), and
LaborAssist™ to view and edit tables and charts for that category.
Select Label
Select a Label in the list box; that Label’s Author List will be copied into the combo box and
the first Author’s data will be displayed on screen.
Select Author
Select Author in the combo box and the Author’s data will be displayed on screen.
Create
Create new Author data.
Copy
Copy the currently selected Author’s data to create new Author data.
3-43
User Manual
Edit
Modify the currently selected Author data.
Delete
Delete the currently selected Author data.
NOTE: Only the Author data created by the user may be deleted.
Author Name
Indicates the currently selected Author’s name. The Author’s name may be entered when
creating new Author data.
NOTE: When creating new Author data, you cannot save the data without entering the
Author’s name.
Author Data Label

Indicates the Label that the currently selected Author data belongs to. The Label may be
changed when creating new Author data.
Author Data Type

Represents the currently selected Author data type.
NOTE: Author data type may be changed when creating new Author data by using the New
button. Note that Table type data cannot be created for EFW.
Age Unit
Indicates the Fetal Age unit for the currently selected Author data. The age unit may be
Valid GA Range
Indicates the valid range of the Gestational Age (GA) for the currently selected Author
data. The valid GA range may be changed when creating new Author data.
3-44
Chapter 3 Utilities
Label Unit
Indicates the Label unit for the currently selected Author data. The Label unit may be
Valid Label Value Range

Represents the valid range of the Label value for the currently selected Author data.
The valid Label value range may be changed when creating new Author data.
Table Type
Indicates the deviation type of the Fetal Age Table for the currently selected Author data.
The deviation type of the Table may be changed when creating new Author data.
SD Type
Indicates the deviation type of the Fetal Growth Table for the currently selected Author
data. The deviation type of the Table may be changed when creating new Author data.
EFW Unit
Indicates the EFW unit of the currently selected Author data. The EFW unit may be
Equation
Indicates the currently selected Author Equation data. The equation may be changed using
the Input Parameter list box or the Calculator buttons when creating new Author data.
NOTE:
X If the Equation contains a formulaic error, the data cannot be saved.
X If you enter a Label that is not found in the Input Parameter list box, the data cannot be
saved.
Table
Indicates the table for the currently selected Author data. The table may be changed using
the Insert Row, Delete Row, and Clear Table buttons when creating new Author data.
NOTE: At least one row of data must be entered into the Table before data can be saved.
3-45
User Manual
Author
In the Setup screen, select the Author tab in the Measurement category.
[Figure 3.20 Setup – Measurement – Author]
Fetal Age
Specify the Fetal Age Author for each Label.
Fetal Growth
Specify the Fetal Growth Author for each Label.
Estimated Fetal Weight

Specify the EFW or EFW percentile Author. Each label is displayed sequentially in EFW
Sequential Measurement upon setting each item.
3-46
Chapter 3 Utilities
Composite GA Author
Specify the Author to use for Composite GA.
Set Authors To
This changes the Author of all applicable measurement values at a time as ‘Author’ is
selected in the applicable list box.
3-47
User Manual
Report
In the Setup screen, select the Report tab. Or tap Report on the touchscreen. Here you can set
items related to the measurement report.
[Figure 3.21 Setup – Report – Report Order]
Report Order
In the Setup screen, select the Report Order tab in the Report category.
Library
Application ComboBox: It provides a list of labels for each application.
Report Order
You can add items from the library to the Report Order list.
X Reset Defaults: Restores the default settings for Report Order.
X Up/Down: Change the order (up/down) of the selected items in Report Order.
X Delete: Removes the items from the library when they’ve been moved by the user.
(Original items in the Application cannot be deleted.)
3-48
Chapter 3 Utilities
Comment
In the Setup screen, select the Comment tab in the Report category.
[Figure 3.22 Setup – Report – Comments]
Select Application
Display all diagnostic measurement information and select the measurement information to
show in Report.
Comment
The user can enter comments manually.
Clear
Delete saved comments. When executing Unfreeze, any annotation is deleted.
3-49
User Manual
Description
In the Setup screen, select the Description tab in the Report category.
[Figure 3.23 Setup – Report – Description]
Application
Select an available application. Preset items exist for this application, but for other
applications, only user-added items are available.
Create
Create a user item. Enter a name and category, then tap the OK button to create, or tap the
Cancel button to reset all values to the defaults.
3-50
Chapter 3 Utilities
Available Items
This is a category or item list that can be added to the Anatomy page.
Selected Items
This is a category or item list that has been added to the Anatomy page.
Selection Menu
This is a list of the lower-tier items belonging to an item you have selected that has been
added to the Anatomy page.
X Edit: Items added by the user can be edited.
X Delete: Items added by the user can be deleted.
X On the Setup – Report – Description screen, users can tap the 1 buttons to add or remove
a selected item.
X On the Setup – Report – Description screen, users can tap the 2 buttons to change the
order of a selected item.
3-51
User Manual
Annotation
In the Setup screen, select Annotation. Or tap Annotation on the touchscreen. Set up options for
entering an opinion or a diagnosis.
Library
In the Setup screen, select the Library tab in the Annotation category. You can create, edit, or
delete an Annotation library.
[Figure 3.24 Setup – Annotation – Library]
3-52
Chapter 3 Utilities
Library
Select an application type.
User Defined Library

The user can enter or delete text.
Create
Create text.
X List (L) Type: It is displayed as ‘- - -’ and the number of ‘- - -’ will be determined by the
number of words. When there is only one word, it will not be displayed.
X Group (G) Type: The Group color will be displayed on the bottom right side of the
button. Nothing will be displayed for buttons that do not belong to the Group.
Delete
Delete text.
Reset Defaults
Revert to default settings.
Touchscreen Page 1
Specify the items that will be displayed on the first page of the touchscreen.
Touchscreen Page 2
Specify the items that will be displayed on the second page of the touchscreen.
Replacement Words
Select and edit the text you wish to modify and then save it by tapping the Save button. Up to
four different preset text entries can be added for one text button.
3-53
User Manual
Group
By providing Group Combo Box, up to one page can be assigned per Group.
Multi-Assign
Assigns the items to multiple Groups.
Clear Group
Cancels the assignment to a specific Group on Touchscreen Page.
Clear All Group

Cancels all the Group assignments on Touchscreen Page.
Copy From Existing

Select and set up items provided by the system.
3-54
Chapter 3 Utilities
Annotation
In the Setup screen, select the Annotation tab in the Annotation category. Select whether or not
to discard annotations from the screen when in Scan Mode or when the probe or application is
changed.
[Figure 3.25 Setup – Annotation – Annotation]
Common
Erase When the Image is Unfrozen

When executing Unfreeze, the annotation is deleted.
Erase When the Probe or Application is Changed

Select whether or not to erase annotations when the probe or application is changed.
Erase When the Mode is Changed

Select whether or not to erase annotations when the Operation mode is changed.
Display Annotation on Thumbnail Images

Select whether or not to display annotations on thumbnail images.
3-55
User Manual
Annotation
Font Size
Select the font size to use.
Text Color
Select the font color to use.
Arrow
Arrow Size
Select the size of the arrow.
Arrow Type
Select the shape of the arrow.
Arrow Angle
Select the angle of the arrow.
3-56
Chapter 3 Utilities
BodyMarker
In the Setup screen, select the BodyMarker tab.
Library
In the Setup screen, select the Library tab in the BodyMarker category.
You can create, edit, or delete a library in the BodyMarker category.
1. On Touchscreen Page 1 or Touchscreen Page 2, use the trackball to select the location you
want; the touch button will be selected.
2. In Copy From Existing, select the BodyMarker you want; the new BodyMarker will be created
at the location marked in blue.
3. On Touchscreen Page 1 or Touchscreen Page 2, use the trackball to select a BodyMarker to
display it in blue; tap Erase to delete the BodyMarker.
[Figure 3.26 Setup – BodyMarker – Library]
3-57
User Manual
Library
User Defined Library

The user can create or delete a Library.
Create
Create a new Library.
Delete
Delete a BodyMarker.
Reset Defaults
Touchscreen Page 1
Specify the items that will be displayed on the first page of the touchscreen.
Touchscreen Page 2
Specify the items that will be displayed on the second page of the touchscreen.
Copy From Existing

Select and set up the BodyMarker provided by the system.
3-58
Chapter 3 Utilities
BodyMarker
In the Setup screen, select the BodyMarker tab in the BodyMarker category.
[Figure 3.27 Setup – BodyMarker – BodyMarker]
3-59
User Manual
Common
Activate when dual/quad mode on

Show or hide BodyMarker when Dual or Quad Mode is active.
Erase when the image is unfrozen

Choose whether or not pressing the Freeze button on the control panel to switch to Scan
Mode automatically deletes the BodyMarker.
Erase when the preset is changed

Select whether or not to erase the BodyMarker when the Preset is changed.
Copy to active area when dual/quad mode on

Select whether or not to copy the BodyMarker to the active area when Dual or Quad Mode
is activated.
BodyMarker
Home Position
You can save the position of a BodyMarker. Select a desired position.
3-60
Chapter 3 Utilities
Customize
Select the Customize tab on the Setup screen. Alternatively, tap Customize on the touchscreen.
General
In the Setup screen, select the General tab in the Customize category. You can set the functions
of the keys and buttons on the product.
[Figure 3.28 Setup – Customize – General]
3-61
User Manual
Common
Set/Exit Key
Select the functions to assign to the buttons on the left and right sides of the trackball on
the control panel.
X Set/Set: Both the left and the right buttons are set to the Set function.
X Set/Exit: The left button is set to Set and the right button is set to Exit.
X Exit/Set: The left button is set to Exit and the right button is set to Set.
Pointer
Select Pointer or Arrow.
End Exam
X End Exam + Patient: Pressing End Exam brings up the Patient Information screen.
X End Exam Only: Pressing End Exam terminates Exam and brings up the B mode Scan
screen.
X Reset Preset: Pressing End Exam resets the preset.
Foot Switch
Assign functions to the Foot Switch’s left, middle, and right pedals. The functions you can
assign are as follows:
X Exit, Freeze, U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, U6, Update, Single, and Quad.
Clip Store
Clip Store Type

X Retrospective: When saving images, images before pressing the save button are saved.
X Prospective: When saving images, images after pressing the save button are saved.
3-62
Chapter 3 Utilities
Clip Store Method
Clip Length (sec)

Specify the length of the image to save. Select a desired Sec value using the button.
Number of Heart Cycles

Specify the number of Heart Cycles to be included in the image.
Time before Heart Cycle (ms)

Specify the time to be included before a Heart Cycle begins.
Time after Heart Cycle (ms)

Specify the time to be included before a Heart Cycle completes.
3-63
User Manual
Buttons
On the Setup screen, select the Buttons tab in the Customize category. Configure User Keys.
[Figure 3.29 Setup – Customize – Buttons]
Assign functions to the U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, and U6 buttons on the control panel. The functions
you can assign are as follows:
U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, U6
Patient Quad Arrow
Exit Biopsy Pointer
TGC Simultaneous Probe Change
Q scan Caliper TDI
Harmonic Calculation TDW
Single EFW Measure Store/Send/Print
Dual EFW Result Steer Invert
Dual Live AutoIMT+ None
StressEcho Protocol Start/Pause StressEcho CC Start/Pause Cine Selection
When you select Store/Send/Print, you can additionally configure the Store (e.g., Single, Clip,
3D Image Save, or Volume Save), Send (e.g., DICOM Storage Service), and Print-related settings.
When you select External Storage, you can configure the settings such as the external storage
that you use to export images (e.g., USB/Network Drive), directory, file type, image quality, and
display of patient information.
3-64
Chapter 3 Utilities
Touch Menu
In the Setup screen, select the Touch Menu tab in the Customize category.
[Figure 3.30 Setup – Customize – Touch Menu]
Mode Type
You can configure the 2D Live, 2D Freeze, C/PD Live, C/PD Freeze, TDI/S-Flow™ Live, TDI/
S-Flow™ Freeze, PW /TDW Live, PW/TDW Freeze, CW Live, CW Freeze, M Live, M Freeze, ECG
Live, ECG Freeze, SEE Stream Live, SEE Stream Freeze, Panoramic+ Ready, Panoramic+ Review,
ElastoScan™ Live, ElastoScan™ Freeze, CEUS+ Live, CEUS+ Freeze, Lithotripsy, StressEcho,
and StressEcho Review settings.
* SEE Stream Live and SEE Stream Freeze are only available in Russia.
Touch Panel
Specify items to be included on the touchscreen and their positions.
Toggle Control
Specify the dial-button activated items to be included in the bottom menu on the
touchscreen and their positions.
Reset Defaults
3-65
User Manual
Peripherals
In the Setup screen, select the Peripherals tab. Or tap Peripherals on the touchscreen. You can
configure keys, buttons, and the peripheral devices connected to the product.
Peripherals
In the Setup screen, select the Peripherals tab in the Peripherals category. You can configure
peripheral devices connected to the product.
[Figure 3.31 Setup – Peripherals – Peripherals]
3-66
Chapter 3 Utilities
Printer
Printer Settings
Select the printer to use by using the combo button. To remove a printer that is no longer
used, select the printer and press the Remove button.
Printing Image Adjustment

Choose a printer you wish to use from Printer Settings. You can configure the Gamma,
Brightness, and Contrast settings in 2D Mode and 3D Mode separately. Press the Reset
button to reset it to the default settings.
Print Queue
Choose whether or not to cancel a printer job while an image is being printed. Use the
combo button to select a printer that is printing an image. Press the Clear Print Queue
button to cancel the print job.
X Select All Printer: Select this checkbox to cancel all print jobs for the connected printer.
NOTE: A print job can be canceled only if the image data to print has not been completely
sent to the printer.
Local Printing Area

Select the area that will be printed.
X Full Screen: Prints everything shown on the monitor screen.
X Video Out: Prints only a certain area of the screen, including the Image area.
X Image Only: Print out the image area only.
Hide Patient Data

Select whether or not to display the patient information.
Export Image Compensation

When transferring external images, the user can configure the monitor settings according to
their environment. You can change the Gamma, Brightness, and Contrast settings, and click
the Reset button to restore the default settings.
3-67
User Manual
Barcode
Choose whether to use barcodes. Press Set to set the initial values that are required to use a
barcode reader.
NOTE:
X Only one type of barcode reader can be detected; two or more types cannot be used at
the same time.
X If no barcode reader is connected, the screen becomes disabled.
CAUTION: A barcode reader must be connected before you open the Barcode window; a
barcode reader cannot be detected if the Barcode window is already open.
Readers Supported by the Product

X 1D: Zebra LS2208
X 2D: Honeywell 1900, Zebra DS2208
Barcode Reader Setup

Connect the reader that you want to use to the product’s USB port, and then turn it on.
Then, scan barcodes in the order specified below:
Model Order
1. Set Factory Defaults
Zebra LS2208, DS2208

2. Set Interface as USB CDC Host
1. Set Factory Defaults
Honeywell 1900
2. Set Interface as USB Serial
3-68
Chapter 3 Utilities
Received Data
Displays the input data.
Separator
Enter a separator (special character) that separates the displayed data.
Patient
Fill out the Patient ID, Name (Last, First, Middle), Gender, Birth Year, Birth Month, and
Birth Date fields.
X Checkbox: Specify whether you wish to use the data or not.
X Offset: Specify from which digit the number should be counted.
X Length: Enter the maximum length of data.
X Order: Specify the order of the data among the separated.
Gender Type
X MF: Displays the gender type as M (male) or F (female).
X ZeroOne: Displays the gender type as 0 (male) or 1 (female).
X OneTwo: Displays the gender type as 1 (male) or 2 (female).
X TwoOne: Display the gender type as 2 (male) or 1 (female).
X OneZero: Displays the gender type as 1 (male) or 0 (female).
Study
Fill out the Accession #, Ref Physician, and Description fields.
Communication
Set up a communication system. The recommended specifications for each reader are as
follows:
Model Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Barcode Type
Zebra LS2208
9600, 19200,
Code 39, Code
Zebra DS2208 38400, 57600, None 8 1
128, QR
115200
Honeywell 1900
3-69
User Manual
Character to Remove from Patient ID

X Hyphen: Removes all hyphens from the Patient ID.
X Space: Removes all spaces from the Patient ID.
Conversion Method of Patient ID

X Standard setting: Displays the Patient ID as-is.
X Replace top space with 0: If the Patient ID begins with a space, then the space is
replaced with ‘0’.
X Add 0 to the top: Adds a leading zero in front of the Patient ID.
X Digit number: If you enter fewer than the specified number of digits for the Patient ID,
then ‘0’ is added.
Auto Reflection
When the checkbox is selected, scanning a patient’s barcode automatically registers the
patient’s input information in the Patient window.
Adjustment Result
You can preview the data with the settings applied.
Initialize
Resets the entered settings.
Save
Saves the settings.
NOTE: Once all barcode-related settings are configured, when you scan the patient’s barcode,
you can view the patient’s input information in the Patient window.
3-70
Chapter 3 Utilities
Device
In the Setup screen, select the Device tab in the Peripherals category.
Press the Eject/Remove button to eject or remove the disk from the device. Press the Format
Media button to erase the CD/DVD.
[Figure 3.32 Setup – Peripherals – Device]
Map Network Drive

Connect to a network.
1. Press Map Network Drive button.
2. Select a Drive Name.
3. Enter a Network Folder Path.
4. Enter User ID and password and then press the Connect button.
5. Select a Drive Name and press the Disconnect button to close it.
3-71
User Manual
Connectivity
Tap Connectivity on the touchscreen. You can perform DICOM administration tasks or manage
DICOM server settings and network information for your system.
DICOM
In the Setup screen, select the DICOM tab in the Connectivity category. Configure DICOM (Digital
Imaging and Communication in Medicine) operation and DICOM server.
NOTE: For more information, please refer to the server’s user manual or the DICOM
Conformance Statement.
[Figure 3.33 Setup – Connectivity – DICOM]
3-72
Chapter 3 Utilities
System Configuration
Information about the DICOM server used by the system is displayed.
You can change the information, or add or delete a server. The server information is used to
identify the DICOM for the system within a network. It is also used to transfer data to other
DICOM servers.
NOTE: For the ‘IP Address’, ‘AE Title’, and ‘Port No.’ settings, contact your organization’s
network administrator.
Station Name
Enter the name of the system. Along with AE Title, it is often used to identify the system in
the DICOM network.
Port No.
Enter the port number of the server being used.
AE Title
Enter the name of the DICOM AE (Application Entity). Used for identifying the equipment
that uses DICOM on the network.
Use TLS
Choose whether or not to use DICOM TLS when receiving data.
X Verify Client Certificate: You can check whether the certificate of the counterpart that
tries to send data using the Trusted Authority Certificates saved on the device is valid.
3-73
User Manual
DICOM TLS
Select a certificate required for DICOM communication encryption. For encrypted DICOM
communication, the device must have a certificate; if not, you must register a new
certificate.
X Import: Register a certificate for the device. Select the certificate and private key file
that you have. Fields marked in red are required fields.
X Create: A certificate is self-generated for the device. Fields marked in red are required
fields.
X Delete: Delete a certificate from the device.
X Export: Copy a device’s certificate to a USB drive. If you have created a certificate
yourself on the device, the other’s server that you will access later may need to verify
the certificate for the device.
X Trusted Autority Certificates: When using the DICOM function, register the certificate
for the certification authority which will verify the certificate of the counterpart
you will access. Press Import under Trusted Authority Certificates and then select a
certificate file.
Qview
Choose whether to use Qview.
General Configuration
SR Format
Select a format to be used to save SR among General Report and ViewPoint.
Store SR at End of Exam

Select whether or not to store the SR at the end of the exam. When you select this
checkbox, the SR is automatically stored at the end of the exam. Otherwise, it is not
stored.
Create New Series by Pressing Continue Exam

Even if patients are not examined continuously, the exam results are provided together,
and not separated.
3-74
Chapter 3 Utilities
Character Set
Select Character Set to use for Worklist and Storage services using DICOM.
X Except Escape Sequence when using Storage: When the checkbox is selected, data
are sent except Escape Sequence for Storage. Setting is available only in a certain
Character Set.
Adding DICOM Services

Click Add on the screen. A screen is displayed where you can enter a DICOM service to add.
After adding a service, click Apply to save the information. Tap Cancel to cancel.
DICOM Services
Select the type of service to use via DICOM. The supported DICOM servers are Storage, SC,
Worklist, Print, PPS, STORAGE SR, and QR.
Alias
Enter the name of the DICOM server.
AE Title
Enter the AE title of the DICOM server. Consult your network administrator before
specifying this option.
Host
Enter the IP address of the server being used. Consult your network administrator before
Port No.
Enter the port number of the server being used. Consult your network administrator before
Connect Timeout
The connection will time out if there is no response from the DICOM server within the
configured time period. You can specify this time period in seconds.
3-75
User Manual
Read Timeout
Specify the Read Timeout time limit for the server you are adding.
Retry Interval
Specify how many seconds the system will wait before it retries a failed transmission. You
can specify this time period in seconds.
Maximum Retries
Specify how many times a failed transmission will be retried.
Packet Size
Specify the size of the transfer packet.
Use TLS
Choose whether or not to use DICOM TLS when sending data.
X Verify Server Certificate: You can check whether the certificate of the server that tries
to receive data using the Trusted Authority Certificates saved on the device is valid.
3-76
Chapter 3 Utilities
Storage Server Information

Select ‘Storage’ as the DICOM Service Options item. Configure the Image Storage Service
using DICOM.
[Figure 3.34 DICOM Service Options – Storage]
Transfer Mode
Select a transfer method:
X Send After Acquisition: Send an image whenever you press the Store button to save it.
X Send on End Exam: Send all saved images when you press the End Exam button.
Transfer Types
X Include Multi Frame: Select this checkbox to transfer Cine Loops.
X Include 3D Volume: Select whether or not to send 3D volume data together with the 3D
images.
NOTE: Only select this option if you use a storage service that supports the 3D volume data
format used by Samsung Medison.
3-77
User Manual
Convert to Grayscale
Select the grayscale conversion type for the image you want to apply the DICOM service to.
X No Conversion: Send the original image without converting it.
X All Images: Convert all images to grayscale before sending them.
X B/W Image only: Only the images that do not have color are converted to grayscale
before being sent.
Support
Include Pixel Spacing: In addition to the area information used in ultrasonography, the
area information used in CT or radiography is also included. You can take measurements in
a PACS system that does not support ultrasound area information.
NOTE: However, only 2D and 2D Color Mode images are supported. In Dual and Quad Mode,
the depths of the included images must be identical.
DICOM Compression
Select whether or not to compress the images for the DICOM service. Use the combo
button to select the image type and the compression type (Uncompressed or JPEG
Baseline). When you select Uncompressed, the images are saved without compression.
X Single Frame: Specify the compression type for still images.
X Multi Frame: Specify the compression type for Cine images.
X For JPEG Baseline type, choose either Lossless, Low, Medium, or High. You can prioritize
either the quality or the compression ratio. You can specify the compression type,
compression ratio, and frame rate. You can select Full, 10, or 20 as the frame rate for
Multi Frame.
3-78
Chapter 3 Utilities
VOI LUT Setup

Configure the VOI LUT (Value Of Interest Look Up Table). Adjust the brightness and
contrast of a DICOM image when saving it. The saved image can be viewed with any PACS
device that has DICOM VOI LUT implemented.
X Window Center: Enter a value for the DICOM Tag (0028, 1050) setting. The setting value
indicates the brightness of an image that is displayed by the storage service. The image
will get darker if the value is set to 128 or higher. Note that this function can be used
only when it is supported by the storage service.
X Window Width: Enter a value for the DICOM Tag (0028, 1051) setting. The setting value
indicates the contrast of the image displayed by the storage service. Values set to
higher than 256 will result in lower contrast. Note that this function is available only
when it is supported by the storage service.
3-79
User Manual
SC Server Information
Select ‘SC’ (Storage Commitment) as the DICOM Service Options item. Configure the Storage
Commitment Service using DICOM. The Storage Commitment Service is used after a diagnosis
is finished and all saved images and reports are sent.
[Figure 3.35 DICOM Service Options – SC]
Associated Storage Server

Select an Image Storage server to connect to.
Associated SR Server
Select a Structured Report server to connect.
3-80
Chapter 3 Utilities
Worklist Server Information

Select ‘Worklist’ as the DICOM Service Options item. Set Modality Worklist service by using
DICOM.
[Figure 3.36 DICOM Service Options – Worklist]
Query Setting
Select the type of Modality to retrieve when updating the worklist.
X Modality: Select either ultrasound images (US) or all images (All).
Tips! After setting up the Worklist service, press the Patient button on the control panel to go to
the Worklist page.
Update Method
Specify the method of updating worklist.
X Only on User Request: Updates the Worklist only upon user request.
Tips! To update the Worklist, set Search Source to Worklist in the Search tab on the Patient
Information screen, and then press Search.
X When Worklist Page Opens: Updates the Worklist every time it is opened.
X On Startup and Every: Updates the Worklist when the system starts, and then updates
it automatically at specified intervals.
3-81
User Manual
Exam Description
You can specify which sections of the DICOM file you will import information for the Exam
Description from.
Print Server Information

Select ‘Print’ as the DICOM Service Options item. Configure the Print Service using DICOM.
[Figure 3.37 DICOM Service Options – Print]
NOTE:
X You can only configure printers connected to the DICOM network.
X Depending on the printer, some of the following functions may not be available.
Before configuring a printer, please refer to the printer’s user manual, or the DICOM
Conformance Statement.
3-82
Chapter 3 Utilities
Transfer Mode
Select a printing method:
X Print After Acquisition: Print an image whenever you press the Store button to save it.
X Print on End Exam: Print all saved images when you press the End Exam button.
Layout Setting
Specify the paper layout. For the rows from 1 to 6, the columns from 1 to 4 may be selected.
Printer Setup
X Color: Specify whether to use colors. Select Grayscale or RGB.
X Orientation: Specify the paper orientation. Select either Landscape or Portrait.
X Magnification: Specify the interpolation when resizing an image to print. Select from
Replicate, Bilinear, Cubic, or None.
X Border Density: Specify the border color of the image to be printed. Select Black or
White.
X Priority: Specify a priority for the print command. Select High, Med, or Low.
X Destination: Specify the paper pathway. Select Magazine or Processor.
X Medium Type: Specify the material type for the printout. Select from Paper, Clear Film,
Blue Film, Mammo Clear Film, or Mammo Blue Film.
X Copies (1–99): Enter the number of copies to print, using a value from 1 to 99.
X Film Size: Select a paper size from 8×10 inches, 8.5×11 inches, 10×12 inches,
10×14 inches, 11×14 inches, 11×17 inches, 14×14 inches, 14×17 inches, 24×24 cm,
24×30 cm, A4, or A3.
X Smoothing Type: This option is available only when Magnification is set to CUBIC. Enter
the value for the printer which is specified in the DICOM Conformance Statement.
X Empty Density: Specify the background color of an image to print. Select Black or
White.
X Min Density: Specify the minimum brightness of an image to print. If this option is not
specified, the default value is applied.
X Max Density: Specify the maximum brightness of an image to print. If this option is not
specified, the default value is applied.
X Configuration Info: Specify the unique value for a printer. Please refer to the DICOM
Conformance Statement for the printer.
3-83
User Manual
PPS Server Information

Select DICOM Service Options as the ‘PPS’ (Performed Procedure Step). Configure the
Modality Performed Procedure Step Service using DICOM.
[Figure 3.38 DICOM Service Options – PPS]
Always Complete Exams

When you check this checkbox, exams are always reported in their final state. If you press
the End Exam button without selecting a checkbox, the cancellation message that was
selected after you selected the cancellation message for End Exam will be sent to the RIS
server.
3-84
Chapter 3 Utilities
Storage SR Server Information

Select ‘Storage SR (Storage Structured Report)’ as the DICOM Service Options item. Configure
the Report Storage Service using DICOM.
[Figure 3.39 DICOM Service Options – Storage SR]
Transfer Mode
Select a printing method:
X Send After Acquisition: Whenever you press the Store button, the measurement data in
the report is transferred.
X Send on End Exam: Whenever the End Exam button is pressed, the measurement data
in the report will be sent.
3-85
User Manual
QR Server Information
Set DICOM Service Options to ‘QR (Query & Retrieve)’. Configure the Query & Retrieve Service
settings using DICOM.
[Figure 3.40 DICOM Service Options – QR]
3-86
Chapter 3 Utilities
Modifying DICOM Information

Select a service and click Modify on the screen. The information on the selected service will
appear. After changing the information, click Apply to save the changes. Tap Cancel to cancel.
Deleting DICOM Services

Select a service and click Delete on the screen.
Testing DICOM Servers

Select a service and click Verify on the screen. The connection with the selected service
is tested and the results are shown under Verify. If the result is Success, the connection is
normal.
Qview (Cloud Server)

Qpath is a Cloud Server. It’s sold separately. This product allows you to check images sent by
the product on the Cloud Server.
Qpath Setup
1. Press Add on the screen, select ‘Storage’ in the DICOM Service Options field and ‘Qpath’
in the Alias field, enter a Host and Port No., and then press Apply to save the settings.
2. Select Qpath on the screen and then run a server test. If ‘Success’ appears in the Verify
field, it means that a connection has been successfully established.
3. Set the Qview option to ‘On’ on the screen.
4. Enter ‘Qpath’ in the Send field of the User Key.
Viewing Images on Qpath

Pressing Qview on the Patient Information screen moves you to the Cloud Server.
3-87
User Manual
HL7
Include the Measurement Data PDF in the HL7 Message and send it to the HL7 Repository server.
Select the HL7 tab and click the HL7 Manager button on the screen.
[Figure 3.41 DICOM HL7 – HL7 Manager]
3-88
Chapter 3 Utilities
Repository
Register, edit, and delete a report repository server to send reports to.
X Add Repository: Add a repository to send an HL7 message.
– Alias: Refers to a name of the HL7 repository server to send an HL7 message to.
– IP Address: Enter an IP address for the HL7 repository server.
– Port No: Enter the port number of the HL7 repository server. (a value from 0 to
65535)
– Connect Timeout: Select a time for transfer standby in seconds. (a value from 120 to
300)
– Read Timeout: Set the standby time for transmission in seconds. (a value from 120
to 300)
X Edit Repository: Edit the repository server information.

X Delete Repository: Delete the repository server information.
X Active/Inactive Repository: Select whether or not to use the repository server by
selecting the Active checkbox for the registered repository.
3-89
User Manual
Show Job Status

Shows the information regarding the transfer of the HL7 report into an HL7 message.
X Columns: The user can select columns to check.
X Retry: The user can select and retry the failed jobs.
X Delete: The user can delete a job, whether the status is ‘SUCCESS’ or ‘FAIL’.
X Show All: Shows all jobs.
X Delete Archived Job Status after (days): Delete archived jobs for the selected dates.
3-90
Chapter 3 Utilities
HL7 Export
If there is an Active repository server registered to the HL7 Manager, the user can export
the report by selecting the HL7 button after taking at least one measurement on the
Report screen. (However, patient information must exist and a warning message asking
for a valid patient ID will appear if the information has not been entered.)
[Figure 3.44 Report – HL7 Export]
3-91
User Manual
Network
In the Setup screen, select the Network tab in the Connectivity category. Or tap Connectivity on
the touchscreen. You can manage the network information for the current equipment.
[Figure 3.45 Setup – Connectivity – Network]
Network Configuration
Set up the network information for the current equipment.
Automatic Configuration (DHCP)

If the checkbox is selected, the IP information will be configured automatically.
Static Configuration
If the checkbox is empty (Automatic Configuration), you can enter a static IP address.
Specify the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS information.
Revert
Clear the currently entered information and revert to the default settings.
Apply
Use the information entered currently to set up the IP.
3-92
Chapter 3 Utilities
Wireless
Wireless LAN
Use a USB adapter to connect the system to a wireless network.
NOTE: The Wireless Network Settings window is enabled only when the system is connected
to a wireless USB adapter.
X SSID: Displays the name of the connected wireless network. SSID stands for Service Set
IDentifier.
X Authentication: Displays the authentication method for the wireless network.
X Encryption: Displays the data encryption method for communicating with the wireless
network.
X Password: Enter the password for the network.
Connecting to a Wireless Network

Tips!
1. Use the trackball and the Set button to press the Scan button.
2. Select an available wireless network and then press the Select button.
3. Press the Connect button to connect the system to the wireless network.
4. Press the Disconnect button to disconnect the system from the wireless network.
5. Press the Close button to finish the setup.
Static IP
Set a static IP address for wireless network.
Set up a Connection or Network

Open Wi-Fi Settings to connect with WPA2-Enterprise.
Certificate Import
Load a certificate from external storage to register.
Delete Profile
Delete the profile information of the previously connected AP.
3-93
User Manual
Profile Manager
This function allows the user to backup and restore the Connectivity Setup data.
[Figure 3.46 Setup – Connectivity – Profile Manager]
Add
Save the current DICOM Service list, HL7 Repository list, and Local Network Setting
information.
Modify
Edit the Institute and Department information of the saved Profile (other information
cannot be edited).
Refresh
Update the saved Profile List and display it on the screen.
Import
Import Profile settings from an external storage device (USB drive). (You can only execute
one import at a time; the target profile names are displayed in the Import UI.)
3-94
Chapter 3 Utilities
Export
Export the Profile settings to an external storage device (USB drive).
Delete/Delete All
Delete the selected Profile or all Profiles.
Apply
Restore the Profile settings to the selected values and then shut down the system.
NOTE:
X A maximum of 30 Profiles can be registered.
X When adding a Profile, you can enter up to 30 alphabetical characters into the Profile
Name, Institute, and Department fields (Profile Name is a mandatory field; Institution and
Department are optional fields).
X If there is no User Data setting for the DICOM Service and HL7 Repository, the checkbox
will be disabled.
X If there is no additional User Data setting in the Local Network Setting, the Profile List
will be disabled.
X Other settings for DICOM and HL7 (e.g., System and General Configuration) are excluded
from the Import, Export, and Apply actions.
3-95
User Manual
Service
NOTE:
X Users should not attempt to perform anything on their own. They must contact the
customer service department of Samsung Medison who can perform this service for
them.
X Enable or disable optional software or hardware.
– Option: Show the types of optional software that can be installed on the product.
– Status: Show the current status of optional software. Registered means that the
software can be used until the date specified by the Expiration Date is reached.
Unregistered means that the software cannot be used now.
X Displays the software version of the product.
X Demo videos related to optional features are saved in the Demo Play tab.
Help
Press the Help button on the keyboard. The electronic manual will appear on the monitor’s
screen. Press the button one more time or Exit to close it.
3-96
Chapter 3 Utilities
ECG (Option)
If an ECG is installed, the ECG tab will be displayed on the touchscreen. In a Multi Image Mode
such as Dual or Quad, ECG Cine can be used for each image.
NOTE: You can set each Preset to show or hide the ECG on the screen by going to Setup >
Application/Preset > Preset Setting.
Starting and Terminating an ECG

Tap the ECG button on the touchscreen menu to turn the function on or off.
ECG Setup
Sweep Speed
Tap the Sweep Speed button in the touchscreen menu to select the ECG display speed. You
can select 15mm/s, 29mm/s, 44mm/s, 59mm/s, 88mm/s, or 117mm/s.
Invert
Tap the Invert button on the touchscreen menu to turn ECG Invert on or off.
Gain
Adjust the amplitude of the ECG. Rotate the Soft Menu dial-button 1 to adjust the gain
from 0 to 100.
Position
Rotating the Soft Menu dial-button 2 changes the display position of the ECG signal. You
may select a position from 0 to 10; selecting a higher value will position the ECG higher on
the screen.
Clip
Rotate the Soft Menu dial-button 3 to select the interval for saving the clip. You can select
either Time or Beat.
3-97
User Manual
Trigger
Tap the Trigger button on the touchscreen menu to set up Trigger. You can rotate the Soft
Menu dial-button 4 to select a number of ECG Triggers from 1 to 7.
Trigger Delay
Select the time delay between the R-wave and the frame containing the trigger, which
will be applied to the Trigger function. Rotate the dial-button 4 to select a value from 0 to
3,000msec.
Dual Trigger
Tap the Dual Trigger button on the touchscreen menu to turn Dual Trigger on or off.
Dual Trigger Delay

Select the time delay between the frame containing the first trigger and the frame
containing the second trigger, which will be applied to the Dual Trigger function. Rotate
the dial-button 4 to select a value from 6 to 3,000 msec.
CAUTION:
X If the ECG is less than 30 bpm, the Heart Rate (HR) might not be displayed.
X The range of measurement error between the Heart Rate (HR) measured on the product
and the Heart Rate (HR) measured on ECG is within 2%.
3-98
Chapter 3 Utilities
EzCompare™
EzCompare™ allows easy access to previously taken exams to evaluate corresponding views in
a side-by-side display. For greater efficiency, EzCompare™ automatically matches the image
settings, annotations, and bodymarkers from the prior study.
However, Live scan is available only when the same probe preset is selected as that of the
Tips!
saved image or scan.
X Tap the Patient button on the touchscreen. Select an exam list to analyze using the trackball
and the Set button. (Multiple selection of lists allowed.)
X Tap the EzCompare™ button.
X The saved screen is provided in the Thumbnail field and Date tab appears.
X Double click an image of desirable screen to show the selected exam image in the right or
left-hand of the screen and the live scan is shown in the opposite side with the same setting
values as that of the exam image.
X When saved in the EzCompare™ screen, it is saved in the Current Exam tab under the
thumbnail field.
NOTE: Go to Setup > Imaging > Display Settings and specify the position of live images to the
left or right.
3-99
User Manual
StressEcho (Option)
The StressEcho package includes wall motion scoring and reporting. It includes exercise
StressEcho, pharmacologic StressEcho, diastolic StressEcho and free programmable StressEcho.
NOTE:
X StressEcho is an optional feature of this product.
X It is not supported for XH50/XH60.
X You can use it only when the application is cardiac.
The procedure for using StressEcho is as follows:

X When setting up and using a new protocol: Register a patient ID → Set up a protocol → Select
a protocol and start → Acquire and specify images → Review the images → Create a StressEcho
report.
X When selecting and using an existing protocol: Register a patient ID → Select a protocol and
start → Acquire and specify images → Review the images → Create a StressEcho report.
This manual provides instructions for using StressEcho by setting up a new protocol. For
instructions on registering patient IDs, please refer to ‘Starting Modes of Operation’. For
information on StressEcho reports, please refer to ‘Measurements.’
Setting up a Protocol
After registering a patient ID, press the StressEcho button on the touchscreen followed by the
Template Editor button. The Protocol Template Editor screen will be displayed. You may edit an
existing protocol or set up a new protocol.
Creating a New Protocol Template

Press the New button.
Editing an Existing Protocol Template

Press the combo button in the upper left corner of the screen, and select a protocol to use
from the protocol list.
3-100
Chapter 3 Utilities
The Protocol Template Editor Screen

The Protocol Template Editor screen consists of the following items. Use these items to set a
protocol.
[Figure 3.47 Protocol Template Editor]
Protocol
When you press the combo button, a list of the default protocols and other existing
protocols appears.
3-101
User Manual
Default Protocols
Tips!
This product offers the following five protocols by default: The default protocols cannot be
deleted or transferred to external storage media. In addition, once the default protocol is
revised, it cannot be save with the same name.
Protocol View Stage
Two Stage
PLAX, PSAX, A4C, A2C Rest, Peak
Exercise Stress
Three Stage
PLAX, PSAX, A4C, A2C Rest, Peak, Post
Bicycle Stress
Four Stage
PLAX, PSAX, A4C, A2C Stage 1–4
Pharmacological Stress
MV-PW, TDI, LVOT-PW, TR, Baseline, Legs UP, 25W, 50W,

Diastolic Stress PSAX-BASE, PSAX-Mid, PSAX- 75W, 100W, 125W, REC2, REC5,
APEX, 4CH, 2CH, MR REC10
PLAX, PSAX, 4CH, APLAX, 2CH, Baseline, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40,
Dobutamine Stress
MV-PW, TDI, LVOT-PW, TR-CW atropine, recovery
Stage
Set the stage. Use this button to add or delete a stage.
To select one of the default Stages, use the Combo button. To enter it manually, use the
keyboard.
NOTE: You must create at least two stages, and you can add up to 10 stages.
View
Set the view. Use this button to add or delete a view.
To select one of the default Views, use the Combo button. To enter it manually, use the
keyboard.
NOTE: You must create at least two views, and you can add up to 10 views.
3-102
Chapter 3 Utilities
Additional Options
X Go to ‘Select Cine’ after continuous capture per stage: After acquiring images using
Continuous Capture in each stage, the Cine Selection screen appears.
X Go to Review Screen after end of protocol: Once all images are assigned to the
protocol, the Review screen appears.
Capture Unit
Select a method for image acquisition by pressing the Save button on the control panel.
X Beats: Acquires images by the number of heartbeats.
X Time: Acquires images by the unit of seconds.
Cycle/Time
Select the image acquisition interval by pressing the Save button on the control panel. For
the Capture Unit, you can select a Beats value from 1 to 4 or a Time value from 2 to 4.
Auto Assign
Once images are acquired, they are automatically assigned to each stage and view.
Show Reference
Displays the reference image in Dual Mode when a stage image is acquired. This can only
be used if the ‘Auto Assign’ checkbox is ticked.
When this is enabled, the previous stage automatically becomes the reference image.
Tick each stage’s checkbox to acquire images for each stage using the same settings as the
reference image.
Auto Next Stage

When an image is assigned to the last view of the current stage, the system automatically
proceeds to the next stage.
Continuous Capture
Acquires and saves images continuously, and then later assigns the images to each stage
and view on the Cine Selection screen.
3-103
User Manual
Cine Preview
Shows previews of acquired images before saving them.
Capture Method
Select the video acquisition range for images by pressing the Save button on the control
panel.
X Prospective: Saves images acquired after the button is pressed.
X Retrospective: Saves images acquired before the button is pressed.
Timer
Set the onscreen timer display settings.
X Show Protocol Timer (T1): Displays the protocol’s recorded time (T1) on the screen.
X Show Stage Timer (T2): Displays the current stage’s time record (T2) on the screen.
New Template
Press the New Template button on the touchscreen to create a new protocol.
Save
Press the Save button on the touchscreen to save the newly created protocol. This cannot
be used when a default protocol has been changed.
Save As
Press the Save As button on the touchscreen to save a set protocol under a different name.
Delete Template
Press the Delete button on the touchscreen to delete the currently selected protocol and
open a new protocol template. This cannot be used when a default protocol is selected.
Apply & Exit

Press the Apply & Exit button on the touchscreen to apply any changes made in the
Protocol Template Editor and exit the screen.
Exit
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen to exit the Protocol Template Editor screen.
3-104
Chapter 3 Utilities
Starting a Protocol and Acquiring Images

After registering a patient ID, press the StressEcho button on the touchscreen. The Protocol
Screen will appear. Select a protocol to start an examination, and review the acquired StressEcho
images.
Selecting a Protocol
Press the combo button at the top of the screen, and select the protocol to use from the
protocol list.
Starting a Protocol
Press the user key to which Begin/Continue or StressEcho Protocol Start/Pause has been
assigned. The screen will switch to Diagnosis Mode.
NOTE: You can set up a user key in Setup > Customize > Buttons.
Capturing StressEcho Images

Press the Save button on the control panel to acquire images for each view and stage.
A matrix that indicates a StressEcho image acquisition is displayed on the left-hand side
of the screen.
[Figure 3.48 Matrix]
X To return to the Protocol Screen while acquiring an image, press the StressEcho button
on the touchscreen.
X To change a stage and acquire images, use one of the following methods:
1. Press the Pointer button on the control panel. Use the pointer to select the next
stage.
2. While using StressEcho, press Next Stage.
3-105
User Manual
To acquire images using Continuous Capture, on the screen, press the user key to which
Start / Pause or StressEcho CC Start/Pause has been assigned. Pressing Stop
ends Continuous Capture. (Note that there must be a heartbeat; if there is no heartbeat, a
warning message will appear.)
Auto Assign and Auto Next Stage

Tips!
If either Auto Assign or Auto Next Stage is enabled, images will be automatically assigned
when you acquire StressEcho images. The matrix will be displayed as shown below:
[Figure 3.49 Matrix – Auto Assign, Auto Next Stage]
Show Reference
Tips!
If you have selected Show Reference from the Protocol Template Editor screen, images
will be scanned by comparing them against the reference image on the Protocol Screen.
Show Reference is a feature that sets the first stage as the reference image and compares
subsequent scans under identical conditions. This feature can only be used if the Auto Assign
checkbox has been selected.
Enabling this feature activates Dual mode. The reference image is shown on the left. The
current image is shown on the right-hand side of the screen and can be acquired under the
same conditions as the reference image.
Applied reference image conditions are as follows:
X Image Depth
X Width
X Dynamic Range
X 2D Mode (Harmonic, etc.), Color Mode
X ClearVision Index
X Post-Processing (Gray map)
X Gain (2D, C)
X Read Zoom
3-106
Chapter 3 Utilities
Continuous Capture and Cine Selection

Tips!
When Continuous Capture is enabled, images are acquired continuously, saved, and then
later assigned on the Cine Selection screen. The matrix will be displayed as shown below:
[Figure 3.50 Matrix – Continuous Capture]

Cine Selection displays images acquired using Continuous Capture per beat, allowing you to
assign the displayed images to each stage and view.
3-107
User Manual
Protocol Screen
The Protocol Screen consists of the following items:
2
1 5
3 4
[Figure 3.51 Protocol Screen]
1 Protocol: Press the combo button to display the protocol list. Select the protocol that you
want to use.
NOTE: Once a protocol has started, you cannot change it.
2 Stage: Press the combo button to display the stage list. Select the stage to use. The
thumbnail list shows the images saved for the selected stage.
Tips! The area of the stage that is currently acquiring images is highlighted.
3 StressEcho Image Area: Displays StressEcho images by aligning them with View on the
horizontal axis and Stage on the vertical axis. The currently selected StressEcho image is
highlighted with a blue border.
4 Thumbnail List: Displays the acquired StressEcho images by stage. Images that have
already been assigned to the StressEcho image area are not displayed in the thumbnail
list.
5 StressEcho Information Area: Displays the StressEcho settings.
3-108
Chapter 3 Utilities
Pause Protocol
Pauses a protocol. The Pause Protocol button disappears, and the Begin/Continue Protocol
button appears.
Begin/Continue
Starts a protocol. Closes the Protocol Screen.
Review
Switches the screen to the StressEcho Review screen.
Assign
The stage selected in Stage is highlighted with a blue border. The StressEcho images in
the thumbnail list are assigned as appropriate to each view and stage. This cannot be used
after the protocol has ended.
Change View
If Auto Assign has been enabled, this changes the Acquisition Focus View. When you move
the Change View knob on the Protocol window, the blue border also moves to the left or
right in the direction of View. This will not be displayed if Auto Assign or Auto Next Stage
has not been enabled.
Next Stage
The stage will change to the next one. The stage that is currently being acquired is
displayed with a green outline in the Stage area on the left-hand side of the screen.
Thumbnail Scroll
This will only be displayed if there are four or more acquired images. It changes the page
of the thumbnail list.
Close
Closes the Protocol screen.
End Protocol
Ends the protocol.
3-109
User Manual
Release
Returns the images selected in the StressEcho Image area to the Thumbnail list. This
cannot be used after the protocol has ended.
Release All
Returns all images in the StressEcho Image area to the Thumbnail list. This cannot be used
after the protocol has ended.
New Protocol
Starts a new protocol.
Cine Selection
This only appears when you have acquired images using Continuous Capture. Press Cine
Selection or the user key to which Cine Selection has been assigned. Images acquired
using Continuous Capture are displayed per beat. You can assign the displayed images to
each stage and view.
X All: Displays all images separated by beat.
X Selected: Only displays the selected images out of the images separated by beat.
X Previous Page: Moves to the previous page.
X Next Page: Moves to the next page.
X Reacquisition: Deletes the acquired images and acquires new images.
X Select Later: Saves the acquired images and resumes Cine Selection later.
X Complete: Finishes assigning the images for the current stage and moves on to the
next stage.
X Stage: If there is a stage where images have been acquired using Continuous Capture,
then you can switch to that stage and proceed with Cine Selection.
X Page Scroll: Navigates to a different page.
3-110
Chapter 3 Utilities
Reviewing an Image
Select a StressEcho image on the Protocol Screen and press Review. The StressEcho Review
screen appears. Here you can review the selected image and perform measurements and other
tasks.
[Figure 3.52 StressEcho Review]
StressEcho Review Screen

1 StressEcho Image Area: The StressEcho images selected on the Protocol Screen are
displayed. You can review up to four StressEcho images on one screen. At the top of each
image, the stage and view names, as well as the Protocol Timer (T1) and Stage Timer (T2),
are displayed. You can review up to four StressEcho images on one screen.
2 Image Information Area: The probe type, application, frame rate, depth, frequency, TI,
image saving time, matrix, etc. are displayed.
3 WMS Diagram Area: Four of the seven WMS diagrams are displayed. WMS stands for Wall
Motion Scoring. At the top of each diagram, there is a combo button that can be used
to select a stage. At the bottom of each diagram, the WMSI value and the current value
selected from the score menu are displayed.
NOTE: You can perform measurements using the Caliper and Calculator buttons. Pressing
the Calculator button displays the heart measurement menu, and the current stage is
displayed in the menu subject line.
3-111
User Manual
Review
Select a Review Set by turning the knob from Rest-IMPOST, to All Rest, to the Stage that
comes after the relevant protocol’s Rest. Alternatively, you can select the images that you
wish to review manually using the trackball or Set.
Rest-IMPOST All Rest Stage 1 after Rest Stage 2 after Rest
IMPOST
This is activated once you set the Review Set to Rest-IMPOST and there are two or more
stages apart from Rest. It switches to the next Impost Stage each time.
Review Set IMPOST
Rest-IMPOST
View Scroll
Switches the view for the selected Review Set. This is not available if you have selected a
Review Set manually.
Review Set View Scroll View Scroll
Rest-IMPOST
All Rest
Stage 1 after
Rest
Stage 2 after
Rest
3-112
Chapter 3 Utilities
WMS
Four of the seven WMS diagrams are displayed. Enter WMS information after selecting a
stage.
1. PLAX: Parasternal Long Axis
2. PSAX-Mid
3. A4C: Apical Four Chamber
4. A2C: Apical Two Chamber
5. APLAX
6. PASX-Base
7. PASX-Apex
2
8
3 1
9 14 13 7
17
10 15 16 12
4 6
11
5
[Figure 3.53 WMS Diagram]
3-113
User Manual
Left Ventricular Segment Area Number
Basal Anterior 1
Basal Anteroseptal 2
Basal Inferoseptal 3
Basal Inferior 4
Basal Inferolateral 5
Basal Anterolateral 6
Mid Anterior 7
Mid Anteroseptal 8
Mid Inferoseptal 9
Mid Inferior 10
Mid Inferolateral 11
Mid Anterolateral 12
Apical Anterior 13
Apical Septal 14
Apical Inferior 15
Apical Lateral 16
Apex 17
[Table 3.1 Segments and Area Numbers]
Entering WMS
1. Select a segment that you want to enter a WMS into by using the trackball and the
Set button. The Score menu will appear.
2. Select a value from the menu. It will be displayed in the segment’s number and color.
3. Select a desired value on the Score menu at the bottom of the screen.
4. Place the pointer in the segment that you want to enter a value into, and press the
Set button. The segment color will change and the WMS will be displayed.
When a WMS is entered into a segment, the same score is applied to all segments that have
Tips!
the same area number.
3-114
Chapter 3 Utilities
Deleting a WMS
To delete an entered value, select the applicable segment and then ‘N-Not Scored’. The
color of the selected segment will be reset.
Tips! Press Delete WMS to delete all WMS data entered for the current stage.
Delete WMS
Deletes all WMS data entered for the current stage.
Cine Play
You can play or stop playing all Cine images shown in the StressEcho Image Area
simultaneously.
Strain+
You can use the Strain+ Image function. This is displayed only if the conditions for using
the Strain+ Image function are met.
Change Sync
Select Normal, Short, Long, or End to End as the synchronization method for Cine images.
X Normal: Indicates the general Cine image play status.
X Short: Plays the shortest of the four Cine images.
X Long: Plays the longest of the four Cine images.
X End to End: Synchronizes the beginning and the end of the four Cine images and plays
them.
3-115
User Manual
Protocol Screen
After closing the StressEcho Review screen, it switches to the Protocol Screen.
NOTE: For information on StressEcho reports, please refer to ‘Measurements.’
Pressing the Report button after finishing the WMSI drawing on the StressEcho Review
Tips! screen will open the StressEcho Report.
X The StressEcho Report cannot be edited.
3-116
Chapter 3 Utilities
Strain+ Image (Option)

Strain+ Image provides a feature that supports cardiovascular system applications. It uses a
motion vector to see the heart movement.
NOTE: Strain+ is an option of this product.
NOTE: The Strain+ Image function can only be used when the following conditions are met:
X Application: Cardiac
X Operation mode: 2D (Freeze state)
X ECG: On; two or more ECG trigger points; ECG HR: 30–240 Range
Quantification
You may select Strain+, Auto EF, and TMAD.
NOTE: When the image selection is not appropriate, it does not go to Quantification screen.
3-117
User Manual
Strain+
CAUTION: Use the Strain+ function only for adult cardiac images.
Strain+ is a quantitative tool for measuring global and segmental wall motion of the left
ventricle (LV). In Strain+, three standard LV views and a Bull's Eye are displayed in a quad screen
for easy and quick assessment of the LV function.
Tap Strain+ button on the touchscreen. It goes to Strain+ screen.
Strain+ is executed in the following order:
Select an image → Set up the contour line → Calculate Strain+ data → Analyze the result
Select an Image
Select the image and chamber information. The Strain+ screen is composed as follows:
1
2
1 Thumbnail List: Saved images will be displayed as thumbnails.

2 Image Area: The images selected from the Thumbnail list are displayed.
3 Operation Guide: Displays the methods of selecting an image and retrieving it from the
thumbnail list.
3-118
Chapter 3 Utilities
Select Images
Select from one to three desired images from the thumbnail list. Use the trackball and
the Set button on the control panel to select an image. The following two options are
available:
1 When you double-click a desired image, the image will be displayed in the image area.
2 When you select a desired image and click the pointer in the image area, the image will
appear.
NOTE:
X If the conditions for using the Strain+ Image function (i.e., Cardiac, 2D Mode, ECG On (HR:
30-240 Range)) are not met, the relevant items will be displayed in red in the upper left
corner of the image.
X Each image cannot be used repeatedly.
Selecting Cine Position

Set up the Cine for each image displayed in the image area.
Select an image by referring to the following:

Tips!
X Select an image that shows the entire wall of the heart.
X We recommend that there should be an R-Peak before/after the selected image and
there should be more than 70 Cine frames between the previous R-Peak image and the
last one.
Selecting Chamber Information

Select Apical View or Short Axis View using the radio button on the left or the View button
on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If the previously saved Strain+ data differs from the current Chamber information, a
warning window will appear.
3-119
User Manual
Contour Line Setup and Calculations

Tap the Next button on the Strain+ screen. The screen will switch to the Contour Setup screen.
In the Contour Setup screen, a contour line will be drawn on the image and the calculations
based on it will be carried out.
The Next button is enabled only when the three displayed images are different from one
another.
[Figure 3.54 Strain+ Screen]
Step 1: Setting an Image View Method

Set an image view method, and select three images.
X Apical View: Displays each view in order of LAX, A2C, and A4C.
X Short Axis View: Displays views in order of Basal, Mid, and Apical.
3-120
Chapter 3 Utilities
Steps 2, 3 and 4: Drawing and Generating an Endocardial Contour Line

Provides the same endocardial contour line for each view selected in Step 1.
1. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify three points. Select
three points that match the guide. While specifying three points, if you wish to edit any
of the selected points, press the Undo button. Select Calculate when completed.
X Clear: Resets all images that have been set.
X Frame: You can explore the Cine Frame.
X Thickness: Once a contour is drawn automatically based on the three points, the
thickness between the Epicardial Line and Contour Line is adjusted.
3-121
User Manual
2. When you bring the cursor near the point you want to correct, the point will be marked
by yellow borders. Press the Set button on the control panel and then use the trackball
to reposition the point. Press the Set button again to update the contour line according
to the changed point.
3. A checkbox is provided on the left of the values displayed for each segment. Inaccurate
segment results can be disabled by unticking the relevant checkboxes, and the AVO
and AVC values can be adjusted using the provided buttons.
4. To repeat, select the Reset or Edit button; when completed, select Calculate.
X Direction: Subcategories are determined by View.
5. In Apical View, EF values are provided for A4C and A2C, but not for LAX. The Short Axis
method does not provide EF values. Please review the result.
3-122
Chapter 3 Utilities
Step 5: Calculating Strain+ Data

The final results for the three images are provided based on the image view method.
6. Step 5 begins.
7. You can check the Bull’s Eye and comprehensive results.
X Frame, Cine Play, Cine Speed: Enabled when Display is set to Bull’s Eye + Images.
X Display: Subcategories include Bull’s Eye (Default), Bull’s Eye + Images, and Bull’s
Eye + Graph.
X Save as AVI: When selected, images are saved as .AVI files. To use the Screen
Capture function, press the Save button on the control panel.
3-123
User Manual
Strain+ Result
The Strain+ result screen is composed as follows:
[Figure 3.55 Strain+ Touch Panel]
X Direction: For Apical View, the direction setting can be changed to Longitudinal or Radial,
while for Short Axis View, it can be changed to Circumferential or Radial.
X Segment: The default value is set to 18 Segment, and it can be changed to 17 Segment.
X Save Strain Data: Saves Strain data. If you are retrieving a saved image, the used exam will
be automatically loaded, and Step 5 will begin.
X Assign to Report: Saves the Strain+ analysis result to the report.
X Export to Excel: Saves the results and the representative image in an Excel file. This is
available only if a USB flash memory drive is connected.
X Export to AVI: Saves the result in an .AVI file. This is available only if a USB flash memory
drive is connected.
X Strain: Displays the Strain value and relevant Parametric image on the screen.
X Strain Rate: Displays the Strain Rate value and relevant Parametric image on the screen.
X Time to Peak Strain: Displays the Strain’s Time to Peak value and relevant Parametric
image on the screen in Step 5 only.
After finishing reporting in the Strain+ Analysis screen, pressing the Report button on the
Tips! control panel opens the Strain Report.
X The Strain report cannot be edited.
3-124
Chapter 3 Utilities
Auto EF
Press the Auto EF button on the touchscreen.
CAUTION: Use the AutoEF function only for adult cardiac images.
NOTE:
X Auto EF is an optional feature of this product.
X The Auto EF function can only be used when the following conditions are met.
– Operation mode: 2D (Freeze state)
– Screen Mode: Single Mode
X The Auto EF function is not an auto-finishing option and the user needs to set the points
to draw a contour line.
[Figure 3.56 Auto EF Screen]
3-125
User Manual
Select Images
Select a View. A4C is selected by default.
Automatically Calculate
X When enabled: After selecting three points, the user is moved to the Result screen.
X When disabled: Modifications can be made after selecting three points. When the user
selects the Calculate button manually, they are moved to the Result screen.
Calculate
Go to the Result screen. This is enabled after 3 points are selected.
Clear
You can reset and start over.
3-126
Chapter 3 Utilities
Drawing Contour Lines
Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify three points. Select
three points that match the guide. While specifying three points, if you wish to edit any of
the selected points, press the Undo button. Select the Calculate button when completed.
3-127
User Manual
Calculating Auto EF Data
Press Calculate. The screen will switch to the Result screen. Pressing the Reset button will
reset the data and switch to the screen where a three-point contour line can be drawn.
3-128
Chapter 3 Utilities
Auto EF Result
The Auto EF Result screen consists of the following items:
1 End Diastolic: Displays the related information in yellow.

2 End Systolic: Displays the related information in orange.
3 Calculation Results: Displays the Stroke Volume (SV) and Ejection Fraction (EF) values.
If the position of the Cine frame is changed, the calculation results will be changed
accordingly. To reposition the frame, use Diastolic or Systolic. To reset the frame’s
changed position, use Reset Systolic or Reset Diastolic on the touchscreen.
[Figure 3.57 Auto EF Touch Panel]
3-129
User Manual
Display
Subcategories include Dual View + Graph and Quad View Layout.
X Frame, Cine Play, Cine Speed: Enabled when Display is set to Quad View.
Assign to Report
Relevant information will be saved in the report.
Frame
Move the current Frame.
Cine Speed
Select the playback speed for Cine images.
Cine Play
Stop or resume the playback of the image.
3-130
Chapter 3 Utilities
NOTE:
X Based on the Endocardial contour set by the user, it traces the endocardium in other
images within the set Beat and finds its border.
X Using the endocardial border calculated from all images of cardiac cycle and Simpson’s
Rule, it measures the volume.
X Among all volumes of the heart intervals, use the smallest value (ES: End Systolic) and
the biggest value (ED: End Diastolic) to calculate the Stroke Volume (SV) and the Ejection
Fraction (EF).
X The user checks ED and ES.
Simpson’s Rule
Find the position of the Apex, followed by the length component of the longest axis. Based
on this information, measure the volume assuming that there are multiple disks.
Stroke Volume
SV = EDV – ESV
EF (Ejection Fraction)
EF(%) = SV / EDV * 100
(Terminology)
EDV: End-Diastolic Volume
ESV: End-Systolic Volume
3-131
User Manual
TMAD
In the Cardiac Preset, execute Freeze and then press the TMAD button. TMAD stands for
Tissue Motion Annulus Displacement, which studies the function of the heart by analyzing the
displacement of the motion of the annulus.
CAUTION: Use the TMAD function only for adult cardiac images.
NOTE: TMAD function can only be used when the following conditions are met:
X Application: Cardiac
X Screen Mode: Single Mode
X ECG: On
[Figure 3.58 TMAD Screen]
Select Images
Select a View. A4C is selected by default.
Automatically Calculate
X When enabled: After selecting three points, the user is moved to the Result screen.
3-132
Chapter 3 Utilities
X When disabled: Modifications can be made after selecting three points. When the user
selects the Calculate button manually, they are moved to the Result screen.
Calculate
Go to the Result screen. This is enabled after 3 points are selected.
Clear
You can reset and start over.
Drawing Contour Lines
1. A4C is selected as the default screen. Use the trackball and the Set button on the
control panel to specify three points. First, select a point in the direction of Septal, then
a point in the Lateral, and finally one in the Apex. After specifying the points, a line
connecting each point will be displayed.
2. Press Calculate. The screen will switch to the Result screen. Pressing the Reset button
will reset the data and switch to the screen where a three-point contour line can be
drawn.
3-133
User Manual
TMAD Result
TMAD result screen is configured as below:
1. Measurement result and menu: The result of the measurement as well as the menu for
adjusting or saving the Cine are displayed.
2. Image area: The image with the specified points is displayed.
3. Graph: The ECG and the graph of displacement by time are displayed.
[Figure 3.59 TMAD Touch Panel]
3-134
Chapter 3 Utilities
Measurement Result
The displacement and gradient of TMAD points and median are displayed. The color used
for displaying the measurement result corresponds to the color of each point in the image.
Position
X Mid Point: Adjust the location of Apex point.
X TMAD Point: Adjust the location of two Annuli.
Export to Excel
Save the result and the representative image as an Excel file. This is only available if a USB
flash memory drive is connected.
Export to AVI
Save the result as an AVI file. This is only available if a USB flash memory drive is
connected.
Displacement Line
Display the displacement line on the image.
Displacement Graph
Display the displacement by time. The graph line to be studied can be selected from the
check box on the right-hand side.
The color used for the graph line corresponds to the color of each point in the image.
The vertical dotted line indicates the current position.
Frame
Move the current Frame.
Cine Speed
Select the playback speed for Cine images.
Cine Play
Stop or resume the playback of the image.
3-135
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Operational Environment Safety........... 4-3
Maintenance............................................ 4-4
Management cycle..................................................4-4
Cleaning and Disinfection...................................... 4-6
Electrical Safety Check..........................................4-11
Accuracy Check.......................................................4-11
Battery Pack Management....................4-12

Replacing the Battery Pack................................. 4-12
Recharging the Battery Pack.............................. 4-13
Disposing of the Battery Pack............................. 4-13
Information Maintenance.................... 4-14

User Setting Backup............................................. 4-14
Patient Information Backup................................ 4-14
Software.................................................................. 4-14
Network.................................................................. 4-15
Cybersecurity..........................................................4-17
Operational Environment Safety

The user is responsible for the safety of everyone near the product. Please handle the product
with caution even when it is not in use. The product must be installed by a professional
technician. Please remember the following:
CAUTION:
X Using the system near generators, X-ray machines, or broadcast cables may result in noise
and abnormal visual images. Sharing the power source with other electrical devices may
also cause noise.
X Do not install or use the product in the Magnetic Resonance (MR) Environment. Doing so
may result in improper operation of the product due to powerful magnetic fields.
X Optimal conditions for the normal operation of the system are a temperature of 10-35°C
and a humidity of 30-75%.
X Avoid areas where moisture, direct sunlight, or a heater is near the product; that are
frequently exposed to vibration; that are too dusty or are not properly ventilated; or where
chemicals or gases are present.
X Avoid using this product close to or on top of another device, as this may cause
malfunctions.
WARNING: Do not block the vents on the system, peripheral devices, and accessories.
Operational Environment for Normal Operation

If the products, probes and peripherals have been in an environment outside of 10-35°C,
allow them to reach room temperature before turning them on.
4-3
User Manual
Maintenance
Management cycle
Cycle Component Usage
Please clean, disinfect and sterilize probes

Every time according to ‘Cleaning, Disinfecting, and
X Probe lens and case
after patient Sterilizing the Probe’ in the ‘Probes’.
exam X Biopsy bracket X You must clean and disinfect, or dispose of
any biopsy accessories after each use.
X Control Panel Disinfect and clean according to ‘Safety and

Maintenance’.
X Touch Panel
Everyday X You must check it every day to
X Probe holders avoid possible cross-contamination.
X Front and rear handle (Touchscreen: If applicable to the product)
Disinfect and clean according to ‘Safety and

X Console
Maintenance’.
X Accessory storage X Trackball: Remove the rim by turning it
X Trackball counterclockwise, wipe it using a soft
cloth, and then assemble in reverse order
Every week X Air filters of disassembly.
X Foot Switch X Ventilation: Identify the location of the
X B/W Printer filter in each product, separate it from the
product, and then remove dust using a
X Monitor and monitor bezel
brush or a vacuum cleaner.
X Cable and related connector

X Status of pins in probe switch box
Disinfect and clean according to ‘Safety and
X Power cable Maintenance’.
Every month X Power cable in peripheral devices Please clean, disinfect and sterilize probes
X Control panel and keyboard according to ‘Cleaning, Disinfecting, and
Sterilizing the Probe’ in the ‘Probes’.
X Wheels
X External connecting monitor
4-4
NOTE: Since a pH neutral soap solution does not contain strong chemical ingredients, it will
not irritate the skin. The solution must not contain any fragrances, oil, or alcohol.
CAUTION:
X Make sure that the touchscreen is not contaminated by an electrically conductive
substance.
X Contamination of the LCD screen by ultrasound gel or other substances may degrade the
sensitivity of the touchscreen and cause malfunctions. This phenomenon is caused by the
contact between the capacitive touchscreen and the conductive substance. If you find
foreign substances on the screen, clean it with a dry cloth, and then restart the system.
4-5
User Manual
Cleaning and Disinfection

The ultrasound system, probes, and other components that are used with the product may come
in direct contact with the user and patient. Hence, to prevent infections, clean and disinfect the
product in accordance with the procedures specified in this user manual or the manufacturer's
user manual that comes with each product.
WARNING:
X Always wear a protective face mask and gloves when cleaning and disinfecting the
product.
X Turn off the system and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before cleaning
and disinfecting. Otherwise, there is a risk of electric shock or fire.
X Do not clean the electrical contacts or connectors.
X Clean and disinfect the product every day or after each exam.
NOTE: To learn how to clean and disinfect probes, please refer to ‘Probes’.
Information on Detergents and Disinfectants

The device care method determines the appropriate disinfectant for your device. An
appropriate detergent or disinfectant should be used for all products. For the latest details
about compatible detergents and disinfectants, please see the user guide, and information on
the Samsung Medison website.
X User Guide: This is provided as a booklet upon purchase of the product.
CAUTION:
X Using an inappropriate disinfection procedure may damage the system. Make sure that
you check the disinfectant’s expiry date.
X Mix the disinfectant solution to the strength specified on the instruction of the
disinfectant manufacturer.
X When using a disinfectant, wipe it carefully with a soft cloth.
X If the disinfectant solution remains on the product, it may cause the product to
malfunction. After using the disinfectant on the product, please be sure to wipe away any
remaining disinfectant with a soft cloth before using the product.
4-6
Cleaning
The device must be cleaned according to this instruction. Cleaning is an important procedure
that must be carried out before disinfection.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.
2. Wipe off any gel or biological material with a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with
detergent solution (made using manufacturer’s instructions) or tap water, taking care to
remove all visible contamination.
Dispose of the used cloths appropriately according to the local medical waste regulations.
3. For a list of compatible cleaning or disinfectant agents, see the user guide, or
‘Disinfectants for System Surfaces, Disinfectants for Monitor Surface’ on the Samsung
Medison website (http://www.samsunghealthcare.com).
Follow the detergent manufacturer’s instructions for preparation, temperature, solution
strength, and duration of contact. If a premixed solution is used, be sure to observe the
solution expiration date.
4. Wipe off the device’s surface according to the disinfectant manufacturer’s instructions
for temperature, wipe durations, and duration of disinfectant contact. For difficult parts
to wipe such as crevices and edges of the device, use a cotton swab wrapped with a cloth
soaked with the detergent. Make sure that liquids or other objects do not enter the inside
of the product.
5. Visually inspect for any remaining soil and if necessary repeat the steps, starting at step 4.
6. According to the detergent manufacturer’s instruction, air dry the device or remove water
from all surface of the device using a soft and clean disposable, lint-free cloth.
7. Examine the device for damage such as cracks, splitting, sharp edges, or projections. If
such damage is found, discontinue use of the device and contact your Samsung Medison
representative.
4-7
User Manual
CAUTION:
X When you use a detergent, follow the recommendations of the detergent manufacturer.
X Do not spray detergent directly onto the product’s exterior. Doing so may discolor or crack
the surface.
X Repeated use of disinfectants may cause discoloration.
X When using a spray cleaner, do not spray it directly onto the product surface to prevent
liquid from entering the product.
X Do not use chemicals such as wax, benzene, alcohol, paint thinner, insecticide, air
freshener, or lubricant.
X Do not use glass cleaners or products containing bleach.
X Make sure that liquids or other objects do not enter the inside of the product.
X Do not use any liquid containing glycol components such as Propylene glycol, Butylene
glycol, or Polyethylene glycol, including cosmetics, on the external surface of the product.
Doing so may discolor or crack the external surface of the product.
4-8
Disinfection
In general, an ultrasound system has an irregular surface, and disinfection of the entire
surface of the product is not recommended. Therefore, users should follow the instructions of
reprocessing method suggested.
CAUTION:
X When you use a disinfectant, follow the recommendations of the disinfectant
manufacturer.
X Use only the disinfectants recommended in the product user manual to disinfect the
system’s surfaces.
1. Clean the device according to the procedures in ‘Cleaning’ of this chapter.

2. After cleaning, choose the disinfectant that is compatible with your device. For a list of
compatible disinfectant agents, see the user guide, or ‘Disinfectants for System Surfaces,
Disinfectants for Monitor Surface’ on the Samsung Medison website
(http://www.samsunghealthcare.com).
Follow disinfectant manufacturer’s instructions for preparation, temperature, solution
strength, and duration of contact. If a premixed solution is used, be sure to observe the
solution expiration date.
3. Wipe off the device’s surface according to the disinfectant manufacturer’s instructions for
temperature, wipe durations, and duration of disinfectant contact. For difficult parts to
wipe such as crevices and edges of the device, use a sterile cotton swab wrapped with a
sterile cloth soaked with the disinfectant. Make sure that liquids or other objects do not
enter the inside of the product.
4. Wipe off the device surface using a sterile cloth soaked with pure water according to the
disinfectant manufacturer’s rinsing instruction.
5. According to the disinfectant manufacturer’s instruction, air dry the device or remove
water from all surface of the device using a sterile, lint-free cloth.
6. Examine the device for damage such as cracks, splitting, sharp edges, or projections. If
such damage is found, discontinue use of the device and contact your Samsung Medison
representative.
4-9
User Manual
Air Filter
The air filter minimizes the amount of dust that enters the product. When the air filter
is clogged with dust, it may cause the product to overheat and generate noise. It may
also reduce the reliability and system performance. Clean the filter once every month to
maintain the system in optimal condition.
CAUTION: Be sure to lock the brakes on the wheels before removing or installing the air filter.
Otherwise, unexpected movement of the product may result in injury.
[Figure 4.1 Removing the Air Filters]
NOTE: Installing a damp filter may cause the product to malfunction. Make sure that you
install a completely dry filter.
4-10
Electrical Safety Check

The product’s maintenance status may affect the electrical safety of the product. The product
should be maintained in an electrical safety state for the safety of the people.
NOTE: Users may request safety inspections as required, but only trained persons are
allowed to perform the safety inspection.
Accuracy Check
The product’s maintenance status may affect the measurements obtained using the product.
The product should be maintained in an optimal state to ensure reliable measurements.
The equations and tables related to measurement accuracy are included in the ‘Measurements’.
NOTE: In case of doubt in the measurements, please contact your local Service Department
for an accuracy test.
4-11
User Manual
Battery Pack Management

The battery pack is a consumable, and will lose performance over time. If the battery life
becomes less than half of what it was when first purchased, it is time for a replacement.
NOTE: To purchase a battery pack, please contact Samsung Medison Service Department.
Replacing the Battery Pack

To replace a battery pack, please contact Samsung Medison Service Department.
WARNING: Disconnect the power cord if you are not planning to use the product. Leaving
the product unused and not plugged in to a power outlet for an extended period of time may
deplete the battery completely, making it impossible to recharge the batteries. In addition,
allowing the battery pack to become completely depleted may cause communication
problems for the product.
4-12
Recharging the Battery Pack

Connecting the AC adapter automatically begins charging the battery pack. The battery pack will
be charged faster if system is powered off or in power saving mode.
WARNING:
X If the low battery message appears while you are using the product, immediately save the
diagnosis information and connect the AC adapter.
X Before connecting the AC adapter, make sure it’s the right way up. Forcing the adapter
into the product in the wrong way can damage the product.
X Do not recharge the battery pack using a method other than that described in this
manual. Doing so may lead to a fire or an explosion.
Below is an operating environment temperature for Battery Pack. If the battery temperature
goes beyond a certain degree, stop recharging for safety.
X Operating environment temperature: 10 - 35°C
CAUTION: The battery pack can overheat if the operating environment temperature is too
high, or can take much longer than normal to recharge if the temperature is too low.
NOTE: If using the battery pack as the power source, check the battery icon shown on the
screen to find out how much battery charge is left. For more information on battery icons,
refer to the ‘Monitor > Screen Layout’ section of ‘Introduction’.
Disposing of the Battery Pack

A service representative of Samsung Medison or an authorized dealer must replace and dispose
of the battery.
WARNING: Do not dispose of the battery pack carelessly. Do not incinerate the battery, as this
may cause an explosion or a fire.
4-13
User Manual
Information Maintenance
CAUTION: You may lose stored data due to external shocks or internal errors. Therefore,
backup data on a regular basis.
User Setting Backup

Always keep a backup copy of all information related to the user settings in case of data loss.
Users should not attempt to back up user settings on their own. Staff at Samsung Medison’s
Customer Service Department should perform backup upon client’s request.
Patient Information Backup

The SonoView program can be used to backup patients’ basic information and scanned images.
The data is saved in the system by default, and the user can also choose to save the data to
a specific location. If the system needs to be reinstalled due to a defect in the product, staff
at Samsung Medison’s Customer Service Department will restore the saved basic patient
information and images. For more information, please refer to ‘Image Management’.
Software
The software may be changed to improve the product’s performance. Users should not attempt
to modify the software by themselves; please contact staff at Samsung Medison’s Customer
Service Department for help.
CAUTION: Minor software updates may be carried out without prior notice from the
manufacturer.
If errors occur in the operating system (Windows 7) or a system upgrade is required, please
follow the instructions of the operating system manufacturer.
NOTE: This product uses the Windows firewall to prevent any hacker or malicious software
from accessing the system through the internet or network.
4-14
Network
Wireless LAN (WLAN) Specifications

Wireless Standards IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11b
Wireless Security 64/128 bit WEP, WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK, WPA2-Enterprise
Frequency 5 GHz, 2.4 GHz
Certification KC, CE, FCC, RoHS
Modulation Technology DBPSK, DQPSK, CCK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM, 256-QAM
Protocols for Interhost Communication

X DNS – Only used as client.
X DHCP – Only used as client.
Required Network Characteristics

53 DNS Client
68 DHCP Client
104 Open port for DICOM (configurable on the system) Image file transfer (Minimum 100 Mbit/sec,
recommended 1 Gbit/sec)
135 System Log (Only used as log source)
4-15
User Manual
Potential Hazardous Situations resulting from network security

vulnerabilities
X The following situations may occur in connection of ultrasound system to a less secure
network.
– Delayed or impaired access to scan image
– Delayed or impaired access to patient data or exam information
– Temporary damage or permanent loss of all the data stored
X Problems may occur in changes to network environment such as those listed below, which
require consistent analysis and risk management (identification, analysis, evaluation and
control).
– Changes in network configuration (add or disconnect items)
– Update or upgrade of items connected to network
4-16
Cybersecurity
Threats against cybersecurity have intensified gradually in recent years.
Threats manifest in a variety of forms, including a system breakdown caused by virus infections
or a leak of patient data stored on the system, and unfortunately, no security measure can totally
(100%) prevent such threats. Therefore, please comply with the following to prepare for cyber
threats.
X Do not connect the product to an unsecured public wired or wireless network, and under no
circumstances do you connect to the Internet via this product.
X To start functions that require network connection (Export, Remote Control etc.), use firewall
to restrict access to the network connected with product.
X Place this product in an area where it cannot be operated or tampered with physically by non-
designated persons, and shut off power when it is not in use.
X Only external devices (e.g., USB drive) that have been scanned for viruses and malwares
should be connected to the product.
X If you suspect that the product is infected, stop using it immediately, shut off power, and
make sure that you contact the Security Manager (Technical Support).
X If a new security patch has been released, adjust the schedule with the Service Team to apply
the patch promptly.
X Samsung Medison provides remediation support for known cybersecurity vulnerabilities of its
products until the end of their lifecycle.
4-17
Chapter 5
Probes
Probes....................................................... 5-3
Using Ultrasound Gel...........................................5-28
Using Sheaths........................................................5-30
Probe Safety Precautions..................................... 5-31
Using and Infection Control of the Probe......... 5-32
Electric Shock........................................................ 5-33
Cleaning, Disinfecting, and
Sterilizing the Probe.............................................5-34
MPTEE Probe (Option).......................................... 5-51
Biopsy..................................................... 5-59
Biopsy Kit Components........................................5-60
Using Biopsy Kit..................................................... 5-61
Assembling the Biopsy Kit...................................5-64
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Biopsy Kit..........5-69
Chapter 5 Probes
Probes
A probe is a device that acquires image data by sending and receiving ultrasound. It is also called
a transducer or scanhead.
The system limits the maximum temperature that a patient can contact to 43 °C, and the output
of ultrasound energy complies with US FDA regulations. A power protection fuse circuit protects
against overcurrent conditions. If the power monitor protection circuit senses an over-current
condition, then the drive current to the probe is shut off immediately, preventing the probe
surfaces from overheating and limiting acoustic output.
Probe List
The ultrasound image scanner uses probes to obtain graphic data of the human body and
then displays it on the screen. Always use application-specific probes in order to obtain
the best quality images. It is also recommended to use a preset that is best suited to the
particular organ being scanned.
NOTE: For the configuration of probes and presets that are not available in the US and
Canada, please refer to ‘Probes’.
Thermal Index (TI) Table

Thermal Index (TI) is displayed in the Title area of the screen and represents the
probability of temperature rise in a particular area of the body. There are soft tissue
(TIs), bone (TIb), and cranial bone (TIc) thermal indexes, depending on the body part. This
product is configured to automatically display a thermal index according to the selected
probe and application.
Types of probes, applications, presets, and thermal indexes available in this product are as
follows:
5-3
User Manual
Probe Application Preset Thermal Index
Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

Abdomen
Upper TIb
General, Superficial, Deep TIs

MSK
Spine TIb
Small Parts Breast, Thyroid, Testicle TIs
Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Arterial1, Venous TIs

LA3-14AD
1st Trimester TIs
OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart TIb
GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs
Ped Abd TIs
Pediatric Ped Hip TIb
Neo Head TIc
Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

MSK
Spine TIb
Small Parts Breast, Thyroid,Testicle TIs
Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs
LA2-9A 1st Trimester TIs

OB
Ped Abd TIs
Pediatric Neo Head TIc
Ped Hip TIb
5-4
Chapter 5 Probes
MSK General, Superficial, Deep TIs
1st Trimester TIs

LA3-16AI OB
Ped Abd TIs
Ped Hip TIb

MSK
Spine TIb
LA4-18BD 1st Trimester TIs

OB
Ped Abd TIs
Ped Hip TIb
5-5
User Manual

MSK
Spine TIb
LA3-16A 1st Trimester TIs

OB
Ped Abd TIs
Ped Hip TIb
Abdomen, Abdomen1, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

Abdomen
Upper TIb

MSK
Spine TIb
1st Trimester TIs

OB
2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart, NT TIb
CA1-7AD
Ped Abd TIs
Ped Hip TIb
Urology Prostate, Bladder TIs
5-6
Chapter 5 Probes

MSK
Spine TIb
1st Trimester TIs

OB
CA2-9AD GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs
Ped Abd TIs
Ped Hip TIb
CA2-6BM Abdomen Abdomen, Renal TIs

MSK
Spine TIb
1st Trimester TIs

OB
CA4-10M GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs
Ped Abd TIs
Ped Hip TIb
5-7
User Manual

MSK
Spine TIb
1st Trimester TIs

OB
CF4-9 GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs
Ped Abd TIs
Ped Hip TIb
Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta TIs

Abdomen
Upper TIb
Cardiac Adult Echo, Echo Penetration, Ped Echo, Aortic Arch TIs
PA1-5A
Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs
Vascular
TCD TIc
Pediatric Ped Abd TIs
Cardiac Adult Echo, Ped Echo, Aortic Arch TIs

PA3-8B Vascular
TCD TIc
Ped Abd TIs

Pediatric
Neo Head TIc
Cardiac Adult Echo, Echo Penetration, Ped Echo, Aortic Arch TIs
PE2-4 Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc
Pediatric Ped Abd TIs
5-8
Chapter 5 Probes
1st Trimester TIs

OB
EA2-11B
1st Trimester TIs

OB
ER4-9

MSK
Spine TIb
1st Trimester TIs

OB
CV1-8AD GYN Uterus, Adnexa TIs
Ped Abd TIs
Ped Hip TIb
1st Trimester TIs

OB
V5-9
Cardiac Adult Echo, Ped Echo TIs
DP2B Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc
Cardiac Adult Echo, Ped Echo TIs
CW6.0 Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc
5-9
User Manual
MMPT3-7 Cardiac Adult Echo, Ped Echo, Aortic Arch TIs
Cardiac Adult Echo, Ped Echo, Aortic Arch TIs

PA4-12B Vascular
TCD TIc
Ped Abd TIs

Pediatric
Neo Head TIc
1st Trimester TIs

OB
VR5-9
1st Trimester TIs

OB
EVN4-9
Cardiac Ped Echo TIs
DP8B Carotid, Arterial, Venous TIs

Vascular
TCD TIc
1st Trimester TIs

OB

MSK
CA3-10A Spine, Spine1 TIb
Ped Abd TIs
Ped Hip TIb
5-10
Chapter 5 Probes
1st Trimester TIs

OB
EA2-11AR
1st Trimester TIs

OB
EA2-11AV
1st Trimester TIs

OB
EV2-10A
NOTE:
X Besides the system-optimized presets, users can select preferred settings from User 1 to
User 8.
X For information on selection and settings of probes, please refer to ‘Starting Modes of
Operation’.
X The default thermal index may vary depending on the preset.
X You can change the thermal index in Setup > Imaging > Application/Preset > Preset
Settings > Thermal Index Type.
5-11
User Manual
NOTE:
X CW6.0 Probe is not supported for XH50/XH60.
X The applications and presets for the following probes are not supported in the USA.
Probe Application Preset

Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta, Upper
OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
LA3-14AD
Pediatric Neo Head, Ped Abd, Ped Hip
GYN Uterus, Adnexa
LA2-9A
Abdomen Abdomen, Renal, Bowel, Aorta
Small Parts Breast, Thyroid, Testicle
LA3-16AI OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
GYN Uterus, Adnexa
LA4-18BD
GYN Uterus, Adnexa
LA3-16A OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
CA1-7AD Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous
Urology Prostate, Bladder
MSK General, Superficial, Deep, Spine
CA2-9AD
Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous
5-12
Chapter 5 Probes

CF4-9
PA1-5A
Pediatric Ped Abd
PA3-8B Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous
PE2-4
Pediatric Ped Abd
CV1-8AD
PA4-12B Vascular TCD
DP8B Vascular TCD
CA3-10A Urology Prostate, Bladder
5-13
User Manual
NOTE:
X The applications and presets for the following probes are not supported in Canada.

LA3-16AI OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
GYN Uterus, Adnexa
LA4-18BD OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester, Fetal Heart
GYN Uterus, Adnexa
LA3-16A
Pediatric Neo Head
CA1-7AD Pediatric Neo Head
MSK General, Superficial, Deep,Spine
CA2-9AD
Pediatric Neo Head
MSK General, Superficial, Deep,Spine
CF4-9
PA3-8B Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous
PE2-4 Vascular Carotid, Arterial, Venous
Pediatric Neo Head
CV1-8AD Urology Prostate, Bladder
MSK Superficial
MSK Superficial
CA3-10A
Pediatric Neo Head
5-14
Chapter 5 Probes
Function List
The functions available in this product for various probes and applications are as follows:
Elasto Q S-
Probe Application Panoramic+ ECG CM TDI PD
Scan™ Scan Flow™
Abdomen O X X O X X O O
X
MSK O X O X X O O
(General O)
X
Small Parts O X (Breast O, O X X O O
Thyroid O)
LA3-14AD
X
Vascular O (Carotid X O X X O O
O)
OB O X X O X X O O
GYN O X X O X X O O
Pediatric O X X O X X O O
MSK O X X O X X O O
Small Parts O X X O X X O O
X
LA2-9A Vascular O (Carotid X O X X O O
O)
OB O X X O X X O O
GYN O X X O X X O O
5-15
User Manual
Elasto Q S-
MSK O X X O X X O O
Small Parts O X X O X X O O
X
LA3-16AI Vascular O (Carotid X O X X O O
O)
OB O X X O X X O O
GYN O X X O X X O O
X
MSK O X O X X O O
(General O)
X
Thyroid O)
LA4-18BD
X
O)
OB O X X O X X O O
GYN O X X O X X O O
5-16
Chapter 5 Probes
Elasto Q S-
X
MSK O X O X X O O
(General O)
X
Thyroid O)
LA3-16A
X
O)
OB O X X O X X O O
GYN O X X O X X O O
MSK O X X O X X O O
X
OB O X X O (Fetal X O O
Heart O)
CA1-7AD
GYN O X X O X X O O
Vascular O X X O X X O O
Urology O X X O X X O O
MSK O X X O X X O O
X
Heart O)
CA2-9AD
GYN O X X O X X O O
CA2-6BM Abdomen O X X O X X O O
5-17
User Manual
Elasto Q S-
MSK O X X O X X O O
X
Heart O)
CA4-10M
GYN O X X O X X O O
MSK O X X O X X O O
X
Heart O)
CF4-9
GYN O X X O X X O O
Abdomen X X X O X X O O
Cardiac X O X O O O X X
PA1-5A X
Vascular X (Carotid X O X X O O
O)
Pediatric X X X O X X O O
PA3-8B X
O)
5-18
Chapter 5 Probes
Elasto Q S-
PE2-4 X
O)
OB X X X O X X O O
GYN X X O O X X O O
EA2-11B
Prostate (O),
Urology X X O X X O O
Bladder (X)
OB X X X O X X O O
GYN X X O O X X O O
ER4-9
Prostate (O),
Bladder (X)
MSK O X X O X X O O
X
Heart O)
CV1-8AD
GYN O X X O X X O O
OB X X X O X X O O
GYN X X O O X X O O
V5-9
Prostate (O),
Bladder (X)
Cardiac X O X X X X X X
DP2B X
Vascular X (Carotid X X X X X X
O)
5-19
User Manual
Elasto Q S-
CW6.0 X
O)
MMPT3-7 Cardiac X O X O O O X X
PA4-12B X
O)
OB X X X O X X O O
GYN X X O O X X O O
VR5-9
X
Prostate (O)
OB X X X O X X O O
GYN X X O O X X O O
EVN4-9
X
Prostate (O)
DP8B X
O)
5-20
Chapter 5 Probes
Elasto Q S-
X
Heart O)
GYN O X X O X X O O
CA3-10A
MSK O X X O X X O O
OB X X X O X X O O
GYN X X O O X X O O
EA2-11AR
Prostate (O),
Bladder (X)
OB X X X O X X O O
GYN X X O O X X O O
EA2-11AV
Prostate (O),
Bladder (X)
OB X X X O X X O O
GYN X X O O X X O O
EV2-10A
Prostate (O),
Bladder (X)
5-21
User Manual
Multi Clear
Probe Application Biopsy TDW CW S-Har. Har
Vision Vision
Abdomen O X X O O O O
MSK O X X O O O O
Small Parts O X X O O O O
LA3-14AD Vascular O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
GYN O X X O O O O
Pediatric O X X O O O O
MSK O X X O O O O
LA2-9A Vascular O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
GYN O X X O O O O
Abdomen X X X O O O O
MSK X X X O O O O
Small Parts X X X O O O O
LA3-16AI Vascular X X X O O O O
OB X X X O O O O
GYN X X X O O O O
Pediatric X X X O O O O
MSK O X X O O O O
LA4-18BD Vascular O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
GYN O X X O O O O
5-22
Chapter 5 Probes
Multi Clear
Vision Vision
MSK O X X O O O O
LA3-16A Vascular O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
GYN O X X O O O O
MSK O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
CA1-7AD GYN O X X O O O O
Vascular O X X O O O O
Urology O X X O O O O
MSK O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
CA2-9AD GYN O X X O O O O
CA2-6BM Abdomen X X X O O O O
5-23
User Manual
Multi Clear
Vision Vision
Abdomen X X X O O O O
MSK X X X O O O O
OB X X X O O O O
CA4-10M GYN X X X O O X O
Pediatric X X X O O O O
Vascular X X X O O X O
Urology X X X O O X O
Abdomen X X X O O X O
MSK X X X O O X O
OB X X X O O X O
CF4-9 GYN X X X O O X O
Pediatric X X X O O X O
Vascular X X X O O X O
Urology X X X O O X O
Abdomen X X O X O O O
Cardiac X O O X O O O
PA1-5A
Vascular X X O X O O O
Pediatric X X O X O O O
PA3-8B
PE2-4
5-24
Chapter 5 Probes
Multi Clear
Vision Vision
OB O X X O O O O
EA2-11B GYN O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
ER4-9 GYN O X X O O O O
MSK O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
CV1-8AD GYN O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
V5-9 GYN O X X O O O O
Cardiac X X O X X X X
DP2B
Vascular X X O X X X X
CW6.0
MMPT3-7 Cardiac X O O X O O O
PA4-12B
OB O X X O O O O
VR5-9 GYN O X X O O O O
5-25
User Manual
Multi Clear
Vision Vision
OB O X X O O O O
EVN4-9 GYN O X X O O O O
DP8B
OB O X X O O O O
GYN O X X O O O O
CA3-10A MSK O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
EA2-11AR GYN O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
EA2-11AV GYN O X X O O O O
OB O X X O O O O
EV2-10A GYN O X X O O O O
5-26
Chapter 5 Probes
NOTE:
X The meaning of each symbol in the table is described below:
– Q Scan: QuickScan™
– Har: Harmonic Imaging
– S-Har: S-Harmonic™ Imaging
– ECG: Electro Cardio Graph Imaging
– CM: Color M
– TDI: Tissue Doppler
– PD: Power Doppler
– S-Flow™: Directional Power Doppler Imaging
– TDW: Tissue Doppler Wave
– CW: Continuous Wave
X MultiVision is only available in 2D/C Mode.
5-27
User Manual
Using Ultrasound Gel

For successful acoustic signal transmission, ultrasound gels or couplant must be applied.
WARNING:
X The use of inappropriate ultrasound gels could result in damage to the probe. Using
damaged probes may result in electric shocks and other hazards to the patients and users.
X Only use the ultrasound gels approved by Samsung Medison. Using unapproved gels may
result in damage to the probe and void the warranty.
X Completely remove the remaining ultrasound gel on the probe surface after using the
probe. Residues from the ultrasound gel may result in contamination and discoloration.
X Do not use ultrasound gels or couplant that contain any of the following ingredients:
– Oil-based lotion type couplants
– Mineral oil
– Olive oil
– Lubricant oil
– Paraffin-based grease
– Dimethylsilicone
– Alcohol such as methanol, Ethanol or isopropanol
– Acetone
– Dioctylphtalate
– Aromatic substances
– Iodine compounds
– Aloe Vera
CAUTION:
X The tip of the gel tube may cause damage to the probe lens.
X When applying the ultrasonic gel to the probe, make sure that the tip of the gel tube does
not touch the surface of the probe lens.
5-28
Chapter 5 Probes
Gel Warmer (Option)

The Gel Warmer keeps the ultrasound gel warm. Warming up ultrasound gel takes
approximately 5 minutes.
WARNING:
X Always turn the Gel Warmer off when it is not in use.
X Do not put your hands inside the Gel Warmer, as it may burn your skin.
CAUTION:
X Do not use the Gel Warmer for purposes other than to control the temperature of
ultrasound gel.
X Make sure that no items such as the probe slip into the Gel Warmer.
X Do not touch the power terminal of the Gel Warmer while you are examining a patient.
There is a risk of electric shock from leakage current.
X Do not apply excessive force to the Gel Warmer, or you may damage its support parts.
[Figure 5.1 Gel Warmer Label – Example]
5-29
User Manual
Using Sheaths
Sheaths are recommended for clinical applications of an invasive nature, including
intraoperative, transrectal, transvaginal, and biopsy procedures. Using a sheath prevents
contamination from blood or other bodily fluids during operations or biopsy.
Since Samsung Medison does not supply protective sheaths, users must select and apply
appropriate sheaths.
WARNING:
X For more information about sheaths, please contact the manufacturer.
X Always use sheaths certified and approved by relevant national/local authorities.
X Use a sterile sheath for intraoperative or biopsy procedures.
X Use a sterile, single-use, latex sheath for transesophageal procedures.
X Use a sterile sheath(preferred) or single-use sheath for transrectal or transvaginal
procedures.
X Sheaths are disposable. Do not reuse them.
X Make sure to clean and disinfect probes before each use.
X Check the exterior of a sheath before use. If a sheath is cut or contaminated, do not use it.
X In neurosurgical applications, a disinfected probe must be used with sterile gel and a
sterile pyrogen-free sheath.
X If a sheath is used on a patient with Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease during a neurosurgical
procedure, the probe that was used with it cannot be sterilized by any method whatsoever.
X Some sheaths contain natural rubber latex and talc, which can cause allergic reactions in
some individuals. Please confirm whether the specific patient is allergic to those materials
before using such sheaths. Please refer to the FDA Medical Alert released on March 29,
1991.
Installing the Sheath

1. Remove a sheath from the package, and fill it with ultrasound gel. Be sure to put on
sterilized surgical gloves.
2. Insert the probe into the sheath and pull the latex tip to cover the probe completely. If
possible, cover the probe cable as well.
3. Ensure that there are no air bubbles trapped within the ultrasound gel. If necessary,
secure the sheath to the probe and the probe cable.
4. Dispose of the sheath after use.
5-30
Chapter 5 Probes
Probe Safety Precautions

The probe can easily be damaged by improper use or by coming into contact with certain
chemical substances. Always follow the instructions in the user manual to inspect the probe
cable, case and lens before and after each use.
Check the probe for cracks, broken parts, leaks and sharp edges. If there is any damage, stop
using the probe immediately and contact the Samsung Medison Customer Support Department.
Using damaged probes may result in electric shocks and other hazards to the patients and/or
users.
CAUTION:
X The user is responsible for cleaning, disinfecting, and sterilizing probes.
X Probes are not sterilized at the time of shipment.
X Do not apply mechanical shock to the probe.
X In case a probe is bumped against the ground or a hard surface, disconnect the probe
immediately from the console of the ultrasound system. If damaged, the electrical
insulation may cause an electrical shock.
X Do not place the probe cable on the floor where the cable can be run over by equipment
wheels, etc. Do not apply excessive force to bend or pull the cable.
X Do not immerse the probe into any inappropriate substances such as alcohol, bleach,
ammonium chloride, or hydrogen peroxide.
X Do not immerse the probe into any inappropriate chemical substances that are not
compatible.
X Do not expose the probe to temperatures of 50°C or higher.
X 3D and 4D probes may make a slight noise if they are used for a long time or if a certain
mode is in use.
X Probes should be cleaned and disinfected prior to replacement or disposal.
X Always inspect the lenses, cables, and connectors after using probes. If damaged, stop
using them immediately.
5-31
User Manual
Using and Infection Control of the Probe

The ultrasonographic image scanner uses ultrasound, and makes direct contact with the patient
when in use. Depending on the types of examinations, such contact can be made to a wide
variety of locations, including the ordinary skin or the location of blood transfusion during a
surgical procedure.
The most effective method of preventing infection among patients is to use each probe only
once. However, probes may need to be reused, as they are complex in design and expensive.
Consequently, the safety instructions must be followed carefully in order to minimize the risk of
infection among patients.
WARNING: No neurosurgical treatments or examinations should be carried out on a patient

with Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease. If the probe has been used on such a patient, it cannot be
sterilized by any method whatsoever.
If the probe or product is contaminated, dispose of it according to the local biohazardous
waste disposal procedures.
CAUTION: Sufficient washing and disinfecting must be carried out to prevent infection. This is
the responsibility of the user who manages and maintains the disinfection procedures for the
equipment. Always use legally approved cleaning solution and sheaths.
5-32
Chapter 5 Probes
Electric Shock
Since a probe uses electrical energy, if it touches conductive materials, there are risks of injury,
such as electric shocks, to the patient or the user.
WARNING:
X If damage to the product (lens, cable) that can cause electric shock is found, discontinue
use of the device immediately and contact your Samsung Medison representative.
X Do not immerse the probe in liquid.
X Do not touch the probe connectors or the connection pins on the product.
X Do not drop the probe or apply mechanical shocks.
X Inspect the housing, strain relief, lens, and seal for damage, and check for any functional
problem before and after each use.
X Do not apply excessive force to twist, pull or bend the probe cable.
X The power protection fuse protects the probe and the product from excess current. If the
power monitoring protection circuit detects excess current, it immediately shuts off the
current to the probe in order to prevent the overheating and to restrict the ultrasound
power output.
X The system limits the maximum temperature that a patient can contact to 43°C, and the
maximum output of ultrasound energy (AP&I) complies with US FDA regulations.
5-33
User Manual
Cleaning, Disinfecting, and Sterilizing the Probe

All probes must be cleaned and disinfected after each use. Cleaning is an important procedure
that must be carried out before disinfecting the probe. For information on cleaning and
disinfecting the probe, please refer to the appropriate chapter. Using an inappropriate
disinfectant may damage the probe.
WARNING:
X Always use protective equipment such as face mask, eyewear, and gloves when cleaning,
disinfecting, and sterilizing probes.
X Inspect the housing, strain relief, lens and seal for damage, and check for any functional
degradation before and after cleaning and disinfecting the probe.
X Using an inappropriate cleaning or disinfecting agent may damage the probe.
Information on Cleaner, Disinfectant, and Ultrasound Gel
Reprocessing Method by Probe Type

To maintain the performance of ultrasound probes, proper maintenance is required.
As ultrasound probes are classified into critical, semi-critical or non-critical devices based
on the standards of FDA guidance* and the Hygiene Requirements for the Reprocessing of
Medical Devices from Germany guideline of Robert Koch Institute (RKI), proper cleaning
and disinfection or sterilization methods for that classification should be used.
Table for Choosing the Correct Probe-Care Method
Classification Criteria Contact Area Application Probe Level Selection
Curved, Linear, and

Non-critical device Intact skin Low level disinfection
Phased array probes
Mucous membrane High level disinfection

Semi-critical device Endocavity, MPTEE
and damaged skin or sterilization
Blood, sterile
Critical device Intraoperative Sterilization
tissue, etc.
* Guidance for Industry and FDA Staff – Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound
Systems and Transducers - Appendix E
* The FDA reprocessing guidance “Reprocessing Medical Devices in Health Care
Settings: Validation Methods and Labeling Guidance for Industry and Food and Drug
Administration Staff” March 17, 2015 (https://www.fda.gov/media/80265/download)
5-34
Chapter 5 Probes
The care method for your probes determines the appropriate disinfectant for your probe.
An appropriate detergent, disinfectant or ultrasound gel should be used for all probes.
For the latest details about compatible detergent, disinfectants, and ultrasound gel,
please see Samsung Medison website and the User Guide.
X User Guides: This is provided as a booklet upon purchase of the product.
Warnings and Cautions During Cleaning, Disinfecting, Sterilizing

Probes
These general cleaning instructions must be followed for all probes, cables, and connectors.
All probes must be cleaned after each use. Cleaning the probe is an essential step before
effective disinfection or sterilization. Before cleaning a probe, read “Warnings and Cautions”
below.
After cleaning, you must disinfect or sterilize probes by following the appropriate procedures.
WARNING:
X If a premixed solution is used, be sure to observe the solution expiration date.
X Probes must be cleaned after each use. Cleaning the probe is an essential step before
effective disinfection or sterilization. Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions
when using disinfectant and sterilizer.
5-35
User Manual
CAUTION:
X Attempting to disinfect a cable or connector by using a method other than the one
included here can damage the device and voids the warranty.
X Do not allow sharp objects, such as scalpels or cauterizing knives, to touch probes or
cables.
X When handling a probe, do not dump the probe on hard surfaces.
X Do not use a brush on the connector label.
X During cleaning, disinfection, and sterilization, orient the parts of the probe that must
remain dry higher than the wet parts until all parts are dry. This will help keep liquid from
entering unsealed areas of the probe.
X Do not allow any type of fluid to enter the connector. Ensure that fluid does not enter
through the strain relief, connector, electrical contacts, or areas surrounding the locking-
lever shaft and the strain relief. Fluid in the connector may void the device warranty.
X Ensure the solution contains only 70% or less alcohol when using an alcohol for
disinfection. Solutions of more than 70% alcohol can cause product damage.
X Do not use any alcohol or alcohol-based products on the cable or strain relief.
X Avoid disinfectant contact with the connector label.
X Be sure to use the proper concentration of enzymatic cleaner and rinse thoroughly.
X Do not use paper products or products that are abrasive when cleaning the probe. They
damage the lens of the probe.
X Aggressive wiping or scrubbing can damage the probe. Use a gentle wiping motion for the
probe lens, the strain relief, the areas surrounding the strain relief, and the cables.
X When wiping the probe, hold the housing. Do not suspend the probe by the cable. This can
damage probes.
X Do not apply excessive force to twist, pull or bend the probe cable. This can damage
probes.
X Before storing probes, ensure that they are thoroughly dry. If it is necessary to dry the
probe lens after cleaning, use a soft cloth and a blotting motion, instead of a wiping
motion.
5-36
Chapter 5 Probes
Precautions for Cleaning and Disinfecting MPTEE Probes

Proper cleaning and disinfection prevent infectious diseases. The user must clean and
disinfect the probe by using an effective method, such as the one described in “Cleaning,
Disinfecting, and Sterilizing Probes” in this user manual.
Before cleaning a MPTEE probe, read “Warnings and Cautions During Cleaning, Disinfecting,
Sterilizing Probes” and “Precautions for Cleaning and Disinfecting MPTEE Probes” below. After
cleaning, the user must disinfect probes by following the appropriate procedures.
CAUTION:
X Do not allow the probe connector to come in contact with cleaner or disinfectant.
X Do not allow the control handle to be immersed into cleaner or disinfectant. Clean and
disinfect the control handle and the cable with a moist cloth dampened with compatible
cleaner or disinfectant; clean and disinfect only the area between, and including, the scan
head at the end of the probe and the area marked as 100 cm.
Cleaning
CAUTION: Never clean the probe with methanol or ethanol. Doing so may cause serious
problems to the product.
Disinfection
WARNING: Do not use iodine, steam, heat, or ethylene oxide to disinfect the product.
CAUTION:
X Do not leave the probe in disinfectant solution for more than one hour.
X The probe must be rinsed immediately after disinfection.
X For MPTEE Probes, only use the Immersion Method for disinfection.
5-37
User Manual
Structure and Name of Probes
Probe (Non-MPTEE)
3 6
1 2
6
3
5
1 2
1 Lens
2 Housing
3 Transducer
4 Strain Relief
5 Cable
6 Connector
5-38
Chapter 5 Probes
MPTEE Probe
1 Lens
2 Tip
3 Transducer
4 Tube
5 Shaft
6 Control handle
7 Dial
8 Strain Relief
9 Cable
10 Tube
5-39
User Manual
Cleaning Probes
All probes must be cleaned according to this instruction after each use. Cleaning is an
important procedure that must be carried out before disinfecting and sterilizing the probe.
The cleaning method is applicable for all probes provided by Samsung Medison.
CAUTION:
X Only use a surgeon’s brushes on the housing. Do not use brushes on the other parts,
including the probe lens, the strain relief, the areas surrounding the strain relief, and the
cables, than the housing when cleaning probes. Using any types of brushes can damage
the probe lens, the strain relief, the areas surrounding the strain relief, and the cables.For
MPTEE probes, use surgeon’s brushes only on the area between the scan head at the end of
the probe and the area marked as 100 cm but excluding the lens.
X During cleaning and disinfection, keep the parts of the probe that must remain dry higher
than the other parts during wetting until all parts are dry.
X Do not bend or crimp the gastroscope or cable.
X Do not use isopropyl alcohol on the strain relief/housing joint, the strain relief, or the cable.
Wiping Method
1. Disconnect the probe from the system.
2. Remove the biopsy bracket or needle guide from the probe. Collect the reusable parts,
reusable biopsy bracket, or needle guide that need to be disinfected or sterilized, and
discard the disposable parts in the clinical waste bin (For more information on cleaning
and disinfection/sterilization of the reusable parts, please refer to the ‘Cleaning and
Disinfecting Biopsy Kits’ in this chapter.).
3. For a list of compatible cleaners, see the User Guide or Samsung Medison website:
http://www.samsunghealthcare.com.
Follow the cleaner manufacturer's instructions for preparation, temperature, solution
strength, and duration of contact. Ensure that the solution strength and duration
of contact are appropriate for the intended clinical use of the device. If a premixed
solution is used, be sure to observe the solution expiration date.
4. Remove any visible gel or biological material on the surface with wipes or soft cloth
soaked with the cleaner (made using manufacturer's instructions). For difficult to reach
areas such as seams, cracks and crevices of the device, use a surgeon’s brush wrapped
with a wipe or cloth soaked with the cleaner.
Use a gentle wiping motion for the probe lens, the strain relief, the areas surrounding
the strain relief, and the cables. When wiping the probe, hold the housing. Do not
suspend the probe by the cable. Do not apply excessive force to twist, pull or bend the
probe cable. These can damage probes.
5-40
Chapter 5 Probes
Dispose of the used wipes or cloth appropriately according to the local medical waste
regulations.
5. Wipe off the probe surface with fresh wipes or cloth soaked with the cleaner, following
the cleaner manufacturer’s instruction on the temperature, wiping time, and cleaner
contact time.
6. Visually inspect for any remaining soil and if necessary repeat the steps, starting at
step 4.
7. Make sure to follow the rinse (and neutralization) instructions from the cleaner
manufacturer for rinsing the probe. If insufficient instructions are supplied, then, as a
minimum, thoroughly rinse the probe with a clean lint-free cloth dampened with pure
water until all signs of residual debris and cleaning solution are removed. (at minimum
of two minutes) For difficult to reach areas such as seams, cracks and crevices of the
device, use a surgeon’s brush wrapped with a clean lint-free cloth dampened with pure
water.
8. Repeat the step 7 (rinsing) at least three times with a fresh clean lint-free cloth
dampened with pure water each time.
9. Following the dry instructions from the cleaner manufacturer, air-dry the probe or
remove water from all surfaces of the probe with a clean, dry, disposable soft, lint-free
cloth or wipe. If it is necessary to dry the probe lens after cleaning, use a soft cloth and
a blotting motion, instead of a wiping motion.
10. Examine the probe and cable for damage such as cracks, splitting, sharp edges, or
projections. If such damage is found, discontinue use of the device and contact your
Samsung Medison representative.
Immersion Method
1. Disconnect the probe from the system.
2. Remove the biopsy bracket or needle guide from the probe. Collect the reusable parts,
reusable biopsy bracket, or needle guide that need to be disinfected or sterilized, and
discard the disposable parts in the clinical waste bin (For more information on cleaning
and disinfection/sterilization of the reusable parts, please refer to the ‘Cleaning and
Disinfecting Biopsy Kits’ in this chapter.).
Rinse off any visible gel or biological material with running tap water. If it is hard
to remove materials with running tap water, wipe off any gel or biological material
with a moist cloth or sponge moistened with cleaner (made using manufacturer's
instructions) or tap water, taking care to remove all visible contamination.
Dispose of the used cloth or sponge appropriately according to the local medical waste
regulations.
5-41
User Manual
3. For a list of compatible cleaner s, see the User Guide or Samsung Medison website:
Follow the cleaner manufacturer’s instructions for preparation, temperature, solution
4. Fill a sink or bowl with freshly-made cleaner solution.
5. Immerse the probe up to the immersion point shown in the figure below.
X Some probes can be cleaned up to the cable. Do not clean the cable that is within
50 cm of the end of the cable from the connector. For a list of probes that can be
cleaned up to the cable, see the User Guide or Samsung Medison website:
X For MPTEE probes, immerse only the portion of the probe between the scan head at
the end of the probe and the area marked as 100 cm (Ⓐ).
6. Continue soaking the probe until the total cleaner contact time specified by the cleaner
manufacturer is reached.
5-42
Chapter 5 Probes
7. After the cleaner contact time, brush the probe housing with a surgeon’s brush at
minimum of one minute to remove any visible soil. Pay close attention to seams, cracks
and crevices during brushing time. Do not use brushes on the other parts than the
housing; Using any types of brushes can damage the other parts, including the probe
lens, the strain relief, the areas surrounding the strain relief, and the cables, than the
housing.
X For MPTEE probes, use surgeon’s brushes only on the area between the scan head at
the end of the probe and the area marked as 100 cm but excluding the lens.
8. Visually inspect for any remaining soil and if necessary repeat the steps, starting at
step 4.
9. Make sure to follow the rinse (and neutralization) instructions from the cleaner
manufacturer for rinsing the probe. If insufficient instructions are supplied, then, as
a minimum, thoroughly rinse the probe with tap water at 22°C to 43°C (72°F to 110°F)
to prevent the coagulation of blood and proteins until all signs of residual debris and
cleaning solution are removed (at minimum of one minute)
10. Repeat the step 9 (rinsing) at least three times.
11. Following the dry instructions from the cleaner manufacturer, air-dry the probe or
remove water from all surfaces of the probe with a clean, dry, disposable soft, lint‑free
cloth. If it is necessary to dry the probe lens after cleaning, use a soft cloth and a
blotting motion, instead of a wiping motion.
5-43
User Manual
Disinfecting Probes
The probe must be cleaned and disinfected after each use. Disinfection of the probe is
an important step that must be carried out. User must follow the reprocessing method
appropriate for probe type as described in “Reprocessing Method by Probe Type” in this
chapter.
WARNING:
.
problem before and after disinfecting the probe.
X Never use disinfectants after the expiration date.
X The area the probe will contact during use dictates the level of disinfection required for
a probe. Ensure that the solution strength and duration of contact are appropriate for
disinfection.
Low-Level Disinfection
Low-level disinfection of probes uses the wipe method with a low-level disinfectant.
Before performing this procedure, read the warnings and cautions in the “Warnings and
Cautions During Cleaning, Disinfecting, Sterilizing Probes” section and “Table for Choosing
the Correct Probe-Care Method” in this chapter.
1. Clean the probe according to the procedures in “Cleaning Probes” in this chapter.
2. After cleaning, choose low-level disinfectants that are compatible with your probe.
For a list of compatible disinfectants, see the User Guide or Samsung Medison website:
3. Wipe the probe surfaces, following disinfectant manufacturer’s instructions for
temperature, wipe durations, and duration of disinfectant contact. Pay close attention
to seams, cracks and crevices during wiping time. Ensure that the disinfectant solution
does not enter the device or the connector.
X Some probes can be disinfected up to the cable. Do not disinfect the cable that is
within 50 cm of the end of the cable from the connector. For a list of probes that
can be disinfected up to the cable, see the User Guide or Samsung Medison website:
5-44
Chapter 5 Probes
X When disinfecting the connector, wipe only the outer surfaces of the connector; do
not allow any type of fluid to enter through other parts than the connector surfaces,
including the strain relief, electrical contacts, or areas surrounding the locking‑lever
shaft.
4. Make sure to follow the rinse (and neutralization) instructions from the disinfectant
manufacturer for rinsing the probe. If insufficient instructions are supplied, then, fill
a sink or a bowl with pure water and rinse the probe. Immerse the probe up to the
immersion point shown in the figure below. (at minimum of one minute)
X Some probes can be immersed up to the cable. Do not immerse the cable that is
within 50 cm of the end of the cable from the connector. For a list of probes that
can be immersed up to the cable, see the User Guide or Samsung Medison website:
5. Repeat the step 4 (rinsing) at least three times with a fresh batch of pure water each
time.
6. Following the dry instructions from the disinfectant manufacturer, air-dry the probe
or remove water from all surfaces of the probe with a sterile, lint-free cloth and store
it properly (e.g. in a sterile bag) to prevent any further contamination. If it is necessary
to dry the probe lens after cleaning, use a soft cloth and a blotting motion, instead of a
wiping motion.
5-45
User Manual
High-Level Disinfection
High-level disinfection of probes typically uses the immersion method with a high level
disinfectant or the disinfection system method. Before performing this procedure, read
the warnings and cautions in the “Warnings and Cautions During Cleaning, Disinfecting,
Sterilizing Probes” section and “Table for Choosing the Correct Probe‑Care Method” in this
chapter.
WARNING:
.
problem before and after disinfecting the probe.
X Ensure that the cycle is appropriate for the desired disinfection level.
CAUTION:
X Using a probe that is not compatible with a disinfection system or not following the
instructions of the disinfection system manufacturer can damage the probe. This could
also void the probe warranty.
X Disinfection wipes are not FDA-cleared for use on semi-critical devices, which require
high-level disinfection.
X For MPTEE Probes, only the Immersion Method is recommended for disinfection.
<Immersion Method>
1. Clean the probe according to the procedures in “Cleaning Probes” in this chapter.
2. After cleaning, choose high-level disinfectants that are compatible with your probe. For a
list of compatible disinfectants, see the User Guide or Samsung Medison website:
strength, and duration of contact. Ensure that the solution strength and duration of
contact are appropriate for the intended clinical use of the device. If a premixed solution is
used, be sure to observe the solution expiration date.
3. Immerse the probe into the appropriate disinfectant solution for your probe as shown in
the figure below. Make sure that there are no air bubbles on the probe surfaces.
Follow the instructions on the disinfectant label for the duration of probe immersion.
Do not immerse probes longer than the minimum time needed for your level of
disinfection.
X Some probes can be disinfected up to the cable. Do not disinfect the cable that is
within 50 cm of the end of the cable from the connector. For a list of probes that can be
cleaned up to the cable, see the User Guide or Samsung Medison website:
5-46
Chapter 5 Probes
X For MPTEE probes, immerse only the portion of the probe between the scan head at the
end of the probe and the area marked as 100 cm (Ⓐ).
4. Make sure to follow the rinse (and neutralization) instructions from the disinfectant
manufacturer for rinsing the probe. If insufficient instructions are supplied, then, fill a
disinfected sink or a disinfected bowl with pure water and rinse the probe at minimum of
one minute.
X For MPTEE probes, use sterile pure water.
5. Repeat the step 4 (rinsing) at least three times with a fresh batch of pure water each time.
X For MPTEE probes, use sterile pure water.
6. Following the dry instructions from the disinfectant manufacturer, air-dry the probe or
remove water from all surfaces of the probe with a sterile, lint-free cloth and store it
properly (e.g. in a sterile bag) to prevent any further contamination. If it is necessary to dry
the probe lens after cleaning, use a soft cloth and a blotting motion, instead of a wiping
motion.
7. Register the disinfection data for traceability according to local regulations.
5-47
User Manual
<Disinfection System Method>

1. Clean the probe and cable according to the procedures in “Cleaning Probes” in this chapter.
Observe all warnings and cautions.
2. Refer to the user instructions of the disinfection system for details of proper use, storage
and disposal of waste.
3. Place the transducer of the probe in the disinfection system, following the user
instructions of the disinfection system.
4. Start the desired disinfection process and wait until the end of the cycle.
5. Remove the probe at the end of the cycle from the disinfection system and store it
properly (e.g. in a sterile bag) to prevent any further contamination.
6. Register the disinfection data for traceability according to local regulations.
5-48
Chapter 5 Probes
Sterilizing Probes
Sterilization is required for probes when contact bloodstream, sterile tissue or body-space
regardless the use of a sterile cover.
WARNING:
.
X In intraoperative applications, sterilized probes should be used with sterile gel and a
sterile probe cover certified and approved by relevant national/local authorities.
X Sterile probe covers are disposable and must not be reused.
CAUTION:
X Probes must be cleaned after each use. Cleaning the probe is an essential step before
effective disinfection or sterilization. Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions
when using disinfectant, disinfection system, and sterilization system.
X Use low temperature plasma sterilization system to sterilize probes. Using sterilization
solution, autoclave, gas (EtO), or other methods not approved by Samsung Medison will
damage your probe and void your warranty.
X Do not allow sharp objects, such as scalpels and cauterizing knives, to touch probes or
cables.
X For MPTEE probes, do not use any method of sterilization, including methods using
materials such as iodine, steam, heat, or ethylene oxide.
5-49
User Manual
Sterilization System Method

Using a probe that is not compatible with a sterilization system may damage the probe.
WARNING:
.
problem before and after sterilizing the probe.
X Ensure that the cycle is appropriate for the desired disinfection or sterilization level.
CAUTION: Using a probe that is not compatible with a sterilization system or not following the
instructions of the sterilization system manufacturer can damage the probe. This could also
void the probe warranty.
1. Clean the probe and cable according to the procedures in “Cleaning Probes” in this
chapter. Observe all warnings and cautions.
2. Refer to the user instructions of the sterilization system for details of proper use,
storage and disposal of waste.
3. Place the probe in the sterilization system, following the user instructions of the
sterilization system.
4. Start the desired sterilization process and wait until the end of the cycle.
5. Remove the probe at the end of the cycle from the sterilization system and store it
properly (e.g. in a sterile bag) to prevent any further contamination.
6. Register the sterilization data for traceability according to local regulations.
5-50
Chapter 5 Probes
MPTEE Probe (Option)

The Multi-Planar Transesophageal Echocardiography (MPTEE) probe is used by inserting it inside
the body.
WARNING:
.
X The MPTEE probe should be used only by a qualified physician who has received
appropriate training in proper operation of the probe and in endoscopic techniques as
dictated by current relevant medical practices.
X Familiarize yourself with the use and safety instructions for the MPTEE probe completely
before using it.
X Inspect the MPTEE probe for any sharp areas or rough surfaces both with the tilting
section straight and tilted. If damage is found, discontinue use of the product and contact
Samsung Medison’s Customer Service Department. Using damaged probes may result in
electric shocks and other hazards to the patients and/or users.
X The use of a bite-guard is mandatory. Failure to use the bite-guard may result in damage
to the probe, which could result in electric shocks and other hazards to the patients and/or
users. This could also void the probe warranty.
X In order to minimize the risk of "U-turning" of the tilting section in the esophagus, inspect
if the tilting of the tip is properly manipulated before use. (The up/down and/or left/
right tilting may after prolonged use develop an unwanted amount of free play.) If any
abnormal operation is found including an unwanted amount of free play of the tilting
section or excess of the maximal tilting angles, discontinue use of the product and contact
Samsung Medison’s Customer Service Department.
X Only use the probe as an internal insertion probe.
X Do not apply excessive force when inserting or operating the transesophageal probe.
X Do not transport the product while the MPTEE probe is placed in the probe holder. The
probe is not secured, and it may fall.
X The image obtained with the MPTEE probe may differ from the image displayed on screen.
It is necessary to perform an inspection in advance to reduce the risk of difference in
images.
5-51
User Manual
CAUTION:
X The user is responsible for the correct configuration and use. Please make sure to read the
User Manual thoroughly.
X The ability of a patient to swallow or accommodate the probe should be considered. Any
history of gastro-esophageal diseases must be determined and considered as well as
the possible effects of other therapies the patient is undergoing. All gastro-esophageal
abnormalities must be considered as well.
X Only use water-soluble coupling gel for the MPTEE probe.
X Do not use ultrasound gels that contain any of the following agents for the MPTEE probe:
– Oils such as mineral oil and lanolin
– Alcohols such as ethanol and denatured alcohol
– Iodine
– All lotions or gels that contain aromatic substances
– Gels that contain aloe vera, methyl or ethyl para benzoic acid
X Never rub or spray the MPTEE probe with an anesthetic agent.
X The MPTEE probe must be handled with care. It may be damaged when dropped or
abused. In particular keep sharp objects away from the lens. Do not touch the lens
unnecessarily. Never exert force onto the lens.
X Avoid forceful manipulations and excessive force in using the probe, which could result in
patient injury.
X To protect the patient and the probe, keep the probe in brake inactive state on both knobs
when introducing or withdrawing the probe and make sure the tilting section is straight.
X Never manually tilt the distal tip of the probe directly; always use the dials for controlling
tilting of the tip.
X To avoid the risk of electric shock, the MPTEE probe must only be connected to a supply
with protective earth.
X The connector is not watertight, and should always be kept dry.
X The control handle should not be immersed into liquid.
X All internal component repairs and part replacements must be performed by qualified
Samsung Medison’s Customer Service personnel. To prevent electric shock, never open the
cover or panels of the product.
X Do not twist, tightly coil, or apply excessive force on the probe cable or shaft. Insulation
failure may result.
5-52
Chapter 5 Probes
How to Use MMPT3-7 Probe
2
3
4 5
6 7
1 Dial rotation (clockwise)
2 Small dial (left and right)
3 Large dial (up and down)
4 Brake button (left and right)
5 Brake button (up and down)
6 Scan Plane rotation button of lens (counter clockwise)
7 Scan Plane rotation button of lens (clockwise)
5-53
User Manual
Tip Tilting
Use dials to tilt the tip. Rotate the small dial (1) clockwise to tilt the tip to the right.
Rotate the small dial (1) counterclockwise to tilt the tip to the left. Rotate the large dial
(2) clockwise to tilt the tip upward. Rotate the large dial (2) counterclockwise to tilt the
tip downward. When rotating the dials a click is felt at the central position, indicating the
tip is in a straight position (no tilting).
1 3
2 4
1 Left 3 Up
2 Right 4 Down
5-54
Chapter 5 Probes
Dial Brake Mode

In Brake Mode, the movement of the tip is restrained by generating friction to the dials.
The Brake Button 3 restrains the left/right movement of the tip, while the Brake Button
4 restrains the up/down movement of the tip. If the Brake button is protruding and shows
the blue mark as depicted in the left picture below, the probe is in the Brake Active state.
4
3
A
A Brake Inactive
B Brake Active
5-55
User Manual
Lens Scan Plane Rotation

The scan plane of the lens can be rotated from 0° to 180°. Button 5 rotates the lens angle
counterclockwise. Button 6 rotates the lens angle clockwise.
5 6
A B
A Counterclockwise
B Clockwise
5-56
Chapter 5 Probes
Precautions for Using the Probe
DANGER: Do not use the product with a probe temperature outside the range of 25°C to 42°C.
It may cause damage to the human body.
CAUTION:
X Prolonged pressure on the esophagus by the tip of the probe may lead to a Pressure
Necrosis phenomenon. Thus, the tip should be removed from the esophagus wall when
you are not scanning by releasing the tip in the straight position (no tilting). If continuous
monitoring is required, the probe tip should often be re-positioned.
X Whenever active scanning is not desired, ‘freeze’ the image and release the tip in the
straight position (no tilting).
X Position the lens such, that good acoustical contact is established. Before rotating the
scan plane, actuate the Brake Mode on the up/down movement. If this is not done,
rotating the scan plane can mean loss of acoustical contact.
5-57
User Manual
Temperature Change Warning Message

When the temperature of the MPTEE probe exceeds 41°C, the following warnings are
displayed:
Temperature Range Warning Message
Estimated surface temperature is lower than the

Open Circuit Temperature < MPTEE minimum limit of 17.5°C.
Temperature ≤ 17.5°C The system will resume imaging when the surface
temperature warms to 18.0°C.
Estimated surface temperature is xx.x°C.

42.0°C ≤ MPTEE Temperature < 42.5°C
Please reduce the power value.
Estimated surface temperature is xx.x°C, near the

42.5°C ≤ MPTEE Temperature < 43.0°C
thermal limit of 43.0°C. Please reduce the power value.
As the surface temperature reached 43.0°C, the power

value was automatically reduced.
(After the fourth failed attempt) Critical surface
MPTEE Temperature = 43.0°C temperature. The System has stopped transmitting
and returned to the Probe Selection Dialog. When you
reselect the probe, please reduce the power value if
necessary.
Critical surface temperature. The System has stopped

transmitting and returned to the Probe Selection Dialog.
43.0°C < MPTEE Temperature ≤ 50.0°C
When you reselect the probe, please reduce the power
value if necessary.
50.0°C < MPTEE Temperature or Error condition detected. The System has stopped
MPTEE Temperature < Open Circuit transmitting and returned to the Probe Selection Dialog.
Temperature Please contact a Service Representative.
For the MPTEE probe, the following warnings are displayed depending on the status of the
circuit:
X Short circuit or open circuit: Error condition detected. The System has stopped transmit
and returned to the Probe Selection Dialog. Please contact a Service Representative.
CAUTION: The probe is intended to be inserted into the human body; always keep it clean.
Never place the probe on the floor.
5-58
Chapter 5 Probes
Biopsy
A biopsy is an examination method that surgically extracts tissue from the patient for
examination. The probe and the biopsy kit are used together when conducting a biopsy with the
ultrasonographic image scanner.
The ultrasound imaging system shows the needle, which penetrates through the skin surface
and veins, along with the examined body part, minimizing the potential risks to the patient.
CAUTION:
X Ultrasonographic studies using a biopsy kit must be conducted by a physician or qualified,
experienced healthcare professional. Make sure that you comply with the preventive
safety measures and sterilization procedure in all environments.
X Do not use the biopsy kit for purposes other than ultrasonographic studies such as human
anatomical dissection.
X If the biopsy kit is not used according to the user manual or is used inappropriately, the
user has a responsibility.
X Please make sure to read the User Manual thoroughly.
5-59
User Manual
Biopsy Kit Components

The biopsy kit consists of the adapter, needle guide, and needle. The components vary depending
on the probe type.
Needle
Guide
Needle
Biopsy Adapter
[Figure 5.2 Biopsy Kit Components]
X Adapter: Prevents the needle guide from shaking by securing it to the probe tightly.
X Needle Guide: Guides the angle (direction) of the needle so that it may reach the biopsy
target accurately. It also secures the needle so that the needle does not waver.
X Needle: This is the needle that is inserted into the patient’s body. The biopsy kit supplied by
Samsung Medison does not contain a needle.
X Sheath: Prevents the probe and adapter from being contaminated by any unwanted
substances (blood or other bodily fluids) discharged during examinations.
X Ultrasound gel: Ensures the best quality images by filling the air space between the probe
and the sheath with the ultrasound gel.
5-60
Chapter 5 Probes
Using Biopsy Kit

WARNING:
X Only use needles approved for use in your country.
X Verify the condition of the biopsy needle before use. Do not use a bent biopsy needle.
X The needle and guide must be sterilized before use.
X The needle may bend while penetrating a tissue. Therefore, the precise location of the
needle must be checked by monitoring the echo generated from the needle.
CAUTION: For more information about conducting ultrasonographic studies using the biopsy
kit, please contact the biopsy kit manufacturer.
Before Using Biopsy Kit

Check all the components of the biopsy kit. Ensure that the biopsy kit you are using is
compatible with the probe, system, and system software.
WARNING:
X Biopsy kits not supplied by Samsung Medison may not be compatible with the probes.
Always use biopsy kits supplied by Samsung Medison, since improper setup may adversely
affect the patient.
X Be sure to read the instructions for installing a sheath and aligning the needle guide
thoroughly before performing a biopsy.
X Always ensure that the probe and the needle guide are secured on both the left and the
right sides.
5-61
User Manual
Biopsy Procedure
The system generates a needle guideline through the displayed real-time ultrasound images
to indicate the anticipated path of the needle. Use this guideline to ensure that the needle or
other instrument follows the correct path.
1. Ready the patient according to the procedure appropriate for the examination objectives.
2. Install the sheath and the biopsy kit.
3. Set the system controls for the biopsy procedure. If necessary, apply acoustic gel to the
patient.
4. Scan the patient. Adjust the patient so that the location for examination fits into the
needle guideline on the screen.
5. Insert the needle into the needle guide. Perform the puncture by sliding the needle
through the groove in the guide until the needle intercepts the target.
6. To prevent the needle from shaking, press down on the top of the needle guide with your
index finger during examinations.
7. When the examination site is reached, take the needle out of the needle guide.
8. Detach the needle guide, adapter, and sheath from the probe.
9. Dispose of the components that are not designed for reuse.
CAUTION:
X Dispose of non-reusable components according to infectious waste regulations.
X Sterilize reusable components before disposing of them.
5-62
Chapter 5 Probes
Needle Guide Alignment

Alignment of the needle guide displayed on the system is for the purpose of verifying
whether the needle and the needle guide are properly installed. This must be done prior to
biopsy. If the needle fails to follow an accurate path while verifying the alignment of needle
guide, stop using the product and contact Samsung Medison Customer Support Department.
Reverberation or other tissue artifacts may produce false needle images on the screen.
Ensure the needle path is along the guideline and that you are not using a false needle image
to locate the needle.
WARNING:
X The needle used for alignment verification must not be used for the actual procedure.
Always use a sterile needle for each biopsy procedure.
X To assist in accurate projection of the needle, use a straight, new needle for each
alignment procedure.
X The needle guideline only displays the projected path of the needle. Since the default line
may be different from the actual line, the actual location of the needle must be checked
by monitoring the echo from the needle.
1. Attach the biopsy kit.

2. Set the system depth for the procedure to be performed and select the Biopsy menu.
3. Immerse the probe into the water bath, and insert the needle into the needle guide.
4. Confirm that the needle image is on the needle guidelines. If it is, then the needle guide is
properly aligned.
5. If the needle image displayed on the screen is out of the needle guideline, check the
needle guide or the probe adapter, etc.
5-63
User Manual
Assembling the Biopsy Kit
Stainless Steel Biopsy Kit

1. Place a sheath up to the top of the probe’s handle.
2. Mount the adapter onto the probe. If the surface of probe is fluted, mount the adapter in
accordance with it.
3. Insert the needle into the needle guide and start the exam.
5-64
Chapter 5 Probes
Plastic Biopsy Kit

1. Mount the adapter on the probe.
2. Cover the adapter and probe completely with the sheath.
3. Install the needle guide onto the adapter.
5-65
User Manual
4. Install the Needle Guide Clip if it is included in the components.
5. Insert the needle into the needle guide and start the exam.
Using Multi Angle

Tips!
Use the angle adjuster.
5-66
Chapter 5 Probes
Biopsy Specifications
Biopsy
Probe Adapter Reusable / Needle Multi Angle
Model Name Components
Material Disposable Gauge Depth
Biopsy Adapter Reusable

14, 15, 16,
Utra-Pro II Acetal 17, 18, 20, 1.5, 2.5, 4
LA4-18BD BP-KIT-069 Needle Guides Copolymer Disposable 21, 22, 23, (cm)
& CIV-Flex 8.5FR
Cover

14, 15, 16,
Utra-Pro II Acetal 17, 18, 20, 4, 5.5, 7
LA2-9A BP-KIT-043 Needle Guides Copolymer Disposable 21, 22, 23, (cm)
& CIV-Flex 8.5FR
Cover
Biopsy Adapter Reusable 0.591,

BP-KIT-053 Acetal 16, 18, 20,
LA3-14AD Needle Guide & 0.984, 1.575
[BP-KIT-053-NG] Copolymer Disposable 22
Probe Cover (in)

BP-KIT-068 Acetal 16, 18, 20,
0.984, 1.575
[BP-KIT-068-NG] Needle Guide & Copolymer 22
Disposable (in)
Probe Cover
LA3-16A
BP-KIT-055 Acetal 16, 18, 20,
Needle Guide & 0.984, 1.575
Probe Cover (in)
Biopsy Adapter Reusable 1.969, 3.937,

BP-KIT-058 Acetal 14, 16, 18,
CA1-7AD Needle Guide & 5.906, 7.874
[BP-KIT-058-NG] Copolymer Disposable 20, 22, 25
Probe Cover (in)

BP-KIT-054 Acetal 16, 18, 22,
CA2-9AD Needle Guide & 3.150, 3.937
Probe Cover (in)
Single
BP-KIT-065 Needle Guide Stainless Reusable 16–18
Angle 2°
EA2-11B
Single
BP-KIT-066 Needle Guide ABS Disposable 16–18
Angle 2°
5-67
User Manual
Biopsy
Probe Adapter Reusable / Needle Multi Angle
Model Name Components
Material Disposable Gauge Depth
Single
BP-KIT-024 Needle Guide Stainless Reusable 16
ER4-9 Angle 1°
EVN4-9 Single
BP-KIT-061 Needle Guide ABS Disposable 16, 8
Angle 1°

BP-KIT-059 Acetal 14, 16, 18, 1.969, 3.937
CV1-8AD Needle Guide &
[BP-KIT-059-NG] Copolymer Disposable 20, 22, 25 (in)
Probe Cover
BP-KIT-029 Needle Guide Stainless Reusable 18 -

V5-9 Single
BP-KIT-060 Needle Guide ABS Disposable 16, 8
Angle 1.8°
BP-KIT-079 Needle Guide ABS Disposable 16–18 2°
BP-KIT-080 Needle Guide Stainless Reusable 16–18 2°
BP-KIT-081 Needle Guide ABS Disposable 16–18 0°

EA2-11AR
EA2-11AV
BP-KIT-088 Needle Guide PC Disposable 16–18 2°
BP-KIT-089 Needle Guide PC Disposable 16–18 0°
Single
VR5-9 BP-KIT-041 Needle Guide ABS Disposable 16–18
Angle 5°

14, 15, 16,
Utra-Pro II Acetal 17, 18, 20, 3.5, 6.5, 8.5,
CA3-10A BP-KIT-071
Copolymer Disposable 21, 22, 23, 12 (cm)
Needle Guides &
8.5FR
CIV-Flex Cover
BP-KIT-085 Needle Guide PC Disposable 16–18 1.8°

EV2-10A
BP-KIT-086 Needle Guide Stainless Reusable 16 0°
NOTE: None of the model numbers of biopsy kit is available in Canada.
5-68
Chapter 5 Probes
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Biopsy Kit

Reusable Biopsy adapters must be cleaned and disinfected after each use. Read the biopsy kit
user manual carefully before cleaning and disinfecting.
WARNING:
X Always use protective equipment such as face mask, eyewear and gloves when cleaning
and disinfecting biopsy kit.
X Disposable biopsy adapters and disposable biopsy kit parts must be disposed of as
medical waste after each use.
Cleaning Biopsy Kit

Cleaning is an important procedure that must be carried out before disinfecting or sterilizing
reusable biopsy adapters.
1. After use, remove the biopsy kit from the probe.
2. Disassemble the biopsy kit into its component parts and discard the disposable parts in
the clinical waste bin.
3. Rinse with water to remove excess dust from the device.
4. Prepare an enzymatic solution (e.g. Enzol), following the manufacturer’s instructions for
proper dilution and immersion duration. Immerse the parts in the detergent and allow
soaking for the prescribed time.
5. Clean the parts thoroughly using a soft brush. Clean the lumen using an appropriately-
sized brush. If any visible parts remain, continue brushing until clean.
6. Rinse the device thoroughly with water and dry the components carefully. Dispose of the
used drying cloths appropriately according to the local medical waste regulations.
5-69
User Manual
Disinfecting Biopsy Kit

It must be disinfected after each use. Refer to the user instructions of the disinfectant for
details of proper storage, use, and disposal of the disinfectant.
CAUTION:
X Always refer to the biopsy kit user manual for the latest information on the supported
methods and disinfectants.
X A stainless steel biopsy adapter is reusable; a plastic biopsy adapter may be reusable.
A plastic biopsy needle guide is in general disposable.
X Plastic biopsy kits can only be disinfected by using a chemically compatible cold-
disinfectant, either manually or with a medical washer-disinfector. Do not use an
autoclave, gas or radiation.
1. Clean the reusable parts of the biopsy adapter, according to the “Cleaning Biopsy Kits” in
this chapter.
2. After cleaning, choose high-level disinfectants that are compatible with your reusable
biopsy adapter. For the compatible disinfectants, see biopsy kit manufacturer’s
instructions.
strength, and duration of contact. Ensure that the solution strength and duration of
contact are appropriate for the intended clinical use of the device.
3. Immerse the parts in high-level disinfectants and allow soaking for the prescribed time
following the manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Rinse the device thoroughly with sterile water and dry the components. Dispose of the
used drying cloths appropriately according to the local medical waste regulations.
5. Inspect the components for damage such as cracks, rust, or breakage; and if damage
is found, stop using the device and contact the Samsung Medison Customer Support
Department.
6. Properly pack the disinfected adapter and label it according to the local regulations.
5-70
Chapter 5 Probes
Sterilizing Stainless Steel Biopsy Kit

The main difference between sterilization and high-level disinfection is the length of time
that the device is immersed and the type of disinfectant or sterilant that is used.
1. Clean the reusable parts of the biopsy adapter, according to the “Cleaning Biopsy Kits” in
this chapter.
2. After cleaning, choose high-level disinfectants/sterilants that are compatible with your
reusable biopsy adapter. For the compatible disinfectants/sterilants, see biopsy kit
manufacturer’s instructions.
Follow sterilant/HLD disinfectant manufacturer’s instructions for preparation,
temperature, solution strength, and duration of contact. Ensure that the solution strength
and duration of contact are appropriate for the intended clinical use of the device.
3. Immerse the parts in high-level disinfectants/sterilants and allow soaking for the
prescribed time, or steam (autoclave) following the manufacturer’s instructions.
Follow the instructions on the sterilization label for the duration of immersion or
autoclave for sterilization. Do not immerse or steam the biopsy adapter longer than the
minimum time needed for your level of sterilization.
4. Remove the biopsy adapter from the sterilization solution or steam (autoclave) after the
recommended sterilization time has elapsed.
5. Only for immersion method, rinse the device thoroughly with sterile water and dry the
components. Dispose of the used drying cloths appropriately according to the local
medical waste regulations.
6. Inspect the components for damage such as cracks, rust, or breakage; and if damage
is found, stop using the device and contact the Samsung Medison Customer Support
Department.
7. Properly pack the sterilized adapter and label it according to the local regulations.
5-71
Chapter 6 Starting Modes of
Operation
System Power.......................................... 6-3

Powering On............................................................. 6-4
Powering Off............................................................ 6-5
Probes and Applications......................... 6-6

Selecting Probes and Applications...................... 6-7
Creating UserPreset............................................... 6-7
Modifying UserPreset............................................. 6-7
Deleting UserPreset............................................... 6-7
Patient Information................................ 6-8

Patient Information for Each Application......... 6-13
Searching Patient Information...........................6-20
System Power
Please check Safety Precautions before connecting power to the product.
CAUTION:
X Product Installation and initial operation should be done by trained experts.
X Use the correct wattage to prevent short circuit and fire hazard.
X Do not modify, change or remodel AC power plug in any case.
X Do not use extension cords or multi-outlet converters for the product.
X Use the electrical cord offered.
NOTE: Power cord configuration may differ from country to countries.
6-3
User Manual
Powering On
1. Check a wall outlet in the shape and location.
2. Check whether power switch is turned off on the back of the product.
3. Connect the offered electrical cord with the power input in product.
1 Power Switch
2 Power Inlet
3 Equipotential Terminal
[Figure 6.1 Power Connection]
4. Plug the cord into wall outlet.
CAUTION: Do not use multi-socket converter, extension cord or plug adapter.
5. Turn on power switch on the back of the product.

6. Press Power On/Off on Control Panel to check the boot-up status on the monitor.
CAUTION:
X Plug the probe and peripherals in advance before power-on.
X Do not press panel buttons or get it pressed while turning on. It may cause malfunction.
X If the product gets unplugged while turning on or in use, it may damage data or circuit
component, resulting in malfunction.
6-4
Powering Off
Press Power On/Off on Control Panel with switch on.
[Figure 6.2 System termination message]
1. Choose Shutdown to turn the power off.

If sleep mode is selected, the system can switch to the sleep mode when it is not in use, and
pressing the power button on the Control Panel will power on the system.
2. When the product is safely shut down, turn off the power switch.
CAUTION:
X Do not press panel button or get it pressed while turning off. It may cause malfunction.
X If the product gets unplugged or forcefully shut down, it may damage data or circuit
component, resulting in malfunction.
NOTE: Wait over 15 seconds before turning the power on again.
Force Quit
If you can’t quit the system normally, press Power On/Off on Control Panel for over 6 seconds
to force the system to quit.
CAUTION: Do not force quit in normal operation. It may cause malfunction.
NOTE: If you turn on the power after turning it off suddenly, the system may turn on and
off momentarily. This is one of the characteristics of the Intel® PC main board, not a system
error.
6-5
User Manual
Probes and Applications

Before scanning, select a probe and an application.
CAUTION: Refer to ‘Probes’ for more information on probes and applications supported by the
system.
Probe Selection Screen

Press the Probe button on the Touchscreen to load the Probe Selection screen. In this screen,
you can select/change probe or application you want to use and change the probe presets.
The Probe Selection screen is divided into four lists.
1 Probe list: Displays a list of probes currently connected to the system.
2 Application list: Displays a list of applications the selected probe supports.
3 Preset list: Displays a list of presets the selected application supports.
4 UserPreset list: Displays a list of presets you can configure according to your preferences.
1 2
[Figure 6.3 Probe Selection]
6-6
Selecting Probes and Applications

The selected probe, preset, or userpreset appear in the screen area of the monitor screen.
1. Select the items in the following order: Probe → Application → Preset/UserPreset.
2. When you select Preset/UserPreset, the system automatically applies your selections and
switches to Operation mode.
3. Press the Probe button to cancel.
Creating UserPreset
1. Tap + on the touchscreen to create a UserPreset.
2. The Preset Setup window will open.
3. Enter the name you want to use and tap Save. Tap Close to cancel.
Modifying UserPreset
1. Enter the Preset Setup by tapping Preset Setup on the touchscreen.
2. Select a Preset to rename and press Rename.
4. In the Preset Setup window, enter a new Preset name and press Save. To cancel it, tap Close.
Deleting UserPreset
1. Enter the Preset Setup by tapping Preset Setup on the touchscreen.
2. Select a Preset to delete and press Delete.
4. Tap Delete to delete the UserPreset. Tap Close to cancel it.
6-7
User Manual
Patient Information
Press the Patient button on the control panel and the Patient Information screen will appear.
In this screen, you can enter, search, or change patient information. Patient information
includes basic information such as the patient ID, name, DOB, and gender, as well as additional
information for applications.
NOTE: ID is required information.
Basic Patient Information Entry

Enter or change general patient information in General Information.
Use the trackball to move the pointer to the desired entry field. Tap a button on the
touchscreen to enter information using the touchscreen.
When you are done entering information, click OK on the screen or tap OK on the touchscreen
to save. Click Cancel or tap Cancel on the touchscreen to cancel.
6-8
[Figure 6.4 General Patient Information]
[Figure 6.5 General Patient Information – Touchscreen]
Patient ID
Enter a patient ID.
Last Name
Enter the patient’s last name.
6-9
User Manual
First Name
Enter the patient’s first name.
Middle Name
Enter the patient’s middle name.
NOTE: The name that you have entered will appear in the title area and reports.
Date of Birth (Age)

Enter the patient’s date of birth in the specified format.
Gender
Select the patient’s gender.
Accession Number
When viewing the worklist for a patient via the DICOM server, this information is
automatically displayed in the appropriate fields.
Diag. Physician
Enter the name of the physician who diagnosed the patient.
Ref. Physician
Enter the name of the referring physician.
Operator
Enter the name of the operator who scanned the patient. Up to 20 persons may be entered.
Search
Search through the information stored in the system.
6-10
Worklist
Perform a search by connecting to the DICOM Modality Worklist server in the hospital
network.
New Patient
Enter new patient information.
Auto ID Creation
Create temporary patient information using a temporary ID.
Keyboard
Use the keyboard displayed on the touchscreen to enter text.
Start EzExam+™
This function helps you to link an exam with EzExam+™ when the exam starts.
Start StressEcho
Upon starting an exam, you can use this function to link it to StressEcho. This is available
only if the conditions for using StressEcho have been met.
DICOM Destination
Sends the saved images to the DICOM server when an exam ends. Select DICOM
destination and press the Set button. You can choose a location from Group 1 to Group 10,
and change the group name as well.
RIS Browser
Moves you to a Web Browser.
6-11
User Manual
Qview
Moves you to the cloud server.
CAUTION:
X For more information about the RIS Browser and Qview URL settings, please contact a
service engineer.
X Samsung Medison shall not be responsible for any damage to the product if you have used
RIS Browser for anything other than its intended purposes (e.g., accessing inappropriate
websites).
6-12
Patient Information for Each Application

In Study Information, enter additional patient information or change the existing patient
information for each application.
1. Use Application on the monitor to select an application.
2. Enter additional information required for diagnosis.
OB
Select OB from Application. Enter the additional obstetrical information.
LMP
Enter the last menstrual period for a patient.
DOC
Indicates the patient’s date of conception.
EDD
Indicates the patient’s expected date of delivery.
Once the user activates the LMP Link button ( ) in the EDD field, the LMP (EDD) is
calculated automatically and then displayed on the screen.
GA (LMP)
Indicates the gestational age of a patient.
Ovulation Date
Enter expected ovulation date in accordance with defined format
Day of Cycle
Enter length of menstrual cycle in days (Date).
6-13
User Manual
Fetuses No.
Enter the number of fetuses. Up to four may be entered.
Gravida
Enter the number of pregnancies.
Para
Enter the number of deliveries.
Aborta
Enter the number of miscarriages.
Ectopic
Enter the number of ectopic pregnancies.
Description
Enter a description of the diagnosis.
NOTE:
X Refer to ‘Utilities’ Setup > System > Patient > User Defined List.
X Up to 20 persons may be entered per application.
[Figure 6.6 Study Information – OB]
6-14
GYN
Select GYN from Application. Enter additional information for Gyn. This is the same
information as for OB.
[Figure 6.7 Study Information – GYN]
Urology
Select Urology from Application. Enter urological information.
PSA
Enter the Prostate Specific Antigen (PSA) value.
PPSA Coefficient 1
Enter predicted PSA coefficient 1.
PPSA Coefficient 2
Enter predicted PSA coefficient 2.
[Figure 6.8 Study Information – Urology]
6-15
User Manual
Vascular
Select Vascular from Application. Enter vascular-related information.
Left Systole
Enter left systole blood pressure.
Left Diastole
Enter left diastole blood pressure.
Right Systole
Enter right systole blood pressure.
Right Diastole
Enter right diastole blood pressure.
[Figure 6.9 Study Information – Vascular]
6-16
Abdomen
Select Abdomen from Application.
[Figure 6.10 Study Information – Abdomen]
Height
Enter the patient’s height. Enter height in cm, ft, or in.
Weight
Enter the patient’s weight. Enter weight in kg, lb, or oz.
MSK
Select MSK from Application.
[Figure 6.11 Study Information – MSK]
6-17
User Manual
Pediatric
Select Pediatric from Application.
[Figure 6.12 Study Information – Pediatric]
Small Parts
Select Small Parts from Application.
[Figure 6.13 Study Information – Small Parts]
6-18
Cardiac
Select Cardiac in Application.
[Figure 6.14 Study Information – Cardiac]
Height
Enter the patient’s height in cm, ft and in.
Weight
Enter the patient’s body weight in kg, lb and oz.
BSA
When the height and weight are entered, the BSA (Body Surface Area) is automatically
calculated and displayed.
TCD
Select TCD in Application.
[Figure 6.15 Study Information – TCD]
6-19
User Manual
Searching Patient Information
Search
Search through the information stored in the system.
[Figure 6.16 Search]
1. When a search term is entered in the search field, the list of patients who match the
criteria will be displayed. Click the Search By button to search patients by condition.
2. Double click a list where a desirable patient list is selected. The selected patient
information will be applied to the system.
Show/Hide
Show/Hide buttons or lists in the search area.
Search by
User can enter a search criteria.
6-20
Exam List
Show the exam list for a patient selected from the patient list.
[Figure 6.17 Exam List]
Back to Search
Return to the search area.
6-21
User Manual
Review Images
Show the image of a selected exam on Review Images screen.
1
2 4 5
3
[Figure 6.18 Review Images]
1 Continue Exam: This is activated when an exam that is less than 24 hours old is
selected. The page moves to 2D image screen of the selected exam.
2 Hide Annotation: Hide any annotations made to an image.
3 View Scale: Set the image size for review. Select either the Small, Mid, or Large buttons.
4 Favorite: Add/remove a selected image from Favorites.
5 Select/Deselect All: Select/deselect all images regardless of the exam date.
6-22
SonoView
You can review a selected exam from SonoView.
Review Exam
The exams that were performed more than 24 hours before present, and their images,
are displayed. When an exam is selected, the button is activated. When enabled, you can
continue to view the exam images.
Continue Exam
Exams that were performed more than 24 hours ago can be edited. When an exam is
selected, the button is activated. You can use this button to go to the edit exam page.
EzCompare™
Press this button to view dual image of a selected exam image and a live scan image
currently filming.
6-23
User Manual
Edit Patient
You can edit the selected Patient Information. This is activated when a Patient entered
within 24 hours ago is selected from the Patient List.
1 2
3
4 5 6
[Figure 6.19 Edit Patient]
1 Original Patient Information: Displays the selected Patient Information and an Exam
List of the patient.
2 Alternative Patient Information: Displays the new Patient information. Patient ID, Last
Name, First Name, Middle Name, Date of Birth, Age, Gender can be edited.
X Load Original: Loads the Original Patient Information to Alternative Patient
Information field.
X Clear All: Deletes all the information in Alternative Patient Information field.
X Replace from Existing: Loads the selected Patient Information to Alternative
Patient Information field by double-clicking on the Patient Information saved in the
Local Storage or Worklist.
X Search by: Sets search criteria.
3 Hide Patient Information: Selects whether or not to display the patient information.
4 Send DICOM after changing patient information: Group1: After you edit the Patient
Information, choose whether to send it to DICOM by pressing the U Key to which the
Send DICOM function has been mapped.
5 Change: Changes the Patient Information.
6 Cancel: Cancels the editing.
6-24
Send
Send images to the DICOM server.
Delete
Delete the exam.
6-25
User Manual
Worklist Search
Perform a search by connecting to the DICOM Modality Worklist server in the hospital
network.
NOTE: A worklist search is available only when DICOM is enabled. You can select the worklist
server in Setup > Connectivity > DICOM. Refer to the ‘DICOM Settings’ section of ‘Utilities’
1. Select Worklist from Patient on the monitor or touchscreen.

2. After entering at least one item out of Patient ID, Last Name, Worklist Number (Accession
Number), Procedure ID, Exam Date, and/or name of the equipment being used for exam
(AE Title), click Search. The list of patients who match the criteria will be displayed.
X Clicking items such as Date/Time or Patient Name sorts entries into alphabetical or
Tips! numerical order for the selected criteria.
X Select Today, Last Week, Last Month, or Manual as Exam Date.
X After running a search, the date of the last update is displayed in the bottom right corner.
3. Double click on the desired patient list. This applies the selected patient information to
the system.
Start Exam with Temp ID

A Temp ID will be created automatically when an exam begins.
[Figure 6.20 Search – Worklist]
6-26
Chapter 7
Modes of Operation
Information...............................................7-3
Basic Mode................................................7-6
2D Mode.....................................................................7-6
S-Detect™ for Breast............................................ 7-29
S-Detect™ for Thyroid.......................................... 7-40
M Mode................................................................... 7-54
Color Doppler Mode.............................................. 7-56
Power Doppler Mode.............................................7-61
PW Spectral Doppler Mode.................................. 7-63
CW Spectral Doppler Mode.................................. 7-69
TDI Mode.................................................................. 7-71
TDW Mode................................................................7-72
ElastoScan™ Mode................................................7-73
MV-Flow™...............................................................7-81
Combined Mode..................................... 7-84

2D/C/PW Mode...................................................... 7-84
2D/PD/PW Mode.................................................... 7-84
2D/C/CW Mode...................................................... 7-84
2D/C/M Mode......................................................... 7-84
2D/TDI/TDW Mode................................................ 7-85
Dual Live Mode...................................................... 7-85
Chapter 7
Multi-Image Mode................................. 7-86
Dual Mode............................................................... 7-86
Quad Mode............................................................. 7-87
3D/4D Mode........................................... 7-88

3D Stand By............................................................ 7-96
3D View – MPR..................................................... 7-100
Orientation Dot.....................................................7-110
Render Setup.........................................................7-110
VOCAL
(Virtual Organ Computer Aided analysis)........ 7-114
3D XI....................................................................... 7-121
XI VOCAL................................................................ 7-131
XI STIC
(Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)...............7-138
3D MXI....................................................................7-142
RealisticVue™.......................................................7-152
CrystalVue™..........................................................7-154
Chroma...................................................................7-156
Preset..................................................................... 7-157
5D NT™..................................................................7-158
5D Follicle™.......................................................... 7-161
5D Heart Color™..................................................7-164
Slab 3D...................................................................7-166
Information
This chapter provides the items that can be used in each Operation mode. You can change the
image format or optimize an image to facilitate your diagnosis.
Types of Mode and Basic Usage

Mode Type Description
2D Mode
Color Doppler Mode
Power Doppler Mode
M Mode Each mode has a specific usage and
Basic Mode PW Spectral Doppler Mode features. By default, 2D Mode is
CW Spectral Doppler Mode applied together with another mode.
TDI (Tissue Doppler Imaging) Mode
TDW (Tissue Doppler Wave) Mode
ElastoScan™ Mode
2D/C/PW Mode
2D/PD/PW Mode
Two or three basic modes are applied
2D/C/CW Mode to one image at the same time. By
Combined Mode 2D/PD/CW Mode default, 2D Mode is applied as well
2D/C/M Mode and you can observe them all on a
single screen.
2D/TDI/TDW Mode
Dual Live Mode
The screen is divided into two (Dual)

or four (Quad) identical sections;
each of which is used to view images.
Dual Mode
Multi-Image Mode Since the split screen can show
Quad Mode
different images, it can be very
useful when observing an organ from
different angles.
3D Mode 3D and 4D images can be obtained.

3D Mode 4D Mode A mode where general probes are
Freehand 3D Mode used is called Freehand 3D Mode.
NOTE: The functionalities for each mode may be restricted by the selected probe.
7-3
User Manual
Gain
You can adjust the brightness of the relevant Operation mode.
TGC (Time Gain Compensation)

Tap the TGC button on the touchscreen to open the TGC window for use.
In general, ultrasound penetration gets weaker with depth. TGC can be used to
compensate for this effect.
The product provides eight TGC sliders for varying depths, allowing you to adjust Gain by
area. Among the eight sliders, the top slider represents the shallowest area, while the
lower sliders represent the deeper ones.
Move the slider to the right to increase Gain, brightening the image.
When the TGC preset is selected, the TGC preset is applied to the system and then the
system is switched to Operation mode. The user can adjust TGC as needed, and press Save
to save it for use.
Focus
Adjusts the focus of an image.
Depth
Adjusts the scanning depth of an image. The range varies depending on the probe in use.
Zoom
Different zoom methods apply as follows:
This allows you to enlarge images displayed on the screen.

1. Rotate the Zoom dial-button left or right.
2. Use the Trackball to move the Zoom Box. You can locate the Zoom box in an
Read Zoom
image with the Zoom Navigation Box on the left side of the screen.
3. Observe the magnified image. If you rotate the dial-button clockwise, the
image is magnified.
This function allows you to magnify and scan an image in real time.
1. Press Zoom. The Write Zoom Box will appear on the screen.
2. Move and resize the Zoom Box using Change.
Write Zoom
3. When you press Set, it changes to Write Zoom. To exit Zoom mode, press
Zoom again. When using Write Zoom, changing Depth automatically
finishes Zoom mode.
7-4
QuickScan™
QuickScan™ technology provides intuitive optimization of gray scale and Doppler
parameters. QuickScan™ enables users to adjust ROI box location with one touch of a
button.
NOTE: QuickScan™ is available in every probe’s applications.
Press the Q Scan button on the control panel. At the top of an image, the ‘Q Scan’ mark
will be displayed.
In 2D Mode, it is used to optimize the contrast and brightness of an image by adjusting
Gain and TGC automatically. In PW Spectral Doppler Mode, the spectrum can be optimized
by adjusting the Scale and Baseline values automatically. In Color Mode, it is used to
automatically adjust the position of the Box. (Only available with certain probes.)
To exit QuickScan™ mode, press Exit on the control panel.
Using Touchscreen Menus

The items that can be used in each Operation mode are provided as touchscreen menu items.
You can change the image format or optimize an image to facilitate your diagnosis.
1. In Operation modes, the menu for the Operation mode currently being used is displayed
on the touchscreen.
In a combined mode that uses more than one Operation mode, tap the relevant tab on the
touchscreen to specify settings for each mode.
2. Select a value by pressing a button or by rotating the dial-button on the control panel.
7-5
User Manual
Basic Mode
2D Mode
This basic mode, also referred to as B Mode (Brightness mode), provides scan planes of organs.
This is used to display two-dimensional anatomy images in the direction of scanning in real time.
Entering 2D Mode
Pressing 2D in another mode starts the default mode, 2D mode.
NOTE: Because 2D Mode is applied by default for all Operation modes, it cannot be
terminated.
2D Mode Menu
[Figure 7.1 2D Mode – Touchscreen]
7-6
Harmonic
This provides an OHI (Optimal Harmonic Imaging) function, which optimizes images using
harmonic signal. In the image information, is displayed.
NOTE: Only available with certain probes.
Frequency
This enables you to set the probe’s frequency. The selected frequency is displayed in the
title area.
X Res (Resolution): High frequency
X Gen (General): Normal frequency
X Pen (Penetration): Low frequency
Line Density
Set the scan line density. Selecting High increases the number of scan lines and improves
the image resolution. However, the frame rate is reduced.
L/R Flip (Left/Right Flip)

Flips the image horizontally. The Direction Marker at the top of the image indicates the
current image direction.
7-7
User Manual
S-Harmonic™
S-Harmonic™ mitigates the signal noise, enhances contrast, and provides uniform image
performance of overall image area from near-to-far.
Turn this function On or Off by tapping S-Harmonic™ on the touchscreen. The ‘S-HAR’
mark will be displayed in the Image Information.
Tap the S-Harmonic™ button on the touchscreen. S-Harmonic™ inverts the pulses
to sharpen the displayed image. If it is On, ‘S-Harmonic™’ is displayed in the Image
Information.
NOTE:
X Harmonic and S-Harmonic™ only work with certain probes. For more information, please
refer to the ‘Probe List’ section in the ‘Probes’ chapter.
X S-Harmonic™ may display lines in the near field for certain probes in Non-scan Mode.
This is due to the technical characteristics that improve the sensitivity and resolution of
the ultrasound images, and does not cause any problems in Scan mode.
ClearVision
Tap ClearVision on the touchscreen. The noise reduction filter improves edge
enhancement and creates sharp 2D images for optimal diagnostic performance. In
addition, ClearVision provides application-specific optimization and advanced temporal
resolution in live scan mode. The ‘ClearVision’ mark will be displayed in the image
information. Tap the button on the touchscreen to select an Index between 1 and 5. Select
Off to turn the feature off.
HQ-Vision™
HQ-Vision™ provides clear images by mitigating the characteristics of ultrasound images
that are slightly blurred than the actual vision. It is useful to acquire images of fine
structures, such as muscles, ligaments, and muscular fibers of the human body. In the
image information, is displayed.
NOTE:
X HQ-Vision™ is an optional feature of this product.
X HQ-Vision™ is available in 2D Mode and 2D/C Mode, and also in Write Zoom state.
7-8
Biopsy Guide
[Figure 7.2 Biopsy Guide]
Setting the Biopsy Guideline

Tips!
CAUTION: Make sure to adjust the biopsy guideline before using the biopsy
feature.
X Support for Multiple Guidelines

If the probe supports multiple biopsy angles, the user may select the biopsy guide angle
as desired.
X Starting and Finishing a Biopsy
1. Tap Biopsy Guide on the touchscreen.
2. Insert the needle along the guideline. And then perform the biopsy as desired.
3. When all procedures are complete, tap Biopsy Guide again to turn this Off. Biopsy will
end.
7-9
User Manual
Biopsy Guide Edit Mode

Tips!
NOTE:
X Only available in 2D mode and Single mode.
X Not available in Dual Live or Freeze state.
X Not available in Write Zoom or Read Zoom state.
X Starting and Ending Biopsy Guide Edit Mode

1. Tap Biopsy Guide on the touchscreen.
2. Use the Angle dial-button on the control panel to enter Biopsy Guide Edit mode.
3. When you enter Biopsy Guide Edit mode, Angle Offset appears.
4. Press the Angle dial-button and select Angle Offset or Lateral Offset.
– Angle Offset: This is the angle for the currently selected biopsy guide; the
maximum adjustable offset is the guideline’s outer line angle. You can adjust this
value by 0.1 amounts by turning the Angle dial-button.
– Lateral Offset: This is the lateral direction for the currently selected biopsy guide.
You can adjust this value by 0.1 mm amounts by turning the Angle dial-button.
5. Press the Angle dial-button to exit Biopsy Guide Edit mode.
U/D Flip (Up/Down Flip)

This flips the image vertically.
Dual Live
Tap Dual Live on the touchscreen and select On or Off. View the 2D/Color Doppler images
of the scanned area simultaneously in real time. When viewing Cine images in Dual Live
mode, various settings are applied only to the Cine image on the right side, allowing you to
compare it with the unaffected Cine image on the left side.
MultiVision
Provides improved resolution by combining complex beam steering and scan lines. is
displayed in the Image Information. Select a MultiVision value using the knob button. Note
that MultiVision can only be set to Low in 2D/C mode. Select Off to turn the feature off.
NOTE: This feature only works with certain probes. For more information, refer to ‘Probe List’
in ‘Probes’.
7-10
Trapezoid
The rectangular frame provided by a Linear probe is changed to a trapezoidal shape. This
allows a wider view of an image.
NOTE:
X Only available with certain probes.
X It is not available in certain depth.
2D NT
You can use the ROI box to measure the NT more easily.
1. When you move the ROI box by using the trackball and press Set at a desirable location,
the measurement is shown on the screen.
2. If you want to measure a different location, press Set on the control panel to finish the
current measurement and then press Set again.
3. You can press Reset for remeasurement.
NOTE:
X 2D NT is enabled under the following conditions:
– 2D Freeze Mode
– Measurement Item: OB
X Changing the image, such as Zoom, is not available.
X The 2D NT measurements will be saved and displayed in the report.
CAUTION: The measurement value may have a margin of error of ±1mm.
Rotation
Rotates the 2D image.
7-11
User Manual
NeedleMate+™
With pinpoint precision, NeedleMate+™ delineates needle location when performing
interventions such as nerve blocks. Improved accuracy and efficiency in procedure are
possible with beam steering added to NeedleMate+™.
Tap NeedleMate+™ on the touchscreen. NeedleMate+™ is a feature that helps visualize
the biopsy needle clearly in an ultrasound image. Choose the direction to optimize the
image between From Left and From Right. Select Off to turn the feature off.
From Left From Right
From the upper left to the lower right

From the upper right to lower left or
Description or from the lower right to the upper
from the lower left to upper right.
left.
Select this if the needle is being Select this if the needle is being
inserted from the upper left to lower inserted from the upper right to lower
Purpose
right or from the lower right to upper left or from the lower left to upper
left. right.
When turned On, Needle Enhance and Needle Angle are enabled.
NOTE:
X NeedleMate+™ is an optional feature of this product.
X This feature only works with certain probes. For more information, please refer to the
‘Probe List’ section in the ‘Probes’ chapter.
Needle Enhance
This feature only works while NeedleMate+™ is On. Select 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the degree of
needle enhancement by tapping the button on the touchscreen.
X 1: The needle is thin with weak enhancement.
X 2: The needle is thin with strong enhancement.
X 3: The needle is thick with weak enhancement.
X 4: The needle is thick with strong enhancement.
7-12
Needle Angle
Sets the entry angle of the biopsy needle in images. Tap this button on the touchscreen to
select Shallow, Medium, or Steep.
DR (Dynamic Range)
This function adjusts contrast by changing the ratio of the minimum input signal value to
the maximum input signal value. The higher the value, the smoother the displayed image.
Frame Average
When an image is updated, the present image and the previous image are averaged. When
you scan the same diagnosis site repeatedly, speckles may appear on the updated image.
It is used to minimize these speckles.
Focus Number
Change the number of focus points at the target location you wish to study.
Reject
This function is used to eliminate noise or low level echo for clearer signals.
Image Size
Used to specify 2D image size.
Gray Map
This changes the 2D Post Curve.
Chroma Map
Used to configure 2D/3D image colors.
Edge Enhance
Allows you to view more accurate images of organ or tissue boundaries. A higher value
provides more accurate images of boundaries.
Power
Sets the ultrasound output intensity.
7-13
User Manual
Scan Area
Select an image width (%). Increasing the image width reduces the frame rate.
Press Change to change the trackball state to ROI Size, and then adjust the value using the
trackball.
Steer Angle
You can change the ultrasound beam’s angle without moving the probe.
NOTE: The Steer function only appears on the soft menu when a linear probe is used.
Free Angle Plane

You can adjust the ScanHead of the 3D probe to a desired angle.
7-14
CEUS+ (Contrast Enhanced Ultrasound)

CEUS+ is a contrast enhancement imaging technology that utilizes the characteristics of
ultrasound contrast agents. The microbubble contrast agent injected into the body through
the vein or alike is subjected to perform nonlinear resonance due to stimulation of ultrasound
energy. In addition to the nonlinear signal generated by this method, the ultrasound contrast
image is implemented by using the harmonic signal and thus utilized for the diagnosis based
on the contrast characteristics over time.
CAUTION: The system is designed to be compatible with commercially available Ultrasound

contrast agents which use is restricted to only FDA approved application as listed:
X Focal liver lesions in adult and pediatric patients.
X Urinary tract for the evaluation of suspected or known vesicoureteral reflux (VUR) in
pediatric patients.
NOTE:
X CEUS+ is an optional feature of HS60/XH60.
X Some functions, options, or probes may not be used in certain countries.
X Harmonic, S-Harmonic™, etc. are not available.
[Figure 7.3 CEUS+ – Touchscreen]
Timer 1/Timer 2
Starts the timer. When the button is re-tapped, the timer stops and the time is reset. If you
don't tap the button again, the timer will keep running even when the CEUS+ On/Off state
is changed.
7-15
User Manual
Dual Live
When ‘On’ is selected, Dual Live mode is activated to display both Contrast and 2D images
side-by-side. When ‘Off’ is selected, Single mode is activated.
Ref. Line
This option displays the Ref. Line on an image. The Ref. Line in CEUS+ mode is used to
indicate the same location on the Agent and Tissue images in Dual Live mode.
Contrast
Select a CEUS+ type.
X Contrast: It displays contrast-applied images.
X 2D: Displays image in 2D Mode.
Flash
Tap the button on the touchscreen and select On or Off. For the defined frames in Frame,
brighter images are produced.
Flash Frame
Set a value from 3 to 100 frames to specify the period of time during which the Flash
function will operate.
MI Control
Select a value for the mechanical index by tapping the touchscreen button or by using the
Soft Menu dial-button on the control panel.
Frame Average
Frame Avg averages the present image and the previous image when an image is updated.
Select a value from 0 to 9 by tapping the touchscreen button or using the Soft Menu dial-
button on the control panel.
Reject
This function reduces noises or echoes from an image in order to make the image clearer.
Select a value from 0 to 30 by tapping a button on the touchscreen or using the dial-
button.
7-16
Cine Play
Play or stop Cine images.
Trim Start
After specifying the position of the first frame by rotating the dial-button or using the
trackball, tap the dial-button to save it.
Trim End
After specifying the position of the last frame by rotating the dial-button or using the
trackball, press the dial-button to save it.
Cine Speed
Rotate the dial-button to adjust the auto playback speed.
Frame Limit
Select the total frame rate. Press the button on the touchscreen or use the Soft Menu dial-
button on the control panel to select a value between two and the maximum frame rate
for the current scan mode.
NOTE: For more information on other touchscreen items, refer to the ‘2D Mode’. (The setting
values may vary depending on the selected probe type, application, and other settings.)
7-17
User Manual
Panoramic+
Panoramic+ imaging displays as an extended field-of-view so users can examine wide areas
that do not fit into one image as a single image.
NOTE: This feature only works with certain probes. For more information, refer to ‘Probe List’
in ‘Probes’.
Acquiring a Panoramic+ Image

1. Tap Panoramic+ on the touchscreen. The touchscreen switches to the Panoramic+
Ready screen.
2. Tap Start/Stop on the touchscreen. The system starts acquiring Panoramic+ images.
3. Press Start/Stop to finish acquiring Panoramic+ images. The touchscreen switches to
the Panoramic+ Review screen.
Things to remember when acquiring a Panoramic+ image

Tips!
X When scanning a curved surface, ensure that the scan surface and the contact surface of
the probe are always at right angles.
X Moving in the opposite direction while acquiring an image erases the previously saved
frames and saves new frames.
X The image quality may deteriorate if the contact surface of the probe loses contact with
the scan surface.
X If the scan speed is fast or the angle of the contact surface of the probe changes, artifacts
may occur.
7-18
Reviewing a Panoramic+ Image
NOTE: L/R Flip, U/D Flip, and Zoom are available only when the Layout is set to Full Screen.
[Figure 7.4 Panoramic+ Review – Touchscreen]
X L/R Flip: Flips the Panoramic+ image horizontally.

X U/D Flip: Flips the Panoramic+ image vertically.
X Ruler: Press this button to turn this option On or Off. When it is turned On, a ruler
appears on the Panoramic+ image.
X Layout: Specify how the Panoramic+ image will be displayed on the screen.
– Full Screen: Display the Panoramic+ image in full screen mode.
– Up/Down: Display the 2D and Panoramic+ images at the top and bottom of the
screen, respectively. Move the ROI by turning the trackball. Then, the image is
displayed in the 2D image area.
– Side by side: Display the 2D and Panoramic+ images on the left and right of the
screen, respectively. Move the ROI by turning the trackball. Then, the image is
displayed in the 2D image area.
X Return: Returns to the Panoramic+ Ready screen.
X Cine Save: Saves the image.
X Tap the Panoramic+ button on the touchscreen again to end Panoramic+ Imaging.
7-19
User Manual
BiometryAssist™
A semi-automatic technology for biometric measurement, BiometryAssist™, enables users
to measure the growth of the fetus more quickly and with greater accuracy while maintaining
exam consistency.
This obstetric diagnosis function helps you measure fetal growth indices (Measurement
items: BPD, HC, AC, and FL).
NOTE: This is available in 2D Mode only.
Executing BiometryAssist™
Select BPD, HC, AC, or FL in 2D mode, and place the caliper on the section of the screen
that you believe to be the measurement area. Then, the measurement value will appear on
the screen. Press the Set button to confirm the measured value displayed on the screen.
Follow the BiometryAssist™ Operation Guideline to determine measurement positions
more accurately.
BiometryAssist™ Operation Guideline

Tips!
X Position the target at the center of the screen using Image Panning, not Rotation or Left/
Right Flip.
X To determine measurement positions more easily, resize the target using Image Size or
Zoom so that it takes up 40% to 80% of the screen, and then take a measurement.
NOTE: You can configure the relevant settings in Setup > Measurement > Additional Options.
X Select a measurement item from BPD, HC, AC, and FL to display the selected item on the
screen.
X The measurement standard for the BPD Method can be set to either Outer-Inner or
Outer-Outer.
7-20
LaborAssist™
LaborAssist™ is a function that provides information of the progress of delivery by the
automatic measurement of AoP (Angle of Progress) and the direction of the fetal head.
This not only helps in effective communication between the healthcare professionals and
mothers, but also assists in making delivery decision for the healthcare professionals.
* AoP complies with the metrics specified in the ISUOG Guidline.
NOTE:
X LaborAssist™ is an optional feature of this product.
X LaborAssist™ is enabled under the following conditions:
– 2D Freeze mode
– Curved Array probe
– Measurement item: OB, GYN
Launching LaborAssist™
Launch LaborAssist™. Then, the touchscreen switches to LaborAssist™.
1. Select a measurement method. The last measured value is displayed on the screen.
X Auto: Automatically finds the position and measures it.
X Manual: Measures the position entered by the user. Select three points using Set.
Then, the angle formed by the three points will be calculated and displayed on the
screen.
NOTE:
X You can set the default measurement method in Setup > Measurement > Additional
Options > OB.
X The Auto button is enabled when Rotation, L/R Flip, and U/D Flip are not in use.
2. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen.

X Results table: Shows the Number (No.), AoP, Time, Interval (INT.), Station (STA.), and
Cervix Dilation (CX) information.
X Screen: Shows the AoP, Station, Time, and Direction of Fetal Head (Direction)
information.
3. If you need multiple images, then switch to Scan mode, acquire another image, and
perform a measurement.
4. The measurement results are color-coded and numbered.
7-21
User Manual
NOTE:
X Up to 20 measurement results can be displayed.
X The Station information is provided only if the Station Table has been selected and there
is available Station information.
X The Direction information is provided only if the measurement has been performed using
Auto.
[Figure 7.5 LaborAssist™]
Show All Lines

Displays all measurement lines on the screen.
Station Table
Select an Author. Then, the Station information is provided based on the chosen Author’s
data. If you select None, no Station information will be provided.
Demo Video
Plays a demo video. You may pause the video or skip the video forward or backward by
three seconds.
7-22
Demo Image
Turn the Demo Image dial-button in the soft menu and select an index. Then, the demo
image corresponding to the chosen number’s result will be shown.
Displays the current page (the chosen number), the total number of pages (the total
number of measurements), and the time when the result value of the chosen number is
measured.
Labor History
LaborAssist™ checks the history of measurements. It can only check saved images.
X Edit: Select the images that you wish to remove from the screen. Press Done. Then, the
selected images will be removed from the screen.
X Adjust: Arranges the displayed images by Pubis Line and only displays the ultrasound
images and measurement lines. To view the original images again, press Origin.
X Page: Navigates to a different page.
Delete All
Deletes all displayed results from the image and the results table.
Delete Last
Deletes the last displayed result from the image and the results table.
Assign Cervix
Enter the cervical length which has been set using Cervix Dilatation into the results table.
Fetus
If it is a multiple pregnancy, choose a fetus.
7-23
User Manual
Font Size
Specify the font size for the measurement results shown in the images.
[Figure 7.6 LaborAssist™ – Touchscreen]
7-24
2D Follicle™
2D Follicle™ is a function to measure the size of follicles based on 2D image and to provide
information about the status during gynecologic examination.
NOTE:
X 2D Follicle™ is an optional feature of this product.
X 2D Follicle™ is enabled under the following conditions:
– 2D Freeze mode
– Measurement item: OB, GYN
– Endo Cavity, 3D Endo Cavity (EV2-10A, V5-9) probes
X Changing the image, such as Zoom, is not available.
Launching 2D Follicle™
Launch 2D Follicle™. Then, the touchscreen switches to 2D Follicle™.
1. Specify the scanned position. Select Lt Ovary or Rt Ovary using the Ovary dial-button
on the touchscreen.
2. Select a measurement method. The default measurement method upon launching
2D Follicle™ is Auto.
X Auto: Automatically locates and measures a follicle.
X Add Seed: Finds a follicle based on the seed position entered by the user and then
measures it. Click the discovered target by using Set and then use Growth to specify
the size.
X Add Caliper: Finds a follicle based on the caliper position entered by the user and
then measures it. Click the discovered target by using Set and then use Growth to
specify the size.
3. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen. The measured
follicles are numbered.
7-25
User Manual
[Figure 7.7 2D Follicle™]
Delete All
Deletes all detected targets from the image and the results table.
Delete
Deletes the selected target from the image and the results table.
Min – Max Reset

Resets the Min and Max values set by the user.
Result Display
Displays the results on the image.
Growth Undo
Cancel the last task performed using Growth.
7-26
Stage
Specify the stages that you would like to show in the image and the results table.
NOTE: You can set the Early, Middle, or Post stage in Setup > Measurement > Additional
Options > GYN.
Assign to Report
Saves the measurement results to the report.
Growth
Rotate the dial-button to specify the size of the measurement target.
Min
Enter the minimum value that you would like to show in the image and the results table.
Max
Enter the maximum value that you would like to show in the image and the results table.
Selected Follicle
Select a detected target by turning the dial-button. Then, the index of the selected target
is displayed.
7-27
User Manual
Follicle Counts
Specify the number of targets that you would like to show in the image and the results
table. Then, the set number of targets are displayed, starting with the one that has the
biggest value in the Long column.
[Figure 7.8 2D Follicle™ – Touchscreen]
7-28
S-Detect™ for Breast

The feature, which analyzes selected lesions in the breast ultrasound study and shows the
analysis data, applies BI-RADS® ATLAS* (Breast Imaging-Reporting and Data System, Atlas) to
provide standardized reporting; and helps diagnosis with the streamlined workflow.
* It is a registered trademark of ACR and all rights reserved by ACR.
NOTE:
X S-Detect™ for Breast is an optional feature of this product.
X S-Detect™ for Breast is not supported in Canada.
X In the USA, this fuction is provided as S-Detect™ for Breast Lite.
CAUTION: In the United States and China, the recommendation feature for the benignity and
malignity of a lesion is not supported.
Run S-Detect™ for Breast
S-Detect™ for Breast Execution Conditions

X Preset: Breast
X Image Mode: Single Mode
X Patient information has been entered
Cases when S-Detect™ for Breast Cannot be Executed

Tips!
X Zoom is currently on;
X You have panned the image (2D Image Panning).
7-29
User Manual
S-Detect™ for Breast Screen
1 3
[Figure 7.9 S-Detect™ for Breast]
1 Ultrasound image area

Shows the study image that has been acquired in 2D Mode.
2 Position information area
This displays information about the position of the test area and lesion size.
X Items to be manually entered by the user before and after measurement
– Position: Use the mouse to drag the point located in the center of the coordinates
and specify the location on the breast from which the image has been acquired.
– Left/Right: Choose the left or right breast.
– Marker Gap: Each user can adjust and set the unit of the marker gap such as 1 – 5 cm.
– Show the meas. line: Displays the major and minor axes of the lesion.
X Items automatically calculated at extraction of lesion contour
– Distance: Shows the distance from the center of the breast.
– Angle: Shows the clockwise angle from the center of the breast.
– Depth: Shows the depth from the skin surface to the location of the lesion.
– Width: Shows the horizontal length of the lesion.
– Height: Shows the vertical length of the lesion.
– Area: Shows the area of the lesion.
7-30
3 BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification Area

This area provides the BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification for the lesion finally selected by the
user. The auto determination result is displayed in blue and text will appear in yellow with
an asterisk (*) if the user modifies the classification result.
4 BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score
S-Detect™ for Breast recommends the benignity or malignity of the lesion selected by the
user; the user makes a final decision on the BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score.
Based on the determined BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score, S-Detect™ for Breast
provides the category description.
Category Description
Tips!
You can choose not to display the category description on the screen to protect the patient.
For more information, refer to Setup > Imaging > S-Detect™ in ‘Utilities’.
S-Detect™ for Breast Measurement

Use either Target Point or Target Ellipse to specify the area of the suspected lesion. Use the
trackball and Set button on the control panel.
Target Point
Analyze the area of the suspected lesion based on the point specified by the user.
Target Area
Analyze the area of the suspected lesion based on the area specified by the user. The area
size can be adjusted by using the convert button on the control panel.
Manual Contour
Analyze the area of the suspected lesion by arbitrarily selecting a point.
Hide Contour
When ‘On’ is selected, the user defined area is not displayed on the screen.
Distance
Shows the length of a specific area that is included in the study image.
7-31
User Manual
Annotation
You can enter text in the study image.
Initialize
Reset all results and re-specify the Target Point or Target Area.
Point Edit Contour

Modifies the area of the suspected lesion based on the point specified by the user.
Line Edit Contour

Modifies the area of the suspected lesion based on the line specified by the user.
Report
The Report screen will appear.
NOTE: Length and annotation may be used before and after extracting the contour of the
lesion.
7-32
S-Detect™ for Breast Analysis
Extracting the Area of the Lesion

The contour of the area of the suspected lesion is extracted and up to 6 candidates are
shown on the touchscreen. Each image shows the Shape, Orientation, and Risk of the
lesion. The user may select one of the candidates as the final area of the lesion.
NOTE: The area of the lesion is extracted differently depending on the Target Point or Target
Area entered by the user; in some circumstances, no area of lesion may be extracted.
[Figure 7.10 S-Detect™ – Extracting Suspected Lesion]
7-33
User Manual
Classification (BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification)

The area of the lesion selected by the user is analyzed and then the analysis items are
displayed. Two types, BI-RADS®2003 and BI-RADS®2013, are provided, and each item is
divided as follows:
Lexicon Classification Description Note
Shape Oval, Round, Irregular
Orientation Parallel, Not Parallel
Circumscribed, Indistinct, Angular,

Margin
Microlobulated, Spiculated
Lesion Recommended
Abrupt Interface, Echogenic Halo
Boundary Functions Excluded
Posterior No Posterior Findings, Enhancement, for S-Detect™ for
Feature Shadowing, Combined Pattern Breast Lite
Anechoic, Hyperechoic, Complex

BI-RADS® Echo Pattern
Echogenicity, Hypoechoic, Isoechoic
2003
Macrocalcifications, Micro. Out Of Mass,
Calcifications
Macro. In Mass
Duct Changes, Cooper Ligament Chg,

Surrounding
Edema, Architectural Distortion, Skin
Tissue
Thickening, Skin Retraction Recommended
None, In Lesion, Adjacent To Lesion, Functions Excluded
Vascularity
Diffuse Vascularity
Clustered Microcysts, Complicated Cysts,

Special Case Mass In Or On Skin, Foreign Body, Intra.
Lymph Node, Axillay Lymph Node
7-34
Lexicon Classification Description Note
Shape Oval, Round, Irregular
Orientation Parallel, Not Parallel
Circumscribed, Not Circumscribed

Margin (Indistinct, Angular, Microlobulated,
Spiculated)
Recommended
Posterior No Posterior Features, Enhancement, Functions Excluded
Features Shadowing, Combined Pattern for S-Detect™ for
Breast Lite
Anechoic, Hyperechoic, Complex Cystic
Echo Pattern And Solid, Hypoechoic, Isoechoic,
Heterogeneous
BI-RADS®
2013 Calcifications In a mass, Outside of a Mass, Intraductal
Architectural Distortion, Duct Changes,

Skin Thickening, Skin Retraction, Edema,
Associated
Vascularity (Absent, Internal Vascularity,
Features
Vessels In Rim), Elasticity Assessment
(Soft, Intermediate, Hard) Recommended
Functions Excluded
Clustered Microcysts, Complicated
Cysts, Mass In Or On Skin, Foreign Body +
Implants, Intrama. Lymph Node, Axillay
Special Cases
Lymph Node, Simple Cyst, Vascular
Abnormalities (AVMs, Mondor Disease),
Post-surg. Fluid Coll., Fat Necrosis
7-35
User Manual
BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score

Recommends the benignity or malignity of the area of the lesion selected by the user.
X BI-RADS®2003
BI-RADS®
Assessment Description
Category Score
0 Incomplete
1 Negative
Possibility of
2 Benign
Benignancy
3 Probably benign
4a Low suspicion for malignancy
4b Intermediate suspicion of malignancy

Possibility of
4c Moderate concern, but not classic for malignancy
Malignancy
5 Highly suggestive of malignancy
6 Known biopsy proven malignancy
X BI-RADS®2013
BI-RADS®
Assessment Description
Category Score
0 Incomplete
1 Negative
Possibility of
2 Benign
Benignancy
3 Probably benign
4a Low suspicion for malignancy
4b Moderate suspicion for malignancy

Possibility of
4c High suspicion for malignancy
Malignancy
5 Highly suggestive of malignancy
6 Known biopsy proven malignancy
7-36
NOTE:
X Classification items and BI-RADS® Score functionality may be applied differently in
certain regions.
X In the USA, Lexicon Classification is supported by an automatic recommendation feature
for the Shape and Orientation items, which can also be directly entered by the user. The
other items under Lexicon Classification and the Assessment Category Score must be
entered by users only.
X In China, Lexicon Classification and the Assessment Category Score must be entered by
users only.
Modification of BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification and BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score

Tips!
The user may manually modify the BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification items and the BI-RADS®
Assessment Category Score.
X Modification of BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification
Select the title of each item on the monitor screen. Or press Classification on the
touchscreen and select Classification for the item.
X Modification of BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score
The BI-RADS® Assessment Category Score at the bottom of the monitor is changed. When
the Category Score is changed, the verdict also changes accordingly.
Recalculation
If the user edits the result of the BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification, then the probability of
tumor being malignant or benign is re-calculated.
NOTE:
X Recalculation is not supported in the United States.
X You can enable it in Setup > Imaging > S-Detect™.
7-37
User Manual
S-Detect™ for Breast Sensitivity Setting

This allows users to adjust the sensitivity and specificity levels for lesion analysis. This option
can be selected in Setup > Imaging > S-Detect™ > S-Detect™ for Breast > Sensitivity Setting.
X High Sensitivity: Increases the chance of detecting malignancy as its sensitivity is higher
than that of the default mode (High Accuracy).
X High Accuracy: This is the default mode. It can distinguish between benignity and
malignancy more accurately than the High Sensitivity and High Specificity modes.
X High Specificity: Increases the chance of detecting benignity as its specificity is higher
NOTE: The Sensitivity Setting is not supported in the United States and China.
Displaying S-Detect™ for Breast Reports

Once the area of the lesion selected by the user has been analyzed, press Assign on the
touchscreen. Then, the analysis result is displayed as a patient report.
The S-Detect™ for Breast analysis result is categorized as an S-Detect™ for Breast Report,
which is a separate category in the report; the information included in the report is as
follows:
X Patient Information: The patient information entered by the user when the exam began
X Position Information: Position, Distance, Angle, Depth, Height, Width, Area
X BI-RADS® Lexicon Version Information
X BI-RADS® Lexicon Classification
X BI-RADS® Score
X S-Detect™ for Breast Screen Image
NOTE:
X When displaying a report, the S-Detect™ for Breast screen image is automatically
displayed. Once the area of the lesion selected by the user has been analyzed, press
Assign on the touchscreen to display up to 10 reports (5 on the left and 5 on the right).
X In each image, you can enter the location information (Left/Right) and description.
7-38
Closing S-Detect™ for Breast

Press the Close button on the touchscreen to exit S-Detect™. You may also exit S-Detect™ for
Breast by exiting Freeze Mode or by pressing the Operation mode button on the control panel.
7-39
User Manual
S-Detect™ for Thyroid

The feature, which analyzes selected lesions in the thyroid ultrasound study and shows the
analysis data, provides standardized reporting based on the ATA, BTA, EU-TIRADS and K-TIRADS
guidelines; and helps diagnosis with the streamlined workflow.
X ATA: American Thyroid Association
X BTA: British Thyroid Association
X EU-TIRADS: European Thyroid Imaging Reporting and Data System
X K-TIRADS: Korean Thyroid Imaging Reporting and Data System
NOTE:
X S-Detect™ for Thyroid is an optional feature of this product.
X S-Detect™ for Thyroid is not supported in Canada.
CAUTION: In the United States and China, the recommendation feature for the benignity and
malignity of a lesion is not supported.
S-Detect™ for Thyroid Execution
S-Detect™ for Thyroid Execution Conditions

X Preset: Thyroid
X Image Mode: Single Mode
X Patient information has been entered
Cases where S-Detect™ for Thyroid cannot be used

Tips!
X Zoom is currently on
X You have panned the image (2D Image Panning)
X The system is set to Trapezoidal, or Biopsy Beam Steer
7-40
S-Detect™ for Thyroid Screen
1 3
[Figure 7.11 S-Detect™ for Thyroid]
1 Ultrasound Image Area

Shows the study image that has been acquired in 2D Mode.
2 Location Information Area
X Items to be manually entered by the user before and after measurement
– Position: Position the cursor by using the trackball and select the location of the
lesion using BodyMarker.
– Show the meas. line: Displays the major and minor axes of the lesion.
X Items automatically calculated at extraction of lesion contour
– Depth: Depth from the skin surface to the location of the lesion.
– Height: Shows the length of the minor axis of the lesion.
– Width: Shows the length of the major axis of the lesion.
– Area: The area of the lesion.
3 TI-RADS Lexicon Classification Area
Provides the TI-RADS Lexicon Classification for the lesion that has been selected by the
user. The auto determination result is displayed in blue, whereas other items are marked
‘Unselected’ in white. If the user modifies the classification results, text will appear in
yellow with an asterisk (*).
7-41
User Manual
4 TI-RADS Assessment Category Score

It recommends the benignity or malignity of the lesion selected by the user; the user
makes a final decision on the TI-RADS Assessment Category Score. Based on the
determined TI-RADS Assessment Category Score, S-Detect™ for Thyroid provides the
category description.
Category Description
Tips!
You can hide the category description to protect the patient. For more information, please
refer to ‘Setup > Imaging > S-Detect™’ in ‘Utilities’.
7-42
Measure S-Detect™ for Thyroid

Use either Target Area (default) or Target Point to define the area of the suspected lesion.
Initialize
You can re-specify the Target Area or Target Point.
Target Point
Analyzes the lesion based on the point in the area of the suspected lesion specified by the
user.
Target Area
Analyzes the suspected lesion based on the area specified by the user.
1. When a Target Area is selected, a guide image which tells you how to designate an area
will appear.
2. Adjust the guideline using the trackball until it meets the borders of the lesion. Then,
press Set and select a vertex of the rectangle. (Figure A)
3. When you move the trackball, a rectangle will appear. Make adjustments until the two
remaining sides of the rectangle overlap with the borders of the suspected lesion and
then press Set to complete the selection. (Figure B)
4. Press Exit to reset the size and position of the Target Area.
Figure A Figure B
Manual Contour
Users can manually draw the boundary of the suspected lesion to analyze the area. You
can press Set and use the trackball to draw the boundary. Then press Set again to finish
drawing the boundary.
7-43
User Manual
Hide Contour
When ‘On’, the user-defined area is not displayed on the screen.
Point Edit Contour

Expands or shrinks the area of the lesion based on the point specified by the user.
Line Edit Contour

Expands or shrinks the area of the lesion based on the line specified by the user.
Distance
Shows the length of a specific area that is included in the study image.
Annotation
Enter text in the study image.
Report
The Report screen will appear.
NOTE: Length and annotations may be used before and after extracting the contour of the
lesion.
7-44
Analyze S-Detect™ for Thyroid
Extracting the Area of the Lesion

The contour of the area of the suspected lesion is extracted, and up to 6 candidates are
shown on the touchscreen. Each image shows the Composition, Echogenicity, and Risk of
the lesion. The user may select one of the candidates as the final area of the lesion.
NOTE: The area of the lesion is extracted differently depending on the Target Point or Target
Area entered by the user; in some circumstances, no area of lesion may be extracted.
[Figure 7.12 S-Detect™ for Thyroid]
7-45
User Manual
Lexicon Classification
The area of the lesion selected by the user is analyzed, and then the analysis results are
displayed. The items are categorized as follows:
X K-TIRADS Lexicon Classification
Lexicon
Description Note
Classification
Solid, Partially cystic (Predominantly solid,

Composition
Predominantly cystic), Cystic
Marked/Mild hypoechoic (Marked hypoechogenicity,

Mild hypoechogenicity)
Echogenicity
Isoechoic/ Hypoechoic (Isoechogenicity,
Recommended
Hyperechogenicity)
Functions
Orientation Non-parallel, Parallel Supported (Not
supported in
Margin Smooth, Spiculated/Microlobulated, Ill-defined
the USA)
Spongiform Present, Absent
Shape Round to oval, Irregular
Calcification (Microcalcification, Macrocalcification,

Calcification
Rim calcification), None
Unselected, Type 1 (none), Type 2 (perinodular

Vascularity vascularity), Type 3 (mild intranodular vascularity),
Recommended
Type 4 (marked intranodular vascularity)
Functions
Halo Unselected, Present, Absent Excluded
Colloid Unselected, Present, Absent
7-46
X EU-TIRADS Lexicon
Lexicon
Description Note
Classification
Solid, Mixed solid/cystic (Mixed predominantly solid,

Composition Mixed predominantly cystic), Cystic, Spongiform
appearance
Markedly/Mildly hypoechoic (Markedly hypoechoic,

Echogenicity Mildly hypoechoic), Isoechoic/Hyperechoic (Isoecoic, Recommended
Hyperechoic) Functions
Supported (Not
Smooth, Irregular (Spiculated, Microlobulated),
Margin supported in
Ill-defined
the USA)
Round, Oval, Taller than wide/long (Taller than wide,
Shape
Taller than long)

Calcification
Egg shell calcification), None
Comet Tail Unselected, Present, Absent
Echotexture Unselected, Heterogeneous, Homegeneous Recommended

Functions
Halo/Rim Unselected, Present, Absent Excluded
Vascularity Unselected, Type I, Type II, Type III
7-47
User Manual
X ATA Lexicon
Lexicon
Description Note
Classification
Solid, Mixed cystic solid (Partially cystic w/ eccentric

Composition
solid, Partially cystic), Purely cystic, Spongiform
Isoechoic/Hyperechoic (Isoechoic, Hyperechoic),

Echogenicity Recommended
Hyperechoic, Marked hypoechoic
Functions
Shape Taller than wide, W/O Taller than wide Supported (Not
supported in
Smooth, Irregular/Infiltrative/Microlobulated/
Margin the USA)
Spiculated, Poorly defined

Calcifications
Rim calcification), None
Vascularity Unselected, Vascular invasion, None Recommended

Functions
Colloid Unselected, Present, Absent Excluded
X BTA Lexicon Classification
Lexicon
Description Note
Classification
Nodule Solid, Partially cystic (Mixed solid/cystic, Micro-cystic/

Composition spongiform), Cystic
Iso-echoic/Hyper-echoic (Iso-echoic, Hyper-echoic),

Echogenicity Recommended
Hypo-echoic (Markedly hypo-echoic)
Functions
Shape Taller than wide (AP > TR), W/O Taller than wide Supported (Not
supported in
Well defined, Irreg./Lobulated/Spiculated (Irregular/
Margin the USA)
Lobulated, Spiculated)
Calcification (Micro-calcification, Macro-calcification,

Calcification
Rim/Egg shell), None
Colour Flow Unselected, Central, Peripheral, Mixed, None
Cystic Component Unselected, Colloid (ring-down sign), No Colloid

Recommended
Halo Unselected, Regular/Continuous, Interrupted, Absent
Functions
Unselected, Retrosternal extension/tracheal deviation, Excluded
Extent
None
Lymphadenopathy Unselected, Metastatic, None
7-48
TI-RADS Assessment Category Score

Suggests the benignity or malignity of the area of the lesion selected by the user. When
the user selects a TI-RADS Assessment Category Score, category description is provided
accordingly.
TI-RADS Assessment Category Score Description
1 No nodule N/A
2 Benign Possibility of Benignancy
K-TIRADS 3 Low suspicion
4 Intermediate suspicion Possibility of Malignancy
5 High suspicion
1 No nodule N/A
2 Benign
Possibility of Benignancy
EU-TIRADS 3 Low risk
4 Intermediate risk
Possibility of Malignancy
5 High risk
1 Benign
2 Very low suspicion
ATA 3 Low suspicion
4 Intermediate suspicion Possibility of Malignancy
5 High suspicion
1 Normal
2 Benign
BTA 3 Indeterminate/Equivocal
4 Suspicious Possibility of Malignancy
5 Malignant
NOTE:
X Classification items and the TI-RADS Score may be applied differently in certain regions.
X The automatic recommendation feature of the Lexicon Classification is not provided in
the United States and China. Users must enter the Lexicon Classification and Assessment
Category Score directly.
7-49
User Manual
Editing the TI-RADS Lexicon Classification and TI-RADS Assessment Category Score
Tips!
The user may manually edit the Classification items and the TI-RADS Assessment Category
Score.
X Edit the TI-RADS Lexicon Classification
Select a title for each item on the monitor screen. Alternatively, press Classification and
then select a Classification item.
X Edit the TI-RADS Assessment Category Score
The TI-RADS Assessment Category Score at the bottom of the monitor will be changed.
When the Category Score is changed, the determination also changes accordingly.
Recalculation
The user can have the Assessment Category Score and the probability of being malignant
or benign re-calculated after they edit the result of the Lexicon Classification.
K-TIRADS Assessment Category US Features
1 No nodule
2 Benign Spongiform, Pure cyst
Solid hyper/Isoechoic or partially cystic

3 Low suspicion
+ No 3 suspicious features
1. Solid hypoechoic
+ No 3 suspicious features
4 Intermediate suspicion
2. Solid hyper/Isoechoic or partially cystic
+ Any 3 suspicious features
Solid hypoechoic
5 High suspicion
+ Any of 3 suspicious features
7-50
3 suspicious features: Nonparall, Microlobulated/Spiculated, and Microcalcification.
EU-TIRADS Assessment Category US Features
1 No nodule No nodules
2 Benign Cystic, Spongiform
3 Low risk Oval shape, Hyper/isoechoic
4 Intermediate risk Oval shape, Mildly hypoechoic
Irregular margin
Microcalcification
5 High risk
Markedly hypoechoic and solid
Taller than wide/long
ATA Assessment Category US Features
1 Benign Purely cystic
Spongiform, Partially cystic without any of the

2 Very low suspicion
sonographic features described in 3, 4, or 5 category
Isoechoic or hyperechoic solid, Partially cystic with

3 Low suspicion eccentric solid areas without microcalcification,
irregular margin, or taller than wide shape
Hypoechoic solid with smooth margins without

4 Intermediate suspicion
microcalcification or taller than wide shape
Solid hypoechoic with irregular/infiltrative/

5 High suspicion microlobulated margin, microcalcification, or taller
than wide shape
7-51
User Manual
BTA Assessment Category US features
1 Normal
Halo, Hyper/iso-echoic
Micro-cystic/Spongiform
2 Benign Egg shell calcification
Cystic, Colloid (ring-down sign)
Peripheral color flow
Hyper-echoic, Halo, Solid

3 Intermediate/Equivocal
Mixed/central color flow
Solid, Hypo-echoic
4 Suspicious Solid, Markedly hypo-echoic
Lobulated margin
Solid, Hypo-echoic, Irregular/lobulated margin,

5 Malignant Micro-calcification
Taller than wide (AP>TR)
NOTE: Recalculation is not supported in the United States and China.
S-Detect™ for Thyroid Sensitivity Settings

Users can adjust the sensitivity and specificity levels for lesion analysis.
X High Sensitivity: Increases the chance of detecting malignancy as its sensitivity is higher
X High Accuracy: This is the default mode. It can distinguish between benignity and
malignancy more accurately than the High Sensitivity and High Specificity modes.
X High Specificity: Increases the chance of detecting benignity as its specificity is higher
NOTE:
X The Sensitivity Setting is not supported in the United States and China.
X You can select it in Setup > Imaging > S-Detect™ > S-Detect™ for Thyroid > Sensitivity
Setting.
7-52
Print S-Detect™ for Thyroid Report

At completion of analysis on the lesion selected by the user, press Assign. The analysis result
is printed out in the patient report.
The analysis results are presented as an S-Detect™ for Thyroid Report, which is a separate
category within the patient report; the information included in this report is as follows:
X Patient information: The patient information entered by the user when the study began
X Location information: Position, Direction, Depth, Height, Width, Area
X TI-RADS Score Reference information
X TI-RADS Lexicon Classification
X TI-RADS Score
X S-Detect™ for Thyroid screen image
NOTE:
X You can print up to 30 reports at a time.
X Attach the image saved during the study by using the Images on the Report screen. In
each image, you can enter the location information (Left/Right) and its description.
Exit S-Detect™ for Thyroid

To exit, press Close, Exit, or the Operation mode button, or exit Freeze mode.
7-53
User Manual
M Mode
The M Mode is used to specify an observation area in a 2D image with the M Line, and display
changes over time.
This mode is appropriate for the observation of organs with a lot of movement, such as
cardiac valves. The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of an
observation area within the entire image.
[Figure 7.13 M Mode – Touchscreen]
7-54
M Mode Screen
M Line
The M Line indicates the relative position of the M Mode image in the 2D image. You can
move the M Line to change the observation area. Use the trackball to move the M Line to
the right or left.
M Mode Menu
Anatomical M
If it is ‘On’, position and angle of AMM Line can be adjusted.
X AMM Angle: Use the touchscreen dial-button to rotate the cursor line for Anatomical M.
NOTE: Available only with the phased array probe or the cardiac application.
Sweep Speed
The speed can be changed.
M Mode Map
Used to configure the post curve in M.
Steer Angle
Adjust the angle of the ultrasound beam.
NOTE: The Steer function appears on the soft menu only when a linear probe is used.
NOTE: For more information on other soft menu options and functions, refer to the ‘2D Mode’
section.
7-55
User Manual
Color Doppler Mode

This mode displays the colored blood flow pattern of the ROI (Region of Interest) within the 2D
image.
It is appropriate for examining the presence of blood flow, its average speed, and its direction.
The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of the ROI within the
entire image.
[Figure 7.14 Color Doppler Mode – Touchscreen]
C Mode Screen
ROI Box
ROI stands for Region of Interest. The ROI Box outlines the area of the 2D image where
color (blood flow) information is displayed in Color Doppler Mode.
Use the Change button to reposition or resize the ROI box. Each time you press the Change
button, the current state of the ROI box is displayed in the lower middle of the screen.
X ROI Position: In this state, the position of the ROI box can be changed. Use the trackball
to move and position the ROI Box.
X ROI Size: In this state, the size of the ROI box can be changed. Use the trackball to move
the ROI Box and specify its size.
7-56
Color Bar
In Color Doppler mode, the color bar indicates the direction and speed of blood flow. Based
on the Baseline at the middle, red indicates the direction and speed of blood flow toward
the probe. By contrast, the blue color indicates the direction and speed of blood flow
away from the probe. When you turn Baseline clockwise, the Baseline on the color bar will
increase.
C Mode Menu
Hide Color
Select C mode to use. If you tap Hide Color on the touchscreen, the Color mode image will
not be displayed in the Color ROI area, and only the B mode image will be displayed. Tap
this button again to cancel the selection and return to Color + B/W mode.
Frequency
This enables you to configure the probe’s frequency. The selected frequency is displayed in
the title area, allowing you to determine the state of the current frequency easily.
Line Density
Select the density of the scan line. Selecting High increases the number of scan lines and
improves the image resolution. However, the frame rate is reduced.
Invert
The color bar is inverted each time this button is tapped. When the color bar is inverted,
the color displayed on the image is also inverted.
Vel (Velocity) + Var (Variance)

Tap Vel + Var on the touchscreen to turn it On or Off. It expresses the blood flow velocity in
green on the Color Bar.
NOTE: Vel + Var feature is available in the following applications and presets:
X Cardiac - Adult Echo, Ped Echo, Arotic Arch
X OB - Fetal Heart
X Vascular - Carotid, Arterial, Venous
7-57
User Manual
TDI (Tissue Doppler Imaging)

Change to TDI mode.
NOTE:
X This can only be used when the cardiac application is selected in Phased Array Probe.
X For more information on TDI, refer to ‘TDI Mode’.
Auto Gain
When turned ‘On’, the brightness level of an image is automatically adjusted.
NOTE: Auto Gain is applied only when the mode is live for the Carotid and Arterial presets of
the linear probe.
Steer Invert
Every time you press the Steer Invert button, the angle of the ROI is inverted.
NOTE: Steer Invert is only enabled when using a linear probe.
Scale
Rotating Scale dial-button clockwise increases the scale, extending the range of blood
flow speed. Rotating the dial-button in the counter-clockwise decreases the scale,
displaying a narrower range of blood flow speed.
Sensitivity
It enhances sensitivity and accuracy or frame rate of color images.
Filter
This is an electric filter to remove the low-frequency doppler signals generated by the
movement of blood vessel walls. Adjust the Cutoff Frequency to remove doppler signals
whose frequency is lower than the cutoff frequency.
7-58
Baseline
Rotating the dial-button clockwise increases the Baseline. In Color Doppler mode, the
color bar indicates the direction and speed of blood flow. Based on the Baseline at the
middle, red indicates the direction and speed of blood flow toward the probe. By contrast,
the blue color indicates the direction and speed of blood flow away from the probe.
Color
Optimizes colors in the image according to blood flow rate.
Color Map
Used to configure the post curve in a color image. This can help to display blood flow with
greater clarity.
Steer Angle
Adjust the angle of the ultrasound beam. Loss of color information resulting from the
angle of the ultrasound beam is minimized.
NOTE: The Steer function only appears on the soft menu when a linear probe is used.
Balance
The range of a color image is adjusted by comparing the gray levels of 2D images with
the doppler signal values of color images. When the Balance value increases, the color
image also appears in the part where the gray level of a 2D image is high (the bright part),
increasing the range of the color image.
Smoothing (Spatial Filter)

This allows smoother display of color images.
Alpha Blending
Superimposes a color image over a 2D image in the color image area.
7-59
User Manual
LumiFlow™
LumiFlow™ is a function that visualizes blood flow in three dimensional-like to help
understand the structure of blood flow and small vessels intuitively.
It is recommended to use a higher index level for larger sized vessels.
NOTE:
X LumiFlow™ is an optional feature of this product.
X LumiFlow™, a feature which uses the strength of the blood flow signal to visualize blood
flow in three dimensional-like, is not intended for diagnosis. Therefore, LumiFlow™
should not be used for diagnostic purposes.
NOTE: For more information on other touchscreen items, refer to the ‘2D Mode’.
7-60
Power Doppler Mode

This function is used for the imaging of tissue elasticity. It detects the solid volume of a tissue
and converts its stiffness into a color image. It also provides a 2D image so that you can find
where the ROI is.
[Figure 7.15 Power Doppler Mode – Touchscreen]
Entering & Exiting PD Mode

Press the PD button on the control panel to enter PD mode. Press this button again. PD Mode
will be terminated and the mode will switch to 2D.
PD Mode Screen
Color Bar
In PD mode, the color bar displayed varies depending on the Power Doppler mode display
method that is in use. The color bar indicates the presence of blood flow and its amount.
The top of the color bar is the brightest section, where the amount of blood flow is at its
highest.
ROI Box
The ROI (Region of Interest) outlines the area of the 2D image where color (blood flow)
information is displayed in Power Doppler Mode.
7-61
User Manual
PD Mode Menu
S-Flow™
S-Flow™ is a directional Power Doppler technology, which helps in diagnosis of complex
forms of blood flow. Tap S-Flow™ on the touchscreen. The direction of the blood flow will
be displayed.
Auto Gain
Tap Auto Gain on the touchscreen to turn it on or off. If it is turned on, the brightness of an
image will be adjusted automatically.
NOTE: Auto Gain is applied only when the mode is in live for the Carotid and Arterial presets
of the linear probe.
NOTE: The description of touchscreen menu items is the same as for 'Color Doppler Mode'.
DR
Shows the difference between the maximum volume and minimum volume that can be
played for each image.
7-62
PW Spectral Doppler Mode

PW stands for Pulse Wave. This mode displays the blood flow speed at a specific blood vessel
location within a specific time frame. Distance (depth) information can also be obtained by
transmitting pulses over particular time frames.
This mode is useful for measuring low-speed blood flow, such as in the abdomen and peripheral
vessels. The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing the marking and adjustment of an
observation area within the entire image.
[Figure 7.16 PW Spectral Doppler Mode – Touchscreen]
Entering & Exiting PW Spectral Doppler Mode
Entering PW Spectral Doppler Mode

1. Press the PW button on the control panel to enter PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
2. Configure settings relating to Doppler image acquisition on the touchscreen.
3. Press the PW dial-button again to enter PW Spectral Doppler Mode and display the
Doppler image on the screen.
7-63
User Manual
Exiting PW Spectral Doppler Mode

Press the PW dial-button while the Doppler image is being displayed. You can also press
the 2D dial-button to exit PW Spectral Doppler Mode.
Press the Set button on the control panel to acquire a spectral doppler image.
NOTE: The doppler image can only be obtained in the D Only or Simultaneous states.
PW Spectral Doppler Mode Screen Sample Volume

The doppler spectrum is displayed when the Sample Volume is located above the blood
flow on the 2D image. The size of the Sample Volume is displayed in mm units. Use the
trackball to adjust the position of the Sample Volume.
X Moving Sample Volume: Use the trackball on the control panel.
X Resizing Sample Volume: Using the touchscreen: Select the SV Size dial-button on the
touchscreen.
X Adjusting Sample Volume Angle: Rotate the Angle dial-button on the control panel to
select a value from -80 to 80 degrees. Press the Angle dial-button to select either -60,
0, or 60 degrees.
Adjusting Doppler Baseline

Adjust the Baseline by rotating the dial-button on the touchscreen.
7-64
HPRF (High PRF) Function

Adjust the blood flow above the speed limit at a specific depth. The scale is increased; this
can only be used in PW Spectral Doppler mode (D Only).
NOTE: Setup > Imaging > Common > HPRF
X Activating HPRF
Increasing the scale at a specific depth to a certain point automatically activates HPRF.
The Phantom Gate will appear on the D Line at a position higher than the sample
volume. Once HPRF starts, PRF does not increase even if you increase the scale value.
X Finishing HPRF
While HPRF is in use, decrease the scale value by one step to finish HPRF. Here, the PRF
value becomes the maximum value in the current PW Spectral Doppler mode.
X Moving Sample Volume
To move the Sample Volume position in the D Only state, the system calculates PRF
values and the Phantom Gate position, and updates them on the PW Spectral Doppler
image. HPRF is terminated when HPRF cannot be activated.
When Sample Volume is moved in the 2D Only state, the PRF values don’t change.
CAUTION:
X The Phantom Gate position can be located outside the 2D image area in Zoom Mode.
X Make sure that sample volume and Phantom Gate are not placed together in the
measuring area. If more than two Sample Volumes are located in the vessels, all Doppler
components will appear in the spectrum, causing noise.
7-65
User Manual
PW Spectral Doppler Mode Menu
Simultaneous
Tap Simultaneous on the touchscreen. Each time you tap the button, the Simultaneous
function turns on or off. If the Simultaneous option is turned on, you can view real-time
2D and spectral Doppler images at the same time. If the option is not turned on, however,
you will only be able to view the image from one of the modes. The Simultaneous function
decreases Doppler PRF, thus decreasing the measurable speed range.
Invert
Tap Invert on the touchscreen. Each time the button is tapped, the speed indicator (+/–)
for a spectrum is inverted.
Steer Invert
Press Steer Invert on the touchscreen. Pressing the button inverts the angle of the sample
volume.
NOTE: The Steer Invert button is only enabled when using a linear probe.
Auto Calc
Tap Auto Calc on the touchscreen to select Off, Live, or Frozen.
X Live setting: The PS, ED, MD, PI, RI, PS/ED, ED/PS, HR, TAmax, and TAmean are
calculated after acquiring the Doppler Trace.
X Frozen setting: The PS, ED, MD, PI, RI, PS/ED, ED/PS, HR, TAmax, and TAmean are
calculated when the image is frozen.
Values that are displayed on screen are selected at Setup > Measurement > AutoCalc.
For selecting displayed values, refer to the measurement settings in ‘Utilities’.
CAUTION: The measurements carried out by Auto Trace under Measure and Real Time
Automatic Doppler Trace (Automatic Calculator) may be different from each other. This is
because the algorithms for these two methods are different. It is recommended that you use
Auto Trace under Measure for more accurate measurement.
7-66
Things to Consider when using Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace

Tips!
1. Aliasing occurs because PRF is too low in comparison to the image speed, or the
spectrum is clustered around the baseline because PRF is too high.
2. Peak is indistinctive or intermittent such as in Spectral waveforms for veins.
3. Meaningful spectrum distinction becomes difficult because Doppler Gain is set too high
or too low.
4. An index is displayed during the transition time after Sample Volume is moved with the
trackball.
5. The major spectral signals are cut off because Doppler Wall Filter is set too high.
6. Peak Trace is interrupted due to abnormal Doppler noise or artifact, and the heart rate is
above approximately 140 bpm.
If any of the above apply, Real Time Automatic Doppler Trace may not produce an accurate
trace or results. In addition, during auto calculation, results will not be displayed if the Freeze
function is run against inaccurate values.
Sensitivity
Specify the minimum range of Sensitivity. It can be adjusted from 1 to 5 by using the
touchscreen button.
Sensitivity
Tips!
Sensitivity is a function to adjust Trace Line in the Auto Trace or Limited Trace. Increase the
value to capture a wider area, use a smaller value to make the waveform clearer.
Trace Method
Tap Trace Method on the touchscreen. Max or Mean Trace for the selected spectrum is
performed. It will not be performed if set to Off.
Trace Direction
Tap Trace Direction on the touchscreen. Select the part of the spectrum to calculate with
AutoCalc from Both, Above, or Below.
Sound
Adjusts the doppler volume. Select a value from 0 to 100 by rotating the Sound dial-
button.
7-67
User Manual
Display Format
Tap Display Format on the touchscreen. Select either Up/Down, Side by Side, or Doppler
Only by using the button on the touchscreen.
Doppler Map
Used to configure the post curve in doppler mode. Select a value from 1 to 12 by using the
Doppler Map dial-button on the touchscreen.
TDW
Switches to TDW Mode. TDW stands for Tissue Doppler Wave.
For more information on TDW, refer to ‘TDW Mode’.
NOTE: This can only be used when the cardiac application is selected in Phased Array Probe.
NOTE: For more information on other touchscreen menu items, refer to ‘2D Mode’ and ‘Color
Doppler Mode’ sections.
7-68
CW Spectral Doppler Mode

CW stands for Continuous Wave. This mode displays the blood flow speed and direction at a
specific blood vessel location within a specific time frame. Unlike PW Spectral Doppler Mode, it
does not provide Sample Volume.
NOTE:
X CW Spectral Doppler mode is an optional feature of this product.
X This dial-button can be used with the Phased Array or Static CW probes.
Steered CW Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode can only be used if the Phased Array probe is used. The 2D Mode image is also
shown, allowing the marking and adjusting of an observation area within the entire image.
Static CW Spectral Doppler Mode

This mode is only available with a Static CW Probe. The 2D image is not displayed.
Entering & Exiting CW Spectral Doppler Mode
Entering CW Spectral Doppler Mode

1. Press the CW button on the control panel to enter CW Spectral Doppler Mode.
2. Configure settings relating to Doppler image acquisition on the touchscreen.
3. Press the CW dial-button again to enter CW Spectral Doppler Mode and display the
Doppler image on the screen.
Exiting CW Spectral Doppler Mode

Press the CW dial-button while the Doppler image is being displayed. You can also press
the 2D dial-button to exit CW Spectral Doppler Mode.
7-69
User Manual
CW Spectral Doppler Mode Menu
[Figure 7.17 CW Spectral Doppler Mode – Touchscreen]
NOTE: The menu for CW Spectral Doppler Mode is identical to that of PW Spectral Doppler
Mode.
7-70
TDI Mode
TDI stands for Tissue Doppler Imaging. It visualizes the movement of rapidly moving tissues
such as the heart. It is available in Color Doppler Mode. In Color Doppler Mode, TDI provides color
information for cardiac tissues.
NOTE: Appears on the Soft Menu only when using the phased array probe and the cardiac
application.
Starting and Ending TDI Mode

In Color Doppler Mode, tap TDI on the touchscreen. Pressing the button once more switches
the mode from TDI to C.
NOTE: For information about the touchscreen menu, refer to ‘Color Doppler Mode’.
7-71
User Manual
TDW Mode
TDW stands for Tissue Doppler Wave. It visualizes the movement of rapidly moving tissues such
as the heart. TDW Mode is available in the PW Spectral Doppler Mode. If it is used in Spectral
Doppler Mode along with Color Doppler mode, changes in cardiac tissues over time can be
observed.
Starting and Ending TDW Mode

Tap TDW on the touchscreen in PW Spectral Doppler Mode to run it. Pressing the button once
more switches the mode from TDW to PW Spectral Doppler.
NOTE: For information about the touchscreen menu, refer to the ‘PW Spectral Mode’ section.
7-72
ElastoScan™ Mode
A diagnostic ultrasound technique for imaging elasticity, ElastoScan™ observes the
transformation of the tissue strain by the internal or external forces, and converts relative
stiffness into a color image.
The elasticity of ROI in a 2D image is shown in color. The 2D Mode image is also shown, allowing
the marking and adjustment of the ROI within the scanned image.
NOTE:
X ElastoScan™ mode is an optional feature of this product.
X The probes, applications, and presets that support ElastoScan™ are as follows:
LA3-14AD MSK General

LA4-18BD
LA3-16A Small Parts Breast, Thyroid
EA2-11B
ER4-9
GYN Uterus, Adnexa
V5-9
VR5-9
EVN4-9
EA2-11AR
Urology Prostate
EA2-11AV
EV2-10A
X This function is not available in E mode. Angle, View Area, ECG
ElastoScan™
Tips!
X An elastogram is the elasticity imaging of an object, based on continuous ultrasound
images. The function that measures the elasticity of an object and converts it to images
is called ElastoScan™. ElastoScan™ visualizes the presence of a solid mass or stiffness in
tissue.
X It is already well known that lesions such as tumors are different from healthy tissue in
terms of their stiffness. Up until now, palpation has been used for examination, but this
method has certain depth limitations.
7-73
User Manual
E Dual Mode
In this mode, the elastogram and the 2D image are displayed together on the screen. It can
be selected by tapping Single on the control panel and Dual on the touchscreen.
To facilitate comparative observation, the 2D image is shown on the left and an E image is
shown on the right.
NOTE:
X For ElastoScan™ Wide Dual View is set as default.
X For details about Wide Dual View setting, refer to Setup > Imaging > Display Settings in
the ‘Utilities’.
[Figure 7.18 E Dual Mode]
7-74
E Single Mode
In E Single Mode, only an E image is displayed in the screen. It can be selected by pressing
the Single button on the control panel.
[Figure 7.19 E Single Mode]
7-75
User Manual
ROI Mode
ROI stands for Region of Interest. In E mode, the ROI Box represents the area where
elasticity information is processed and shown. Tap ROI Mode on the touchscreen to turn
ROI Mode on or off.
It is important that only the effective tissues are included in ROI by avoiding ineffective
components such as bone and air to obtain a good elasticity image. If a ratio of effective
image is insufficient, no elasticity image can be displayed even when tissues are
pressured. To scan the breast, it is best to set as wide as possible in the lateral direction
and to include subcutaneous layer and muscle in the axial direction to obtain a good-
quality elasticity image, but it can be flexible to adjust the real situation.
You can adjust the position and size of the ROI box by using the Change button on the
control panel. Each time the Change button is pressed, the current status of the ROI Box is
shown in the User Information area of the screen.
X ROI Position: The position of the ROI Box can be changed. Move the ROI Box with the
trackball to confirm the new position.
X ROI Size: The size of the ROI Box can be changed. Resize the ROI Box with the trackball
and press the Change button to confirm the new size.
[Figure 7.20 ROI Mode]
NOTE: ROI Mode is available in E Single Mode as well as in E Dual Mode.
7-76
Starting and Closing E Mode

In 2D Mode, tap ElastoScan™ on the touchscreen. Press the button again to return to 2D
Mode.
E Mode Screen
Color Bar
In E Mode, the color bar indicates the stiffness of a tissue. Regardless of the
color, the lower section of the bar indicates that the target area is stiffer than
the surrounding tissues and the upper section indicates that the target area is
less stiff than the surrounding tissues.
Compression Guide Bar

The strength and status of compression are shown using a different number
of blocks and colors from Step 0 to 7. All blocks are empty at Step 0 which
appears when the probe is almost stationary, the ROI has insufficient legion, or
matching between images is poor. Steps 1 and 2 (in gray) indicate inadequate
compression and Steps 3 through 7 (in blue or green) indicate adequate
compression; each level is represented using a different number of blocks.
Performing a Scan
When using E mode, place a probe onto the surface of an area to observe and position the ROI
appropriately on a lesion to observe. Then use the probe to compress the region periodically.
When the compression guide is supported, please refer to this guide to adjust the size of
the compression. If the region being examined is quite deep, it is better to increase the
compression.
Precautions for Scanning

Tips!
X To closely observe the location of the lesion, minimize the movement of tissues.
X A breast is a complex organ which consists of lactiferous ducts, lactiferous glands, fatty
tissue, fibrous tissue, and chest muscles. An axial movement of the probe may cause an
unintended movement of the tissues.
X The prostate and the thyroid consist of tissues that are simpler than those of a breast and
there are relatively fewer unintended movements.
7-77
User Manual
E Mode Menu
[Figure 7.21 ElastoScan™ Mode – Touchscreen]
Invert
Tap this button on the touchscreen to invert the Color Bar. Inverting the color bar also
inverts the color displayed on the image.
Dual Live
The elastogram and the 2D image are displayed together on the screen. Pressing Single on
the control panel displays the E image only on the screen.
E Gain
Adjust the brightness of the elastogram image. Use the dial-button to select a setting
from 0 to 100%.
Persistence Level
Specify the speed of change between frames. Use the dial-button to select a setting from
0 to 100%. Selecting a higher value increases the rate of frame change.
7-78
Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the elastogram. Use the dial-button to select a setting from 0 to
100%.
Color Map
Select the color of the elastogram. Use the dial-button to select a setting from 1 to 6. If you
change the Color Map, the color bar will also change accordingly.
Blending Level
Adjust the blending level between a color image over a 2D image. Change the 2D image
ratio using the knob.
Enhancement
Adjusts the enhancement of the image. Use the dial-button to select a setting from 0 to
100%. A higher setting provides more clearly defined boundaries, at the expense of
increased noise.
E-Strain™
E-Strain™ is designed to enable quick and easy calculation of the strain ratio between
two regions of interest for day-to-day practice. Simply by setting the two targets, you can
receive accurate, consistent results and make informed decisions in many types of diagnostic
procedures.
NOTE:
X E-Strain™ is an optional feature of this product.
X The prerequisites for enabling the E-Strain™ button on the touchscreen are as following:
– Application: Breast, Thyroid, Prostate, GYN, MSK
– Freeze state
E-Strain™
1. Press the Freeze button on the control panel and then press the E-Strain™ button.
2. Specify the position and size of the ROI in the area of suspected lesion.
X Make sure that breast fat is visible at the same level as, or above, the ROI.
X Adjust the size of the ROI by using the trackball and the Change button.
7-79
User Manual
3. Press the Set button. The calculation is automatically performed and the results will be
displayed on the screen.
X Strain A: Mean strain value inside the ROI A
(Supported in all countries except the US and Canada)
X Strain B: Mean strain value inside the ROI B
(Supported in all countries except the US and Canada)
X Ratio (B/A): Strain value ratio (B Strain/A Strain)
(Supported in all countries except Europe, China, and Japan)
4. To adjust the A Strain area and B Strain area again, use the following functions:
X Delete A: You can clear the A Strain area and specify the ROI area again.
(However, when B Strain is chosen, this button is disabled.)
X Delete B: Delete the B Strain area and set ROI again.
E-Strain™ is unavailable when:

Tips!
X Zoom is currently on;
X You have panned the image (2D Image Panning);
X E-Breast™ is currently in use.
CAUTION: The image quality of strain elastography and the proper placement of ROI are
important to reduce the measurement error of strain ratio.
E-Strain™ Reset
When you tap this button on the touchscreen, the E-Strain™ measurements will be reset.
7-80
MV-Flow™
MV-Flow™ visualizes microcirculatory and slow blood flow to display the intensity in color. It is
suitable for observation of microcirculatory and volume of slow blood flow.
NOTE:
X MV-Flow™ is an optional feature of HS60/XH60.
X MV-Flow™ can be used under the following conditions:
Abdomen Abdomen, Renal

CA1-7AD
OB 1st Trimester, 2nd Trimester, 3rd Trimester
MSK General
LA3-14AD
Small Parts Breast, Thyroid
MV-Flow™
Tips!
X When entering MV-Flow™, Single Mode is displayed by default.
X MultiVision, S-Harmonic™, and QuickScan™ are not available as 2D Mode features.
Tissue Suppression
Helps to reduce signals from tissues and with observing micro-blood vessels. The greater
the number, the lesser the signals from tissues, which facilitates the micro-blood vessels
observation.
Flow Mode
X Power: Provides sensitivity and resolution suitable for the micro-blood flow
observations. The color bar indicates the presence of blood flow and its intensity. The
top of the color bar is the brightest section, where the intensity of blood flow is at its
highest.
X Color: Mitigates the noise around the micro-blood flow. The color bar indicates the
intensity and direction of blood flow. The brighter color indicates that the intensity
of blood flow is higher. If both of red and blue colors are displayed in the color bar,
red indicates the direction of blood flow toward the probe; By contrast, the blue color
indicates the direction of blood flow away from the probe.
7-81
User Manual
Filter
Filters out low-frequency Doppler signals produced by tissue movement. Adjust the Cutoff
Frequency to remove doppler signals whose frequency is lower than the cutoff frequency.
NOTE: For more information on other touchscreen items, please refer to the ‘2D Mode’, ‘Color
Doppler Mode’, and ‘Power Doppler Mode’ sections.
[Figure 7.22 MV-Flow™ – Touchscreen]
7-82
Vascularity Index (VI)

Provides the amount of displayed blood flow acquired by MV-Flow™ image. Displays the
number of pixels, area, and ratio measurements within the Vascularity Index (VI) ROI.
Available VI ROI Types include Ellipse, Rectangle, and Manual Trace.
X Pixels
– Power: Number of the pixels within the VI ROI showing blood flow in MV-Flow™
image (having an intensity ≥ 26)
– ROI: Total number of the pixels within the VI ROI
X Area (Unit: cm2)
– Power: Size of the power pixel area within the VI ROI
– ROI: Size of the VI ROI area
X Ratio: Ratio of the power pixels over the total VI ROI pixels
WARNING: This feature is not intended for the diagnosis or evaluation of the progression
of disease. This feature is intended to provide relative values in response to changes in
ultrasound image acquisition method. The vascularity index does not provide an absolute
measurement of vascularity within a given ROI.
CAUTION:
X Pixels with at least 26 of brightness on the MV-Flow™ images are included only.
X Values of Gain, Tissue suppression, Filter, Sensitivity, DR, and FA affect VI.
– Alpha Blending and Balance do not affect the VI value.
7-83
User Manual
Combined Mode
In Combined Mode, three different modes are combined, including the default 2D Mode. Note
that, in 2D/C Live Mode, only two modes are combined: 2D and Color Doppler Modes.
2D/C/PW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the PW dial-button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral Doppler
Mode, press the C dial-button on the control panel.
2D/PD/PW Mode
Power Doppler Mode and PW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously.
In Power Doppler Mode, press the PW dial-button on the control panel. Or, in PW Spectral
Doppler Mode, press the PD button on the control panel.
2D/C/CW Mode
Color Doppler Mode and CW Spectral Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. This mode is
available only with certain probes.
In Color Doppler Mode, press the CW dial-button on the control panel. Or, in CW Spectral Doppler
Mode, press the C/Z dial-button on the control panel.
2D/C/M Mode
Color Doppler Mode and M Mode are displayed simultaneously.
7-84
2D/TDI/TDW Mode
TDI Mode and TDW Mode are displayed simultaneously. In PD mode or Color Doppler mode, press
the TDI, and then press the PW dial-button.
Dual Live Mode

2D Mode and Color Doppler Mode are displayed simultaneously. In either 2D mode or C mode,
select Dual Live on the touchscreen.
Changing Combined Mode Format
Changing Trackball State

In Combined Mode, more than two image modes are used at the same time.
Depending on the trackball’s state, you can change the position or size of: ROI on the
active image; the Sample Volume; M line, etc. Press the Change button on the control
panel to change the state of the trackball.
Note that when frozen, you can press the Change button to select the type of Cine image.
Changing the Menu

You can change the menu and touchscreen menu items without changing the active image
mode. The functions of the buttons on the control panel vary depending on the active
image mode.
For example, when the touchscreen menu for 2D mode is displayed on the screen in 2D/C/
PW mode, you can select another mode from the touchscreen menu to switch to that
mode.
NOTE: For information on optimizing an image in Combined Mode, please refer to ‘Basic
Mode’.
7-85
User Manual
Multi-Image Mode
The product supports Dual Mode and Quad Mode.
In Multi-Image Mode, an image can be displayed in different combined modes. Button operations
in an active area are the same as in Combined Mode.
Dual Mode
Press the L or R button on the control panel.
You can compare two independent images with each other. Each time you press the L or R
button, one of the two images is selected. The currently active image mode is indicated by a blue
marker at the top of the image. The buttons and menu operate according to the image mode that
is currently in use.
To exit from Dual mode, press the 2D dial-button.
[Figure 7.23 Dual Mode]
7-86
Quad Mode
Press the Quad button on the control panel to enter Quad Mode.
You can compare four different images at the same time. Each time you tap the Quad or Set
button, one of the four images is selected. The currently active image mode is indicated by a blue
marker at the top of the image. The buttons and menu operate according to the image mode that
is currently in use.
To exit Quad mode, press the Single button or the 2D dial-button on the control panel.
1 2
3 4
[Figure 7.24 Quad Mode]
Multi-Image Mode Screen Layout

Tips!
In Multi-Image Mode, recent Cine images are displayed on the screen by default.
X Dual Mode
Press the L or R button on the control panel to display the current Cine image and the
most recent Cine image in order of 1 → 2.
X Quad Mode
Press the Quad button on the control panel to display the current Cine image and the
three most recent Cine images on the screen. You can specify the method of displaying
images in Setup > Imaging > Common > Quad: Active Window Sequence.
– Zigzag: Set in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.
– Clockwise: Set in the order of 1 → 2 → 4 → 3.
NOTE: For information on optimizing an image in Multi-image mode, please refer to ‘Basic
Mode’.
7-87
User Manual
3D/4D Mode
In 3D mode, you can acquire 3D images using a 3D probe.
In 4D mode, you can acquire real-time 3D images using a 3D probe. This mode is also called
Live 3D Mode. In the current image information mode, ‘Live’ is indicated, meaning that it’s in 4D
mode. When you press Freeze, it will change to the 4D Cine screen.
NOTE: 3D Mode and 4D Mode provide additional options per product.
HS50 X 4D: SFVI, FAD, VSI, Smooth Cut, Volume Compounding

XH50 X 3D XI: Multi Slice View, Oblique View, XI VOCAL
X 4D: SFVI, FAD, VSI, Smooth Cut, Volume Compounding
HS60
X 3D XI: Multi Slice View, Oblique View, XI VOCAL
XH60
X 3D MXI: Volume Slice, Mirror View
Freehand 3D Mode
Tips!
A 3D mode where 3D probes are used is referred to as Static 3D Mode, while a mode where
general probes are used is called Freehand 3D Mode.
That is, a mode where general probes, not 3D probes, are used is referred to as Freehand 3D
Mode. Please note the following: Only applicable to Convex, Linear, Endocavity (EA2-11AR,
EA2-11AV, EA2-11B, EVN4-9, ER4-9) probes.
X Available in MPR Mode only.
X Cannot be used with 2D Steer, Trapezoid, or Write Zoom.
7-88
3D Mode
This product can be used with 3D probes, and provides 3D Mode and XI STIC Mode.
[Figure 7.25 3D Mode]
3D
This mode uses a 3D probe to acquire 3D images.
XI STIC
In this mode, fetal cardiac cycle and STIC volume data can be obtained with 3D probes.
For more information, please refer to 'XI STIC' in this chapter.
NOTE: XI STIC is an optional feature of this product.
Entering and Exiting 3D/4D Mode

Press the 3D/4D button. Press the button again to exit 3D/4D mode and return to 2D mode.
7-89
User Manual
3D/4D Mode Screen
ROI Box
In 3D/4D mode, the ROI box is also referred to as the volume box. The box is used to
indicate 3D/4D conversion areas.
You can adjust the position and size of the ROI box by using the Change button on
the control panel. Each time the Change button is pressed, the state of the ROI box is
displayed in the lower middle part of the screen as follows:
X ROI Position: In this state, the position of the ROI box can be changed. You can move
the ROI box by using the trackball.
X ROI Size: In this state, the size of the ROI box can be changed. After resizing the ROI box
with the trackball, press the Change button to confirm the new size.
3D Cine
The 3D images saved temporarily in the system can be reviewed. The 3D Cine Define screen is
displayed on the touchscreen.
3D Cine Define
Specify the settings needed for creation of a Cine image.
Rotate Angle
Specify the total image rotation angle.
Step Angle
Specify the rotation angle per step of the image.
The Difference between Rotate Angle and Step Angle

Tips!
A Cine image rotates to the angle specified under Rotate Angle. During this process, each
rotational step is equivalent to the angle specified under Step Angle. For example, if Rotate
Angle is set to 360˚ and Step Angle is set to 15˚, a 3D Cine image rotates to 360˚ in 25 steps,
each of which involves a rotation of 15˚.
7-90
Rotate Axis
Specify the rotation axis.
Generate
Cine images are generated by applying the current settings. Once images are generated,
the touchscreen switches to Cine Review.
Review
Review previously generated Cine images. The touchscreen switches to Cine Review.
Start Angle
Use the dial-button to set the start angle of a Cine image. When Start Angle is set, Rotate
Angle is cancelled.
End Angle
Use the dial-button to set the end angle of a Cine image. When End Angle is set, Rotate
Angle is cancelled.
[Figure 7.26 3D Cine Define – Touchscreen]
7-91
User Manual
Cine Review
Specify the settings needed for review of a Cine image.
[Figure 7.27 Cine Review]
Play Mode
Select the play mode for Cine images.
X Loop: Repeats playback in one direction.
X Yoyo: Plays until the end in one direction, and then plays in the reverse direction.
Cine Play
When it is turned ‘On’, Cine images are played. If it is turned Off, Cine Frame will appear on
the touchscreen.
New Cine
Clears the current Cine image and creates a new one. The system switches to the 3D Cine
Define screen.
Speed
Set the speed at which Cine images are played.
7-92
Trim Start
Specify the position of the first frame, and press the dial-button. Then, the specified
position is saved.
Trim End
Specify the position of the last frame, and press the dial-button. Then, the specified
position is saved.
Cine Frame
Select a Cine frame to review. Use the dial-button or move the trackball left or right to
select.
NOTE: This option is available when Play is turned off. It can be adjusted by as many as the
total number of Cine frames by using the knob button with the ‘current Cine frame number’
being shown on the monitor screen.
7-93
User Manual
4D Mode
In 4D Mode, 3D images can be obtained in real time with 3D probes. This mode is also called
Live 3D Mode.
Smart 4D
Tips!
Smart 4D collectively refers to the 4D, 3D XI, and 3D MXI functions.
[Figure 7.28 4D Mode]
4D Mode Screen
Press the Freeze button on the control panel to switch to the 4D Cine screen.
NOTE: In 4D, only MPR, MSV, and Oblique View Modes are available. For more information,
please refer to 3D View-MPR and 3D XI.
7-94
4D Cine
The 4D images saved temporarily in the system can be reviewed. The 4D Cine screen is
displayed on the touchscreen.
NOTE: You can also press the Freeze button in 4D Mode to execute 4D Cine.
Play Mode
Select the play mode for Cine images. Use the touchscreen to select either Loop or Yoyo.
X Loop: Repeats playback in one direction.
X Yoyo: Plays until the end in one direction, and then plays in the reverse direction.
Cine Type
Select the Cine image type by tapping the corresponding button on the touchscreen.
X Volume: This button appears when Cine images are played. The MPR, MSV, or Oblique
buttons are enabled, depending on the state before the 4D Cine was started. Cine
images can be played by changing Display Format, etc.
X Image: This is the general Cine playing method.
Cine Play
X Volume: Tap the Play button on the touchscreen to play; tap the Freeze button to
freeze.
X Image: Tap the Play button on the touchscreen to play; tap Play again to freeze.
Cine Speed
Set the speed at which Cine images are played. Use the dial-button to select Very Slow,
Slow, Normal, Fast, or Fastest.
Vol. Index
Move the trackball or use the dial-button to select an Index. ‘The current volume data
number/total number of volume data’ is displayed.
7-95
User Manual
3D Stand By
This screen is displayed on the touchscreen when 3D/4D Modes are entered. Set the required
parameters to specify how 3D images are acquired.
[Figure 7.29 3D Stand By – Touchscreen]
Menu Tab
Select a tab for 3D/4D Modes. Different tabs are displayed on the touchscreen depending on
the probe currently being used.
Adjusting 2D Images in 3D/4D Modes

Tips!
X Tap the 2D Menu tab on the touchscreen to optimize a 2D image before acquiring the
corresponding 3D image.
X Once the 2D image is optimized, tap 3D Menu on the touchscreen to return to
3D Stand By mode.
View Mode
Select a view mode to use after 3D images are acquired.
3D View
The standard view mode for 3D image review. Press MPR to select.
7-96
Rendering Preset
Selects a Preset for 3D images. For more information, refer to the preset information
contained in the ‘3D View - MPR Mode’ section.
Curved ROI
If it is turned ‘On’, adjust the ROI Line in the form of a curve to select the rendering area.
NOTE:
X It cannot be used concurrently when OH (Orientation Help) is on.
X It is supported when the Render Direction value is ‘C+.’
X It is supported in Dual and Quad modes.
Breech Sweep
You can also scan a breech baby from its head to abdomen without changing the probe
direction.
Scan Quality
Selects the quality of 3D images.
X High: Image quality is high, but the speed of capturing (or rendering) 3D image is low.
X Med2: Provides better image capturing speed and lower image quality than the High
setting.
X Med1: Provides better image capturing speed and lower image quality than the Med2
setting.
X Low: Provides the highest 3D image capturing speed and the lowest image quality.
NOTE: Scan Quality is not available in the XI STIC menu tab.
7-97
User Manual
Volume Angle
Set the scan angle. The setting range varies depending on the selected probe.
NOTE: In XI STIC, set the scan angle from 10° to 60°.
Scan Time
Set the image acquisition time. The button is enabled in XI STIC only.
NOTE: For more information, please refer to the ‘XI STIC’ section.
Trimester
Set the pregnancy trimester. The button is enabled in XI STIC only.
NOTE: For more information, please refer to the ‘XI STIC’ section.
7-98
Acquiring 3D/4D Images

1. Specify the location and size of the ROI Box as desired.
2. Configure various settings in the 3D Stand By screen on the touchscreen.
Select a menu tab, and then configure settings in order of View Mode → Rendering Preset
→ Soft Menu.
3. Press the Freeze or Set button on the control panel. The system will begin acquiring 3D
images. To cancel the acquisition of a 3D image in progress, press the Exit button.
4. Once 3D images are acquired, the 3D View or 3D XI screen is displayed depending on the
setting.
If a left/right-reversed 3D image is obtained, the image will also be shown left/right
reversed in 3D View or 3D XI.
5. You can perform diagnosis by optimizing images. Press the 3D/4D button to acquire 3D
images again.
How to Acquire High Quality 3D Images

Tips!
X Consider the direction, size and section of the viewpoint as well as the visibility of an
object.
X Before acquiring 3D images, adjust the contrast in 2D Mode.
X The bigger the ROI box, the slower the rendering speed. Therefore, set an appropriate ROI
box size.
X To see the 3D image of a fetus in frontal view, position the fetal head in the direction
of the Direction Mark, putting it in the coronal plane. Then scan the fetus from back to
abdomen.
X The 3D image of a fetal face can be more easily located in the coronal plane than in the
existing sagittal plane.
X To determine the surface contour for lesions that do not generate echoes, such as
amniotic fluid, make sure that they are surrounded by hypoechoic tissues.
X After acquiring a 3D image, you can adjust the low-threshold level to clean up the image.
In general, it is recommended that you leave the High Threshold value at the maximum
value of 255 rather than adjusting it.
7-99
User Manual
3D View – MPR
This view mode is enabled upon acquisition of images when MPR is selected in 3D Stand By.
You can optimize 3D images, perform diagnosis, and take measurements.
Changing View Mode

Tips!
Select the 3D Menu tab on the touchscreen to change the view mode.
Basic Operating Instructions
Zooming In to/Out of Images

Turn the Zoom dial-button to zoom in and out of an image. The current zoom factor
appears on the bottom side of the screen.
VCT Zoom
After tapping VCT Zoom on the touchscreen, press the Zoom dial-button on the control
panel to convert it to VCT Zoom function. Turn the dial-button to zoom in to/out of VCT
images. The current VCT Zoom factor appears at the bottom of the screen.
NOTE: This option is available with VCT.
Post Gain
You can adjust the value using the 2D knob button. In 4D mode, Post Gain works during
Freeze.
Rotating Image Around X Axis

Use the M/x dial-button.
Rotating Image Around Y Axis

Use the PW/y dial-button.
7-100
Rotating Image Around Z Axis

Use the Color/z dial-button.
Ref. Slice
Use the Marker/Ref dial-button. It moves the Reference Slice in a straight line
horizontally.
Calculations by Application
Press the Calculator button. The measurement methods are same as application
measurement and 5D NT™ of ‘Measurements’.
NOTE:
X In the 4D mode, measurements of XI STIC and VOCAL are not available.
X In MSV mode, measurement is not available if the display format is 2x3 or higher.
Basic Measurement
Press the Calculator button. For more information, refer to ‘Basic Measurement’ in
‘Measurements’.
Tap Save on the touchscreen to finish saving. To cancel it, press the Exit button on the
control panel.
Entering Text
Press the Text button. With the Quick Text function enabled, pressing any key on the
keyboard immediately switches the mode to Text Mode. For more information, please refer
to the ‘Entering Text’ section of ‘Image Management’.
Entering Arrows
Press the Text button and then the Arrow button on the touchscreen. For more
information, please refer to the ‘Entering Arrows’ section of ‘Image Management’.
7-101
User Manual
Saving Images
NOTE: If volume data contains both 4D and 3D Cine images, choose either 4D or 3D for
saving.
1. Press the Store/Print mapping button on the control panel. The touchscreen will show
the 3D Data Save screen.
2. Specify settings such as Data Type, Save Item, and Volume Format.
3. Tap Save on the touchscreen to finish saving. To cancel it, press the Exit button on the
control panel.
Volume Data
Tips!
X If volume data contains a Cine image, it is saved at the same time.
X If images are saved with volume data, they can be converted to new 3D rendering images
with SonoView.
Printing Images
Go to Setup > Customize > Buttons and customize U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, and U6 buttons as
you want.
7-102
Basics of 3D View
Screen Layout
1 2
3 4
[Figure 7.30 3D View]
1 A Plane: The slice image of the Longitudinal section.

2 B Plane: The slice image of the Transversal section.
3 C Plane: The slice image of the Horizontal section.
4 3D Image
5 Trackball state indication: The current state of the trackball is displayed at the bottom
of the monitor screen. You can select Pointer, Move, or ROI for trackball. Press the
Change button on the control panel to change the trackball state. The trackball state
changes sequentially each time the button is pressed.
X Pointer: Re-adjusts the position of ROI Box. Pressing the Pointer button on the
control panel switches to Pointer state. You can rotate the ROI box around the
image axis by using the pointer while pressing the Set button. Press the Change
button again to switch to another state.
X Move: Moves the 3D image with the trackball. The acquired 3D image moves as you
move the trackball.
X ROI: You can resize the ROI box with the trackball. The ROI box on the 3D image is
resized as you move the trackball.
7-103
User Manual
Touchscreen Layout
Only those buttons that are available in the current mode are enabled. Use the arrow
buttons to navigate between pages.
[Figure 7.31 3D View Menu]
7-104
Mode
Select the display format in which 3D images are presented.
Render
Longitudinal, Transversal, and Horizontal plane images are displayed together with the 3D
image.
2D
Longitudinal, Transversal, and Horizontal plane images, along with OH (Orientation Help),
are displayed on the screen. OH indicates the relative position of the currently selected
plane in regard to volume data.
Tips! Use Single to view further details.
VCT
Longitudinal, Transversal, and Horizontal plane images and combinations of them are
displayed. Each plane is displayed with a different colored frame.
NOTE: Accept ROI is available in Render. Tap the touchscreen to turn it On or Off. If it is
turned on, ROI is not shown.
Display Format
You can change the Display Format. The display format varies for each mode.
X Single: Switches to Full screen.
X Dual: Switches to 2D/3D screen.
X Quad: Switches to ROI 3D screen.
NOTE: In 2D or VCT mode, only Single or Quad Format can be used.
7-105
User Manual
Ref. Image
Press the button to select a reference image among A (Longitudinal Section), B (Transversal
Section), and C (Horizontal Section).
X OH (Orientation Help): If it is turned ‘On’, a 3D image will be displayed along with OH.
NOTE: This option may be used in 2D and Render.
3D Rotation
It is rotated based on the current 3D image.
NOTE: Mix, Th.Low, and Transparency are available in Render mode.
Init
Resets the positional information of the 3D image.
FAD (Fetal face Auto Detection)

This automatically detects the face of the fetus and removes the images of any limbs that
obscure the face.
VSI (Volume Shading Imaging)

It displays a realistic image by using the Depth and Intensity values. When Surface or Surface
Smooth is enabled in Render Mode 1, Shading is enabled in Render Mode 2.
Accept ROI
Reviews the 3D image in a fixed ROI area.
NOTE: Available in Render and Mirror View.
7-106
Mix
Configure the mix of Render modes 1 and 2.
NOTE: For details on Render mode, refer to ‘Render Setup’ in ‘3D Utility Menu’.
Th. Low
Specify the minimum range of Threshold.
Threshold
Tips!
This option allows you to adjust the threshold value in order to eliminate unnecessary data
from images. As the number increases, cyst elements become more apparent. As the number
decreases, bone elements become more apparent.
Select
Select Post Curve.
Position
Set the position of the post curve selected under Select.
Bias
Set the bias of the post curve selected under Select.
Transparency
Set the transparency of a 3D image. The lowest value is for complete transparency and the
highest value is for complete opacity.
7-107
User Manual
ClearVision
The noise reduction filter improves edge enhancement and creates sharp 2D images for
optimal diagnostic performance. In addition, ClearVision provides application-specific
optimization and advanced temporal resolution in live scan mode.
NOTE: For more information on ClearVision and ClearVision Index, please refer to the
‘2D Mode Menu’ section of ‘Modes of Operation’.
HDVI™
HDVI™ is a volume rendering technology that improves visualization of edges and small
structures in volume data.
Filters 3D images to express outlines more vividly and improve images. Five predefined
indices are available.
NOTE: HDVI™ is an optional feature of HS60/XH60.
HDVI™ Index
Tap HDVI™ Index on the touchscreen. Select an index between 1 and 5 using the button on
the touchscreen.
HDVI™ Type
Tap the touchscreen button or use the dial-button to select the part to measure among Face,
Brain, Early OB, Heart, Spine, Gyn, Breast, Thyroid, Carotid, Abdomen, Kidney, and Surface and
adjust the image.
NOTE: The ClearVision and HDVI™ options are enabled in MPR, MSV, Oblique View mode.
NOTE: The following are enable MPR mode: CrystalVue™, MagiCut, RealisticVue™, 3D Cine,
4D Cine, Render Setup, Preset, Post Processing, Curved ROI, Chroma.
7-108
Geometry
Move, magnify, or rotate an image rendered in 3D Mode.
X Rotation: Use the X/Y/Z button to rotate the rendered image.
X Magnification: Use the Zoom button to magnify the rendered image.
X Move: Use the trackball to move the rendered image.
7-109
User Manual
Orientation Dot
When this is turned ‘On’, a dot appears at the center of the reference image.
Render Setup
You can specify the image rendering method. It specifies and displays the Render direction and
Render mode on the image.
NOTE: In Oblique View Mode, this option is available only when OVIX is On.
[Figure 7.32 Render Setup – Touchscreen]
7-110
Gray
Specify how volume data acquired with the gray method should be rendered into 3D images.
Render Direction
Used to specify the rendering orientation. ‘+’ indicates the facing direction, and ‘–’
indicates the opposite of the facing direction.
Render Mode 1, 2
Set Render mode 1 and Render mode 2.
X Surface: Represents 3D images in the Ray-Casting method, which shows the shell of an
image with curved surfaces.
X Smooth: Represents 3D images that are smoother than those created by the Surface
method.
X Max: Represents 3D images at maximum intensity. It can be useful for the observation
of bone structures in a human body.
X Min: Represents 3D images at minimum intensity. It can be useful for observation of
vessels or hollow parts in a human body.
X Light: Represents the depth of 3D images in terms of brightness.
X X-Ray: Represents 3D images in terms of average intensity. This shows images that are
similar to X-ray images.
X AmbientLight: Creating intricately graduated shades, AmbientLight improves depth
expression of the surface. This 3D rendering feature is especially useful to see fetal
face or hands in detail.
NOTE:
X You need to press Light Direction and then Move Light in order to enter Trackball mode.
X For descriptions of other menu items, see ‘Render Setup’.
Mix
Th.High
Used to specify the maximum threshold range.
7-111
User Manual
Th.Low
Specify the minimum threshold range.
Threshold
Tips!
This option allows you to adjust the threshold value in order to eliminate unnecessary data
from images. As the number increases, cyst elements become more apparent. As the number
decreases, bone elements become more apparent.
Th.Power
Specify the color threshold. As this value increases, more color is removed from an image.
Color
Specify how the volume data acquired with the Angio/CFM method are rendered into 3D
images. Other settings are configured in the same way as Gray Render Mode.
See Thru
Set the method for rendering the data from Gray+Angio, Gray+CFM combinations as a 3D
image.
Transparent-Transparent
Adjust the transparencies of both Gray and Color data, so that the Color data inside the
Gray data may be studied. The parts that are obscured by the Gray data are displayed
slightly darker.
Transparent-Surface
Adjust the transparency of Gray data, so that the Color data inside the Gray data may be
studied. The parts that are obscured by the Gray data are displayed slightly darker.
Max-Transparent
Set Gray data to ‘Max’, and Color data to ‘Transp’, to study Color data. The parts that are
obscured by the Gray data are displayed slightly lighter.
7-112
Max-Surface
Set Gray data to ‘Max’, and Color data to ‘Surface’, to study Color data. The parts that are
obscured by the Gray data are displayed slightly lighter.
Inversion
This option shows inverted images when the volume data acquired by the gray method
is rendered into 3D images. Other settings can be specified in the same way as with Gray
Render Mode.
7-113
User Manual
VOCAL (Virtual Organ Computer Aided analysis)

Measure the volume of tissues within the human body. It runs in the order of VOCAL Define →
VOCAL Edit → VOCAL.
[Figure 7.33 VOCAL]
VOCAL Define
Specify the settings required for VOCAL execution.
Contour Type
Select the contour line type. A contour line is automatically created for all types except
Manual.
Solid
Used for object data with many echoes.
General
Draw a contour line based on a typical object. This is faster than other automatic contour
types but less accurate.
7-114
Prostate
Used for prostate data.
Cystic
Used for object data with fewer echoes.
Sphere
After creating a spherical object, edit its contour to make it into the desired shape.
Manual
Create the desired shape of an object manually.
Ref. Image
Select a reference image.
Step Angle
Set the rotation angle.
Pole Point Move Using Trackball

Set the range to perform VOCAL in a reference image. In a reference image, Pole 1 indicates
the position of the upper arrow and Pole 2 indicates the position of the lower arrow. Adjust
by using either the trackball and Set button on the control panel or the dial-button on the
touchscreen.
Init
7-115
User Manual
Next
Creation of VOCAL data starts.
When Contour Type is Set to Manual

Tips!
1. Tap Next on the touchscreen. The Image Position screen will be displayed on the
touchscreen.
2. After tapping the Set button over an image, move the trackball to contour.
X Tap Next to move to the next frame.
X Tap Previous to move to the previous frame.
3. Tap Done on the touchscreen. Start VOCAL.
If you tap Done without contouring, VOCAL is performed over a sphere.
[Figure 7.34 VOCAL Define – Touchscreen]
7-116
VOCAL Edit
Once VOCAL data is created, volume information will be displayed on the screen. In VOCAL Edit
Mode, you can modify or redo the existing contour lines.
Shell Mode
Set the shell of an object based on its contour line.
Off
Do not use Shell Mode. The created contour and the shell overlap.
Inside
The shell is drawn inside the contour generated by the Shell Thick. specified.
Outside
The shell is drawn outside the contour generated by the Shell Thick. specified.
Symmetric
Half the shell is drawn inside the contour and the other half of the shell is drawn outside
the contour, with each drawn at half of the Shell Thick. specified.
Shell Thick.
Set the shell thickness of an object. Use the dial-button to select a value from 1 to 20mm. This
option appears on the touchscreen only when Shell Mode is used.
Image Position
Review contour lines for each frame. Use Previous and Next to move through frames.
7-117
User Manual
Multi Edit
Modify more than one contour line at once. Tap this button on the touchscreen to turn this
feature on or off. If it is turned on, up to 6 contour lines can be displayed simultaneously on
the screen. When there are more than 6 lines, use the MEV Page dial-button to navigate
through pages. MEV is an abbreviation for Multi Edit View.
Use Pole 1 and Pole 2 to edit contour lines. You can also use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to edit contour lines. Once editing is complete, tap Exit Multi Edit again
to turn it off.
Clear Contour
When you tap this button on the touchscreen, the VOCAL data are deleted, the settings are
maintained, and the system returns to the VOCAL Define step.
New Contour
Tap the button on the touchscreen to move from VOCAL Manual page to VOCAL Setup page.
This button only appears if Contour Type is set to Manual.
Accept Contour
Tap the button on the touchscreen to apply changes. The screen will switch to the VOCAL data
review screen.
[Figure 7.35 VOCAL Edit – Touchscreen]
7-118
VOCAL
Optimizes VOCAL data for review.
VOCAL Mode
Specify how VOCAL data are presented.
ROI 3D
Shows images in the Longitudinal, Transversal, and Horizontal planes, together with
VOCAL data.
Fixed 3D
Shows images in the Longitudinal, Transversal, and Horizontal planes, together with 3D
images for VOCAL data.
VCT
Shows actual combinations of images in the Longitudinal, Transversal, and Horizontal
planes and VOCAL data. Use the VCT Type dial-button to select one from Type 1-Type 8.
Display Format
When you select Single or Quad, the VOCAL data are displayed in full screen. This can be used
in every mode. When you press this button again, the display returns to the previous screen.
Ref. Image
VOCAL Edit
Return to the VOCAL Edit stage.
Init
Resets the positional information of the 3D image is initialized.
7-119
User Manual
Mode
Specify how the surface of VOCAL data is presented.
X Surface: VOCAL data are represented using the method of expressing the exterior of
images by curves.
X Wireframe: VOCAL data are represented by dots and lines.
NOTE: This option is available with ROI 3D.
[Figure 7.36 VOCAL – Touchscreen]
7-120
3D XI
This view mode is enabled if 3D image acquisition is completed when MSV or Oblique View is
selected in 3D Stand By. ‘MSV’ is displayed in the upper-left corner of the monitor screen. An
image can be viewed in multiple slices.
NOTE:
X 3D XI (MSV, Oblique View, and XI VOCAL) is an optional feature of this product.
X 3D XI is only available when 3D probes are used.
MSV (Multi Slice View)

An image can be viewed in multiple slices.
[Figure 7.37 Multi Slice View]
NOTE: Available options are Calculator, Caliper, Text and Arrow.
7-121
User Manual
MSV Screen
The images sliced at the thickness set in Slice Thick. are displayed on the screen.
Slice Number/Total Number of Slices is shown at the bottom of each slice image.
The image information displays the current mode, Ref. Image, and Slice Thick.
Rotating Image
Rotating the reference plane affects all other planes.
X X-axis Rotation: Use the M/X dial-button on the control panel. If the trackball is
in Pointer mode, place the Pointer near the X-axis in an image and then move the
trackball while pressing the Set button.
X Y-axis Rotation: Use the PW/Y dial-button on the control panel. If the trackball is
in Pointer mode, place the Pointer near the Y-axis in an image and then move the
X Z-axis Rotation: Use the Color/Z dial-button on the control panel. If the trackball
is in Pointer mode, place the Pointer near the Z-axis in an image and then move the
Moving Image
Set the trackball in Move Mode, and then move it up/down/left/right. The image will move
along the X and Y axes.
[Figure 7.38 Multi Slice View – Touchscreen]
7-122
Display Format
Set the layout of slice images. The number of indices that can be displayed simultaneously on
the screen varies depending on this setting. If the layout is changed, the selected slice image
moves to the first position on the screen.
Ref. Image
MSV OH
When it is turned ‘On’, the A, B, and C planes of the selected slice image will appear on the
screen.
Page
Change the page on the screen. This option can be useful when the total number of slice
images exceeds what is specified in Display Format. Select a page by tapping the Previous
and Next buttons on the touchscreen.
Selected Slice
Select a slice image to observe.
Slice Thick.
Set the cut depth of images. Depending on your selection, the number of indices and pages
will vary.
NOTE: The Slice Thick. represents the slice width in volume data, rather than the actual
anatomical position.
Position
Set the position of the post curve.
7-123
User Manual
Bias
Set the bias of the post curve.
Ruler
Set the position of the ruler.
Select
Select Post Curve.
NOTE:
X The following 3D Utility Menu items are enabled in MSV mode: Orientation Dot, Chroma,
4D Cine, Post Processing, Preset, Slab 3D.
X For more information on 3D Utility, see ‘3D Utility Menu’.
7-124
Oblique View
After drawing a straight or curved line in the selected image in MSV Mode, you can study the
related oblique image. To do this, follow the procedure below:
1. Select Display Format and then specify the number of oblique images to study.
2. Set the Cut Type.
3. Draw a straight or curved line in a reference image by using the trackball and the Set button.
An oblique image will appear with the start (S) and end (E) points shown. If Cut Type is set to
Line and the trackball is in Move state, you can reposition the line.
4. Optimize the image for observation by using other buttons.
NOTE:
X Functions such as Text and Arrow can be used.
X When Display Format is 2x1, measurement functions such as Calculator and Caliper can
be used.
[Figure 7.39 Oblique View]
7-125
User Manual
Oblique View Screen

The reference image that is selected in MSV Mode is displayed on the screen. The reference
image is highlighted with blue borders and always placed in the top left corner of the screen.
When more than one line is used for observation, each line is indicated by a different color
and number.
The image information displays the current mode, Ref.Image, Oblique Cut Type, and Plumb
Size (or Slice Thick.).
NOTE: When OVIX is used, the image information also displays OVIX Line Offset, Mix,
Threshold Low, and Render Mode 1, 2.
Direction of View of Oblique Image

Tips!
The observer is located perpendicular to the section of a reference image. Please see the view
direction below:
View Direction
End point Start point
Start point End point View Direction
Display Format
Set the layout of oblique images. Depending on this setting, the number of oblique images
and the Oblique Cut Type will vary.
7-126
Cut Type
Select a cut method.
Line
The oblique image of a straight line can be studied.
Contour
The oblique image of a curved line or contour line can be studied.
Multi Line & Multi Contour

Tips!
If Display Format is set to 3x2 or 3x3, enable Auto Increment to draw more than one line.
Parallel
The oblique image of a straight line and its parallel lines can be studied. If a straight line is
drawn, its parallel lines are automatically shown on the screen.
NOTE: This cannot be used when Display Format is 2x1.
Plumb
The oblique image of a straight line and its perpendicular lines can be observed. If a
straight line is drawn, its perpendicular lines are automatically shown on the screen.
Image Rotation
Specify the direction of an oblique image. Select the oblique image that you wish to change
the direction of from Selected Slice.
7-127
User Manual
Clear Line
Delete the Oblique image.
Selected Slice
Select a line.
Plumb Size
Adjust the length of the perpendicular line. The length of the centermost line may be
adjusted by 1mm; its current length is displayed in image information.
NOTE: This is used only when Cut Type is Plumb.
Slice Thick.
Adjust the distance between the perpendicular lines. The length of the centermost line may
be adjusted by 1mm; its current length is displayed in image information.
NOTE: This is used only when Oblique Cut Type is Parallel.
7-128
Rotate Line
Rotate a straight line. When the line is rotated, the oblique image is also changed accordingly.
NOTE: This cannot be used when:

X Cut Type is Contour; or
X When the Selected Slice is Selected Slice Select All.
OVIX (Oblique View eXtended)

Which sets the cross-sectional thickness of an oblique image to show the image in 3D.
When this is ‘On’, an OVIX Line appears in the reference image, which indicates the cross-
sectional thickness of the oblique image of the reference image.
The thickness of the OVIX Line can be adjusted with OVIX Thick. To change the 3D image
settings, select and adjust Setting or OVIX Post Curve from the 3D Utility Menu.
NOTE: This cannot be used when Cut Type is Contour.
Multi Ovlx
Tips!
This means that the OVIX function is enabled when the Layout value is set to 3×2 or higher in
Oblique View.
OVIX Thick.
Adjust the thickness of OVIX. The 3D image for the set thickness appears.
Select
Select Post Curve.
7-129
User Manual
Init
Deletes the Oblique image and initializes the location information for the Ref. Image at the
same time.
NOTE:
X The following 3D utility menu items are enabled in Oblique View mode:
Orientation Dot, 4D Cine, Post Processing, Render Setup, Chroma, Preset, Slab 3D
X For more information on 3D Utility, refer to ‘3D Utility Menu’.
[Figure 7.40 Oblique View – Touchscreen]
7-130
XI VOCAL
Measure the volume of tissues in 3D XI Mode. It runs in the order of XI VOCAL Define → XI VOCAL
Edit → XI VOCAL.
NOTE: XI VOCAL is one of the 3D XI features. It is available as an optional feature of this

product.
[Figure 7.41 XI VOCAL]
VOCAL vs XI VOCAL
Tips!
X VOCAL: Measures the volume of an object in a general 3D image. Uses rotating slices.
X XI VOCAL: Measures the volume of an object in the selected reference image in MSV
Mode by using parallel slices. Uses parallel slices. Calculates the volume of an object by
cutting it into multiple slices.
7-131
User Manual
XI VOCAL Define
Specify how slice and contour lines are extracted.
Reference images and slice lines are displayed on the left side of the screen. Slice images with
the start (S) and end (E) points of a slice line are displayed on the right side of the screen.
[Figure 7.42 XI VOCAL Define]
7-132
Contour Type
Select the contour line type. A contour line is automatically created for all types except
Manual.
Solid
Used for object data with many echoes.
Cystic
Used for object data with fewer echoes.
General
Draw a contour line based on a typical object. This is faster than other automatic contour
types but less accurate.
Manual
Create the desired shape of an object manually. A contour line can be specified in the XI
VOCAL Edit screen.
Ref. Image
Ref. Contour
If it is turned ‘On’, a contour line can be drawn by using the trackball and the Set button.
Slice Direction
Set the direction of a slice line. Changing the direction of a slice line also changes the slice
image displayed on the screen.
7-133
User Manual
Init
Next
Switches to the XI VOCAL Edit screen.
NOTE: If Contour Type is set to Manual, the system switches to the XI VOCAL screen when
Next is pressed.
# of Slices
Specify the number of slice images. Depending on the selected number of images, the
interval between slices will vary.
[Figure 7.43 XI VOCAL Define – Touchscreen]
7-134
XI VOCAL Edit
Specify the contour extraction range or run XI VOCAL.
Based on slice lines, slice images and pole points will be displayed on the screen. A pole point is
a reference point against which an object contour is extracted. Two pole points appear in each
slice image.
The selected slice image is highlighted with blue borders. ‘The image number/the total number
of slice images’ is shown at the bottom of each image.
Reference Image and Slice Line

Tips!
These always appear in the bottom right corner of the XI VOCAL Edit screen. They can be
useful when the position of a slice image needs to be considered.
[Figure 7.44 XI VOCAL Edit]
Ref. Page
Change the page on the screen.
New Contour
Delete the current data and return to the XI VOCAL Define stage.
7-135
User Manual
Accept Contour
Apply the changes and perform XI VOCAL.
When Contour Type is Set to Manual

Tips!
Use the Set button and the trackball to draw a contour line before pressing Accept Contour.
If you press Accept Contour without drawing a contour line, a general type contour line will
be extracted.
[Figure 7.45 XI VOCAL Edit – Touchscreen]
7-136
XI VOCAL
Optimize XI VOCAL data for review. Slice images with their contour line shown and 3D reference
images are displayed. The 3D reference image is highlighted with blue borders, and the
calculated volume is shown at the bottom of the image. The current mode is shown in the 3D
image information area.
3D Reference Image
Tips!
Use XI VOCAL to display an object for which volume has been obtained in 3D. Use Zoom, M/x,
PW/y, or Color/z to enlarge or rotate the object for observation.
View All Slices

When it is turned ‘On’, all XI VOCAL data, including reference image, slice line, and plane
image, appear on the screen simultaneously.
Edit Contour
You are returned to the XI VOCAL Edit screen. You can edit the contour line by using the
trackball and the Set button.
[Figure 7.46 XI VOCAL – Touchscreen]
7-137
User Manual
XI STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)

This function is used to obtain the fetal cardiac cycle using volume data on the fetal cardiac area,
and to recompile the volume data for display.
NOTE:
X XI STIC is an optional feature of this product.
X XI STIC is only available when 3D probes are used.
X This only appears when the Application is set to OB.
X When you enter 3D Stand By in Fetal Heart Preset, the system will automatically switch to
STIC.
[Figure 7.47 XI STIC]
7-138
Acquiring XI STIC Images

1. Select the XI STIC tab on the 3D Stand By screen.
2. Set the various parameters as you would for acquisition of standard 3D images.
3. Press Freeze or Set to start acquisition of 3D images.
4. Check the fetal cardiac cycle calculated on the screen.
5. To continue, cancel Progress or to re-acquire the image, press Discard.
6. You can perform diagnosis by optimizing images.
NOTE: If the motion artifacting is severe, data does not contain the cardiac cycle, or the heart
rate cannot be calculated for any other reason, you will be returned to the XI STIC image
preparation screen.
To Obtain Superior STIC Volume Data

Tips!
X Volume Angle: If the size of the fetal heart is small, use a smaller Volume Angle.
X ROI Position: Adjust the scan position so that the center of the Volume Angle and the
fetal heart are aligned properly.
X ROI Box: Adjust the size of the volume box so that it nearly fits the size of the fetal heart.
Volume Angle
Set the scan angle.
Scan Time
Set the image acquisition time.
7-139
User Manual
Trimester
Set the pregnancy trimester.
Trimester
Tips!
If 1st-3rd are selected, the recommended scan time and STIC angle are automatically set for
the specified trimester. Please see the following table:
Trimester 1st 2nd 3rd
Scan Time 10 seconds 12 seconds 15 seconds
Volume Angle 20˚ 25˚ 30˚
If a scan time and Volume Angle other than those in the above table are set, the trimester is
displayed as User Set.
NOTE: For information on other usage, please refer to ‘3D Stand By’ section.
Reviewing XI STIC Image

XI STIC image is played as a Volume Cine; on the left side of the screen, XI STIC information is
indicated. Press Freeze to stop Volume Cine.
NOTE: During Volume Cine, only MPR, MSV, and Oblique View Modes are available.
Speed
Select the playback speed for XI STIC images. This rate is based on the fetal heart rate (100%).
7-140
Vol. Index
Select an index.
NOTE:
X This option is only available when Freeze is enabled.
X Refer to 3D View-MPR and 3D XI for further information on its use.
[Figure 7.48 XI STIC – Touchscreen]
7-141
User Manual
3D MXI
NOTE:
X 3D MXI (Mirror View, Volume Slice) is an optional feature of HS60/XH60.
X 3D MXI is only available when 3D probes are used.
Mirror View
3D images can be viewed in multiple directions.
NOTE: If you press Mirror View in modes other than Render Mode, Mirror View will start after
the mode switches to Render Mode. Therefore, the settings configured in Render Mode will
be applied to Mirror View images.
Mirror View Screen

The front, top, left and right sides of a 3D image are displayed on the screen. In addition, a
reference image appears in the upper right corner of the screen, indicating the direction of
images.
1 Reference image for Mirror View
2 Image that views the reference image from the left side
3 Image that views the reference image from the top
4 Image that views the reference image from the right side
5 Reference image indicating the direction of each image
7-142
5
3
2 4
[Figure 7.49 Mirror View]
Trackball State
The current state of the trackball is displayed at the bottom of the monitor screen. You can
use the trackball's features by selecting Pointer, Move, or ROI. Press the Change button on
the control panel to change the trackball state. The trackball state changes sequentially
each time the button is pressed.
X Move: You can move a 3D image with the trackball. The acquired 3D image moves as
you move the trackball.
X ROI: You can resize the ROI box with the trackball. The ROI box on the 3D image is
resized as you move the trackball.
X Pointer: You can re-adjust the position of the ROI box. Pressing the Pointer button on
the control panel switches to the Pointer state. You can resize an image or the ROI box
in this state. Press the Change button again to switch to another state.
7-143
User Manual
Center View
Select an image. The selected image will be displayed as the front image.
Display Format
When this is selected, the front image is shown in full screen.
NOTE: ‘Center View’ cannot be changed when Display Format is set to Single.
Position
Set the position of the post curve.
Bias
Set the bias of the post curve.
Transparency
Set the transparency of a 3D image. The lowest value is for complete transparency, and the
highest value is for complete opacity.
Mix
Th.Low
Specify the minimum threshold range. When this button is selected, the front image is
shown in full screen.
7-144
Init
Resets the position information of the image.
NOTE: To reset the settings except for the position information, press Preset and then
Default.
Performing Mirror View Again

Tips!
To perform Mirror View again based on a certain Mirror View image:
1. While the trackball is in Pointer mode, use the trackball and the Set button to select a
Mirror View image.
2. Double-click the selected Mirror View image. Mirror View will be performed again based
on the selected image. The selected image will be displayed as the front image.
[Figure 7.50 Mirror View – Touchscreen]
7-145
User Manual
Volume Slice
Volume data can be viewed in multiple slices. The Volume Slice screen appears on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: If you press Volume Slice in modes other than Render Mode, Volume Slice will start
after the mode switches to Render Mode. Therefore, the settings configured in Render Mode
will be applied to Volume Slice images.
MSV vs. Volume Slice

Tips!
MSV allows you to divide a 3D image into multiple slices that can then be viewed in 2D
images. On the other hand, Volume Slice lets you view slice images in 3D. Volume Slice also
allows you to adjust the settings of each slice image separately.
Volume Slice Screen

Nine images are displayed on the screen. In the center row, reference images are displayed
in order of 2D, 3D, and OH. In the remaining rows, Volume Slice images created based on
those reference images are displayed.
On the 3D reference image and the Volume Slice images, the ROI position and slice
numbers are displayed. On the 2D reference image, the ROI box and slice line are
displayed.
[Figure 7.51 Volume Slice]

Slice Number
Tips!
Because three slice images are created before and after each reference image, the slices are
numbered from -3 to 3.
7-146
Ref. Image
Press the button to select a reference image among A (Longitudinal Section),
B (Transversal Section), and C (Horizontal Section). The selected image is displayed in
2D Image.
3D Rotation
Set the orientation of a Volume Slice image.
Slice Thick.
Specify the slice line thickness. The Volume Slice images are updated according to the
setting.
Selected Slice
Select a slice line. The selected slice line can also be found on the 2D reference image.
NOTE: For more information on other menu items, please refer to the menu in ‘3D Mode’
section.
Performing Volume Slice Again

Tips!
To perform Volume Slice again based on a certain Volume Slice image:
1. While the trackball is in Pointer Mode, use the trackball and the Set button to select a
Volume Slice image.
2. Double-click the selected Volume Slice image. Volume Slice will be performed again
based on the selected image. The selected image will appear as the reference image.
[Figure 7.52 Volume Slice – Touchscreen] 7-147

User Manual
Post Processing
[Figure 7.53 Post Processing – Touchscreen]
Gradient Mask
Adjust the brightness of a specific area in an image.
Flip Image
Inverts the position of an image.
NOTE: This option is only available in MSV Mode. It may not be used when OH is set to On,
however.
Clear SFVI (Smart Filter Volume Imaging)

It reduces noise.
Detailed SFVI
Set the value by turning the Strength dial-button.
VC (Volume Compound)
Sets the Volume Compound.
7-148
Negative
Inverts the brightness of an image.
Auto Contrast
Automatically adjusts the contrast of an image.
Threshold
You can adjust the threshold value.
Sharpen
If it is turned ‘On’, the boundary of an image will become more apparent.
3D CI (Compound Imaging)
If it is turned ‘On’, images are composed to reduce noise and enhance image quality.
Smooth Filter
Set the Filter’s blur level.
7-149
User Manual
MagiCut
You can cut the parts that are not relevant to diagnosis away from 3D images. Set the area to
cut by using the trackball and Set.
NOTE:
X Select this in MPR mode.
X If MagiCut is enabled, Accept ROI is turned on automatically.
X After MagiCut is enabled, if the system is switched to a mode other than MPR Mode,
MagiCut is disabled.
Mode
X Inside Contour: Cuts the inside of the selected area.
X Outside Contour: Cuts the outside of the selected area.
X Inside Box: Cuts the inside of the box.
X Outside Box: Cuts the outside of the box.
X Small Eraser: Cuts the selected contour line.
X Big Eraser: Cuts the selected contour line. This uses a thicker contour line than Small
Eraser.
Full Depth
If it is turned ‘On’, the entire area will be cut. If it is turned ‘Off’, Depth will appear on the
touchscreen.
Depth
Set the cut depth.
Undo
X Undo: Cancel the last task.
X Undo All: Cancel all tasks that have been done so far.
7-150
SmoothCut Mode
X Erase Small: Erases areas clicked and dragged with the trackball.
X Erase Big: Erases a larger area.
X Recovery Small: Restores the volume image in a desired area.
X Recovery Big: Restores the image in a larger area.
Mix
Th.Low
Specify the minimum range of Threshold.
[Figure 7.54 MagiCut – Touchscreen]
7-151
User Manual
RealisticVue™
Semi-translucent rendering is used for a realistic display of fetal images.
RealisticVue™ displays high resolution 3D anatomy with detailed expression and realistic depth
perception. User selectable light source direction creates intricately graduated shadows for
better defined anatomical structures.
When it is turned on, Clear SFVI, HDVI™, and VC are also enabled.
NOTE:
X RealisticVue™ is an optional feature of this product.
X HDVI™ is an optional feature of this product and only available for HS60/XH60.
Light Direction
This allows you to change the light direction that is applied to the volume.
NOTE: You need to press the Move Light button to enter trackball mode.
7-152
Set Color
You can specify the set color that is applied to RealisticVue™.
NOTE: You can set color by using the Hue, Saturation, and Lightness dial-buttons
[Figure 7.55 RealisticVue™ Setup – Touchscreen]
7-153
User Manual
CrystalVue™
CrystalVue™ is an advanced volume rendering technology that enhances visualization of both
internal and external structures in a single rendered image using a combination of intensity,
gradient, and position.
It renders the context information about the user-defined area.
NOTE:
X CrystalVue™ is an optional feature of HS60/XH60.
X Available in MPR Mode only.
X It is available in the Gray Mode tab in the Render Setup screen ((Render Mode1: Surface,
Render Mode2: Surface Smooth) and (Render Mode1: Surface, Render Mode2: VSI)).
It is available in the Inversion Mode tab in the Render Setup screen ((Render Mode1:
Surface, Render Mode2: Surface Smooth) and (Render Mode1: Surface, Render Mode2:
VSI)).
X RealisticVue™ Setup can be executed in CrystalVue™.
CrystalVue™ Setup
Press the button on the touchscreen to select this option.
Context
The volume data area of the selected context is rendered.
ROI Contour
The context information is displayed as rendered images for the user-defined areas only;
for other areas, only the surface information is displayed.
ROI Circle
The user selects a circular area for which the context information should be displayed. The
context information is displayed as rendered images for the user-defined circular area
only; for the other areas, only the surface information is displayed.
Strength
At higher Strength values, the context information becomes clearly visible and turns
opaque. At higher Strength values, the image has a wider range of complexity.
7-154
Complexity
If the Complexity value is 0, only the surface information is displayed; at higher Complexity
values, however, the context information is shown as rendered images.
CrystalVue™ Transparency
The lowest value is for complete transparency and the highest value is for complete
opacity.
Circle Type
In this mode, select ROI Circle and resize the circular area for which the context
information should be displayed.
[Figure 7.56 CrystalVue™ Setup – Touchscreen]
7-155
User Manual
Chroma
Specify the colors of 2D and 3D images under Chroma Map.
[Figure 7.57 Chroma Map – Touchscreen]
7-156
Preset
The Preset screen appears on the touchscreen. You can set the currently selected Preset or
rename the Rendering Preset. Default is the default value of the system.
[Figure 7.58 Preset – Touchscreen]
Default
Use the default setting (General Preset) for the probe.
Load
When you tap this button on the touchscreen, the currently selected Preset is applied to
the system. Then the Preset screen is closed.
Save
Tap Save. When you tap this button on the touchscreen, the current Preset is saved.
Rename
Change the name of the selected Rendering Preset. When you tap this button on the
touchscreen, the Name screen appears. After changing the name, tap Save to save the
changed name. Tap Close to cancel the change.
Reset
When you tap this button on the touchscreen, the Preset is reset to its default value.
7-157
User Manual
5D NT™
5D NT™ provides the midsagittal plane view automatically by rotating and magnifying the
images when measuring the nuchal translucency (NT) of the fetus in early weeks.
NOTE:
X 5D NT™ is an optional feature of this product.
X These options are only available in MPR mode.
Use the trackball to place NT Seed in NT area, and press the Set button to display the NT
measurement on the A Plane.
How To get good results

Tips!
X You can get better results when the Sagittal View of the fetus is captured as accurately as
possible.
X The higher the contrast between the fetus's palate and nasal bone, the better.
X It is preferable to have the lateral direction of the probe be parallel to the body
orientation of the fetus.
X It is preferable to have the probe's angle to the fetus's nasal bone as close to 30 degrees
as possible.
7-158
NT Caliper Placement
Tap the touchscreen to select the NT measurement type.
X On to On
Cusor
Place the cursor on the NT’s inner-inner for
measurement.
X On to Max Brightness
Cusor
Place one of the cursors on the outside of NT/IT and
measure the inner-outer. This method is useful when
harmonic is used and one side of the translucency is
blurred.
X In to In Cusor
Similar to On to On, this method takes measurement
with inner-inner, albeit with a narrower cursor interval.
Items
X NT: The acquired A, B, and C plane images and the automatically measured NT are
displayed in the 3D View screen.
X IT: Locates mid-sagittal view and tests the fetus for spina bifida.
Assign
Include the selected items in the results in the OB report.
5D NT™
This function helps the user to easily see the NT measurement process. This assigns a
certain thickness to A, B and C sections of the image and displays 3D Rendering image.
Init
The image’s position information is reset.
7-159
User Manual
Hide All
The marker and the measurements for NT and IT are not displayed on the screen.
Auto
If it is turned on, it automatically searches the midsagittal View. To calculate the NT value,
place the cursor in the NT area, and then press the Set button.
Edit
Edit markers for each item that is displayed as a result. If the trackball’s state is Cursor,
move the cursor near a + marker. Press the Set button and move the trackball to edit the
marker as desired.
ROI Height
Adjust the ROI Line’s Height to set the range of application. The ROI Height may be
adjusted while measurements are being taken or in Edit mode.
Marker Size
Set the marker size.
7-160
5D Follicle™
5D Follicle™ identifies and measures multiple ovarian follicles in one scan for rapid assessment
of follicular size and status during controlled ovarian simulation. This feature uses 3D volume
data to help acquire accurate measurement and reduces user variation.
NOTE: 5D Follicle™ is an optional feature of this product.
Run 5D Follicle™, and the touchscreen will switch to the 5D Follicle™ screen.
1. Specify the position of scanning. Use the Position dial-button on the touchscreen to select
between Left Ovary and Right Ovary.
2. Select a measurement method.
X Auto: Automatically locates and measures a follicle.
X Manual: The user needs to find and measure a follicle manually.
3. When the measurement is finished, its result is shown on the screen. The measured follicles
are color-coded and numbered.
[Figure 7.59 5D Follicle™]
7-161
User Manual
Editing Results
Edit the results of measurement. Press Change and select the task that you wish to perform.
In Edit Mode, the Single and Quad options of Display Format will be disabled.
Slice Review
An image can be viewed in multiple slices. You can determine whether there are any
follicles that have not been found yet.
Delete
Delete the detected target.
1. Select Change or Delete.
2. Use Set to click the target.
3. The selected target will be deleted from the image and the results table.
Add Seed
A measurement target will be added based on the seed positions entered by the user.
You can use this when you find a follicle that has not been detected before.
1. Select Change or Add Seed.
2. Click the discovered target by using Set and then use Growth to specify the size.
3. The specified size will be calculated again and displayed in the results table.
Add Contour
A measurement target will be added based on the Contours entered by the user. You can
use this when you find a follicle that has not been detected before.
1. Select Change or Add Contour.
2. Using the Set button, specify the contour for the detected target.
3. The specified size will be calculated again and displayed in the results table.
Growth
Specify the size of the target to measure. Tap the Increase ( ) or Decrease ( ) button on
the touchscreen to adjust the size.
In Edit Mode, the button will be enabled only when an additional Follicle is manually
detected using Add Seed or Add Contour.
7-162
Assign
Measurement results will be saved to the report.
[Figure 7.60 5D Follicle™ Edit – Touchscreen]
7-163
User Manual
5D Heart Color™
The function provides 9 standard planes of the heart by using the fetal STIC data as well as
important information about fetal heart development in an easy and accurate way in accordance
with the AIUM guideline.
In addition, it offers dedicated Preset, Predictive Cursor, Diagnostic Alert, and heart Diastole/
Systole timepoints.
NOTE:
X 5D Heart Color™ is an optional feature of HS60/XH60.
X 5D Heart Color™ is only available in the following circumstances.
– 3D probe
– Application: OB
X Color 3D is only available for 5D Heart Color™.
Acquiring 5D Heart Color™ Images
NOTE: If the motion artifact is severe or the heart rate cannot be calculated due to reasons
such as missing cardiac cycle data, you will be returned to the initial 5D Heart Color™ screen.
1. Select the 5D Heart Color™ tab on the 3D Stand By screen.

2. Configure Trimester, Scan Time, Volume Angle on the touchscreen.
NOTE: For information on the remaining items, please refer to ‘XI STIC’.
3. Specify the location where you will acquire images.
STIC Volume Data

Tips!
The standard view acquired using 5D Heart Color™ is affected by the quality of obtained STIC
data. Follow the guide displayed on the left side of the screen to adjust the location where
you will acquire images.
4. Press Freeze or Set. The system will begin acquiring 3D images.

X Breech Sweep: You can also scan a breech baby from its head to abdomen without
changing the probe direction.
7-164
5. Since a fetus moves frequently, if it is in an ideal position during a cardiac scan, you can
choose to resume scanning immediately after saving data in order to obtain as much data
as possible. Users can press the following buttons on the touchscreen:
X 5D Heart Color™ Acquisition
– Save: Saves acquired data and returns to 3D Stand By Mode.
– Discard: Returns to 3D Stand By Mode without saving invalid data resulted from the
fetus movement.
– Process: After saving acquired data, enters 5D Heart Color™ Mode with the scanned
data.
NOTE: If no Patient ID has been created, pressing the Save or Process button will open
the Patient screen. In this case, selecting the Cancel button will not delete the data; it will
function like the Process button.
7-165
User Manual
Slab 3D
Slab 3D is a volume rendering technology that visualizes cross-sectional images near each plane
as a thick slice by post-processing an acquired volume data.
NOTE: In Oblique View mode, this feature will be applied to the first slice only.
Render Mode
X Surface: Apply the accumulated Intensity and Opacity to render the 3D image.
X Min: Apply the minimum intensity to render the 3D image. This is suitable for studying
vessels or hollow parts.
X Max: Apply the maximum intensity to render the 3D image. This is suitable for studying
human bones.
X X-Ray: Apply average intensity to render the 3D image.
Depth
Adjusts the range of cross sections to be included in the rendering.
Exit
Exit.
[Figure 7.61 Slab 3D – Touchscreen]
7-166
Chapter 8
Measurements
Measurement Accuracy.......................... 8-3

Causes of Measurement Errors............................. 8-3
Optimization of Measurement Accuracy............. 8-5
Measurement Accuracy Table............................... 8-7
Basic Measurements............................... 8-9

Distance Measurement........................................ 8-13
Circumference and Area Measurement.............8-23
Volume Measurement.......................................... 8-26
Measurements by Application............. 8-29

Things to Note........................................................8-29
Common Measurement Methods.......................8-33
OB Measurements ................................................8-38
Fetal Heart Measurements.................................. 8-47
Gynecology Measurements.................................8-50
Cardiac Measurements.........................................8-53
Abdomen Measurements.................................... 8-67
Pediatric Hips Measurements.............................8-69
Urology Measurements.........................................8-71
Small Parts Measurements................................. 8-72
Musculoskeletal Measurements........................ 8-76
Vascular Measurements....................................... 8-77
Chapter 8
Reports...................................................8-86
Viewing Reports ...................................................8-86
Report Preview...................................................... 8-87
Editing Report (Worksheet)................................8-90
Adding Comments................................................8-93
Print Reports..........................................................8-95
Saving Reports.......................................................8-95
Store SR...................................................................8-96
Images.....................................................................8-96
OB Graph.................................................................8-98
Description...........................................................8-103
Closing Reports...................................................8-105
Measurement Accuracy
Measurement values can vary depending on the nature of the ultrasound wave, the body’s
response to ultrasound waves, the measurement tools, algorithms, product settings, probe type,
and the actions performed by the user.
Before using this product, make sure to read and understand the following information
regarding the causes of measurement errors, and measurement optimization.
Causes of Measurement Errors
Image Resolution
The resolution of an ultrasound image may be limited by spatial causes.
X Errors caused by signal range may be minimized by adjusting the focus settings.
Optimizing the focus settings increases the resolution of the measurement area.
X In general, the lateral resolution is lower than the axial resolution. Therefore,
measurements should be performed along the axis of the ultrasound beam to obtain
accurate values.
X Gain has a direct impact on the resolution. Gain can be adjusted by using the Gain button
for each mode.
X In general, increasing the frequency of ultrasound enhances resolution.
Pixel Size
X This product’s ultrasound images consist of pixels.
X Since a single pixel represents the basic unit of an image, a measurement error may result
in the displacement of approximately ±1 pixel when compared to the original image size.
X However, this error becomes significant only when a narrow area in an image is measured.
8-3
User Manual
Ultrasound Velocity
X The average velocity of ultrasound used for measurement is usually 1,540 m/s.
X The velocity of ultrasound used varies depending on the cell type.
X The possible range of error is approximately 2-5% depending on the structure of cells
(about 2% for typical cells and about 5% for fatty cells).
Doppler Signal Adjustment

X During velocity measurement, an error may occur, depending on the cosine angle between
the blood flow and the ultrasound beam.
X For Doppler velocity measurements, the most accurate results can be ensured by aligning
the ultrasound beam in parallel with the blood flow.
X If that is not possible, the angle between them should be adjusted by using the Angle
option.
Aliasing
X PW Spectral Doppler Mode uses a signal sampling technique to calculate the frequency (or
velocity) spectrum.
X Adjust the baseline or the velocity scale to minimize aliasing. A lower frequency probe can
also be used to reduce aliasing.
Calculation Equation
X Some of the calculation equations used for clinical purposes originate from hypotheses
and approximation.
X All calculation equations are based on medical reports and articles.
Human Error
X Human error may occur due to inappropriate use or lack of experience.
X This can be minimized through compliance with and thorough understanding of the
manuals.
8-4
Optimization of Measurement Accuracy
2D Mode
X Resolution is in proportion to the frequency of the probe.
X Penetration is inversely proportional to the frequency of the probe.
X The highest resolution can be obtained at the focus of the probe where the ultrasound
beam is narrowest.
X The most accurate measurements can be obtained at the focus depth. As the distance
from the focus increases, the beam width increases, which results in lower accuracy.
X Using the zoom function or minimizing the depth display makes distance or area
measurements more accurate.
M Mode
X The accuracy of time measurements can be increased by setting the sweep velocity and
the display format to higher values.
X The accuracy of distance measurements can be increased by setting the display format to
a higher value.
Doppler Mode
X Using lower frequency ultrasound is recommended for measurement of faster blood flows.
X The size of the sample volume is limited by the axial direction of the ultrasound.
X Using lower frequency ultrasound increases penetration.
X The accuracy of time measurements can be increased when the sweep velocity is
increased.
X The accuracy of velocity measurements can be increased when the vertical scale is set to
smaller values.
X It is most important to use an optimal Doppler angle to enhance the accuracy of velocity
measurements.
8-5
User Manual
Color/Power Doppler Mode

X A protocol has not been specified for images in Color Doppler Mode or Power Doppler
Mode. Therefore, the same limitations imposed on measurements taken in B/W images
also apply to the accuracy of measurements taken in Color Doppler and Power Doppler
Modes.
X Using Color/Power Doppler Mode images to measure accurate blood flow velocity is not
recommended.
X The amount of blood flow is calculated based on the average velocity rather than the peak
velocity.
X In all applications, the amount of blood flow is measured in PW Spectral Doppler mode.
Cursor Position
X All measurements are affected by input data.
X Adjust the images on the screen so that they are displayed at maximum granularity.
X Use the front edge or boundary point of a probe to make the start and end points of a
measurement object more distinct.
X Make sure that the probe direction remains aligned during measurement.
8-6
Measurement Accuracy Table

The following tables show the accuracy of the measurements that can be taken using this
product. Ensure that the results of measurement accuracy checks are kept within the ranges
specified in the table. Except for certain applications or probes, the following accuracy ranges
should be maintained for measurement of distance on a straight line.
NOTE: In case of doubt in the measurements, please contact your local Samsung Medison
Service Department for an accuracy test.
2D Mode
Accuracy Test Accuracy
Measurements Range
(Whichever is Greater) Methodology Based on
Axial Distance < ± 4% or 1 mm Phantom Acquisition Full Screen
Lateral Distance < ± 4% or 2 mm Phantom Acquisition Full Screen
Area < ± 8% or 4 mm2 Measurement Equation Full Screen
Volume < ± 12% or 8 mm3 Measurement Equation Full Screen
Angle < ± 4% or 1° Measurement Equation Full Screen
M Mode
Accuracy Test Accuracy
Measurements Range
(Whichever is Greater) Methodology Based on
Time < ± 5% or 1 ms Signal Generator Acquisition 0.01 – 11.3 sec
Slope < ± 8% or 4 mm/ms Measurement Equation Full Screen
8-7
User Manual
PW/CW Spectral Doppler Mode

Doppler Accuracy Test Accuracy
Test Range
Measurements (Whichever is Greater) Methodology Based on
PW: 30, 50, 70, 90 cm/sec

Velocity < ± 15% Phantom Acquisition
CW: 110 cm/sec
Signal
Time < ± 5% Acquisition 10 ms – 9.44 s
Generator
Heart Rate < ± 5% or 1 bpm Measurement Equation 1 – 43,200 bpm
Tips! Accuracy of ±1 least significant displayed digit (e.g. XX.X will be ±0.1mm, XX% will be ±1%)
8-8
Basic Measurements
Press the Caliper button on the control panel.
NOTE: Take basic measurements of distance and area regardless of the application. For
information on measurements for each application, please refer to the ‘Measurements by
Application’ section of this chapter.
The available measurement methods vary depending on the current Operation modes. Please
refer to the following table:
Measurement Category Operation Modes Measurement Method
Distance
Trace Length
Open Spline
2D, M, D
3 Points Angle
2 Lines Angle
%Stenosis(D)
Distance(M)
Slope
M
HR(M)
Time(M)
Velocity
Distance measurement Accel
RI
Manual Trace
Limited Trace
HR(D)
D VolumeFlow(D)
VolumeFlow(A)
Time(D)
Auto Trace
S/D Ratio
D/S Ratio
V1/V2 Ratio
8-9
User Manual
Measurement Category Operation Modes Measurement Method
Ellipse
Circumference and Area Trace
2D, M, D
measurement Closed Spline
%Stenosis(A)
1 Dist. Volume
2 Dist. Volume
3 Dist. Volume
Volume measurement 2D, M, D
Ellipse Volume
Ellipse + Dist.Vol
Disk Volume
[Table 8.1 Basic Measurements by Operation Modes]
Basic Measurement Operations

The following is the information on common button operations for basic measurements:
Selecting/Changing Measurement Method

Select a measurement method using the touchscreen. The menu items that can be
selected on the touchscreen vary according to the Operation modes. The selected
measurement method is displayed in the User Information area.
Adjusting Font Size

Go to Setup > Measurement > General > Result > Font Size and either enter the font size
to be used in the measurement results, or use the ‘Font Size’ knob button to select a
desirable size from 8 to 20.
8-10
Canceling Measurement Results

Delete Last: Tap Delete Last on the touchscreen to delete the last measurement taken.
The value displayed on the corresponding application report will also be deleted.
Specifying the Measurement Result Position

Place the pointer over the measurement and press the Set button. Use the trackball to
move the measurement to the desired location, and press the Set button to place the
movement at that location.
Resetting Measurement Result Position

Go to Setup > Measurement > General Page, and change the value for Position on 2D Mode
or Position On M/D in Result to reset the position of the measurement results as desired.
NOTE: You may select Left-Top, Left-Bottom, Right-Bottom, Right-Top, or Custom.
Deleting Measurement Results

Clear: Tap Clear on the control panel or the touchscreen to delete the measurement.
Printing Measurement Results

Press the established U Key with the Store/Print button on the control panel.
NOTE: Go to Setup > Customize > Buttons and choose a button to set as Store/Print from the
U1 U2 U3 U4 U5 and U6 buttons.
8-11
User Manual
Exiting Basic Measurement

After completing (or canceling) all in-progress measurements, press the Exit button on
the control panel.
NOTE: To change measurement units and other settings, select Setup > Measurement >
General on the keyboard. For more information, refer to ‘Utilities’ in this manual.
[Figure 8.1 Caliper]
8-12
Distance Measurement
Distance
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Specify two points on a
2D image and measure the length of the straight line between the points.
1. Select Distance on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button on the
control panel to specify the end points of the measurement.
Use the trackball to place the cursor at the desired position and then press the Set button.
Repositioning a Point
Tips!
Instead of pressing the Set button to confirm the point position, you can press the Change
button to reset it.
2. Specify both end points and then the distance between them will be measured.
3. When the distance has been measured, the result is shown on the screen.
Trace Length
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Specify a point on a 2D
image and trace a curve from that point to measure its length.
1. Select Trace Length on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to specify the start point of the measurement.
2. Use the trackball to draw the desired curve and then press the Set button to set the end
point.
3. Specify both end points and then the length of the curve will be measured.
Editing Curves
Tips!
Before specifying the end point by pressing the Set button, you can delete part of the curve
being traced by rotating the soft menu dial-button 5 counter-clockwise. To restore the
deleted curve, rotate the dial-button clockwise.
8-13
User Manual
Open Spline
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Specify mulle points on
a 2D image to measure the length of the resulting Open Spline curve.
1. Select Open Spline on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to specify as many points as desired. After specifying the last point of
the Open Spline, press the Set button twice to finish measuring the Open Spline.
At least two points must be specified before the Open Spline can be measured.
2. The length of the Open Spline curve created with the points you have specified will be
calculated and displayed on screen.
3 Points Angle
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Place three points on a
2D image and measure the angle formed by the points.
1. Tap 3 Points Angle on the touchscreen.
2. Specify three points.
3. The angle formed by the three points will be calculated and displayed on the screen.
2 Lines Angle
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Specify two straight
lines on a 2D image to measure the angle between the two lines.
1. Tap 2 Lines Angle on the touchscreen.
2. Draw two straight lines. Refer to ‘Distance’ for instructions on how to draw a straight line.
3. The angle between two lines will be calculated and displayed on the screen.
When two angles are calculated, the smaller angle is displayed.
8-14
%Stenosis(D)
StD stands for Stenosis Distance, which is a basic measurement available in all Operation
modes. The diameter of a blood vessel is measured on a 2D image to calculate its stenosis
ratio (%).
1. Select %Stenosis(D) on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Measure the total diameter of a blood vessel using the Distance measurement method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the diameter of the vessel’s inner wall under
stenosis.
4. Calculate %StD using the following equation:
%Stenosis(D) = (Outer Distance – Inner Distance) / Outer Distance x 100
Distance(M)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in M mode. Specify two points on an M
image, and measure the distance between the two points
1. Select Distance(M) on the monitor or touchscreen. Specify two points and measure the
length of the straight line between the points. This measurement is taken in the same way
as ‘Distance’.
Slope
This is a basic measurement that is only available in M mode. Specify two points on an M
image, and measure the velocity between the two points
1. Select Slope on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Specify two points and measure the length of the straight line between the points. This
measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Distance’.
8-15
User Manual
HR(M)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in M mode. Specify two bars on an image
and measure the heart rate between the two bars.
1. Select HR(M) on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to select two bars.
3. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen.
Time(M)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in M mode. Specify two bars on an M image
and measure the time between the two bars.
1. Select Time(M) on the monitor or touchscreen.
Velocity
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Specify one point
on a Spectral Doppler image to measure the velocity.
NOTE: In a Spectral Doppler image, the X- and Y-axes represent time and velocity,
respectively.
1. Select Velocity on the monitor or touchscreen.

2. Specify a point.
8-16
Accel
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Specify two
points on a Spectral Doppler image and measure the velocity at each point to calculate the
time and acceleration.
1. Select Accel on the monitor or touchscreen.
The following equation is used for Accel measurement:
RI
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Specify two
points on a Spectral Doppler image and measure the velocity at each point to calculate the
Resistivity Index (RI).
1. Tap RI on the touchscreen.
2. Specify two points on a Spectral Doppler image, and measure the velocity at each point.
The equations used for D RI measurement are as follows:
8-17
User Manual
Manual Trace
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. This is mainly
used in case Auto Trace or Limited Trace fails. On a Spectral Doppler image, select a start
point and an end point and draw a line between them while including the EDV so that one
cycle can be created. Then, the curve is traced, and the blood flow velocity, average velocity,
RI, Pulsatility Index (PI), etc., are calculated.
1. Select Manual Trace on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Trace the curve. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the
screen. The measurement results displayed will vary, depending on the settings you have
selected in Setup > Measurement > Library > Caliper > D > Manual Trace.
X PS: Peak Systolic Velocity X PI: Pulsatility Index
X MD: Min Diastolic Velocity X RI: Resistivity Index
X ED: End Diastolic Velocity X PS/ED: PS ED Ratio
X TAmax: Time Averaged Max Velocity X ED/PS: ED PS Ratio
The equations used for Trace measurement are as follows:
VTI
X V mean =
Duration of flow
X RI =
PS − ED
PS
PS − ED
X PI =
Vmean
8-18
Limited Trace
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Select two bars
on the start and end points on the Spectral Doppler image while including the EDV. Then, the
average velocity between the bars, RI, Pulsatility Index (PI), etc., are calculated.
1. Select Limited Trace on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to select two bars.
X PS: Peak Systolic Velocity X PI: Pulsatility Index
X MD: Min Diastolic Velocity X RI: Resistivity Index
X ED: End Diastolic Velocity X PS/ED: PS ED Ratio
X TAmax: Time Averaged Max Velocity X ED/PS: ED PS Ratio
X TAMEAN: Time Average Mean Velocity X HR
The equations used for D Limited Trace measurement are as follows:
VTI
X V mean =
Duration of flow
PS − ED
X RI =
PS
PS − ED
X PI =
Vmean
V1
X V1 / V2 =
V2
8-19
User Manual
VolumeFlow(D)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode and 2D Image
Mode. Specify two bars on a Spectral Doppler image, and specify two points in 2D Image
mode, to calculate the VolumeFlow.
1. Select VolumeFlow(D) on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to select two bars. This
measurement is taken in the same way as ‘M Time’. This can only be done in the Loop area.
3. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to select two points. 2D Image
Mode will activate automatically so that you can measure the distance. This measurement
is taken in the same way as ‘Distance’.
Time(D)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Place two bars
on a Spectral Doppler image to calculate the time between the bars.
1. Tap D Time on the touchscreen.
2. Set two bars on the spectrum with the trackball and the Set button.
HR(D)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. Place two bars
on an image and measure the heart rate between the two bars.
1. Select HR(D) on the monitor or touchscreen.
8-20
Auto Trace
Spectrum is traced automatically. This can be enabled in the measurement menu in Spectral
Doppler mode.
1. Press Auto Trace in the Measurement menu.
2. The system traces the spectrum automatically.
3. When the Trace is complete, the measurement results are displayed on the screen.
Things to Consider when using Doppler Spectrum Auto Trace

Tips!
The state of a Doppler Spectrum may affect the measurement results. Please pay attention to
the following:
X Causes for Trace Failure
– If the Gain is changed while a Doppler image is in Freeze state, Contour Trace and
Peak Trace will not work.
– If there is little or no noise in an image without a spectrum, Contour Trace will not
work.
– If there is severe noise in an image, Contour Trace will not work.
– If the Clutter Filter is set too high, Auto Trace and Limited Trace may not work.
X Possible Causes of Inaccurate Peak Trace
– If the PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) is lower than the velocity at the site being
examined, aliasing may occur. If the original signals are separated from aliasing, a
Trace can be carried out, but the peak measurement may not be accurate.
– If the peak of a spectral waveform is not clear or occurs intermittently, a Trace can be
carried out, but the peak measurement may not be accurate.
– If the Doppler Gain is set too high or too low, it becomes difficult to distinguish
spectra. This may result in measurement error.
– If the Wall Filter is set too high, the spectrum will only be partially displayed. In this
case, a Trace can be carried out, but Peak measurement may not be accurate.
– If abnormal noise or artifacts occurs, a Trace can be carried out, but Peak
measurement may not be accurate.
8-21
User Manual
S/D Ratio, D/S Ratio

This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode. After designating
two points in a Spectral Doppler image, calculate the velocity ratio by measuring the velocity
at each point.
NOTE: In a Spectral Doppler image, the X- and Y-axes represent time and velocity,
respectively.
1. Tap the S/D button on the touchscreen.

2. After designating two points, measure the velocity at each point. The measurement
method is same as ‘RI’.
V1/V2 Ratio
This is a basic measurement that is available in Spectral Doppler mode only. Specify two
points on Spectral Doppler images. Then, the velocity at each point is measured and the
velocity ratio is calculated. Note that the velocity ratio is calculated by measuring the V1 and
V2 from different Spectral Doppler images.
1. Tap V1/V2 Ratio on the touchscreen.
2. Select one point and then measure its velocity.
3. Press Freeze to switch to diagnosis mode and acquire images. Then, press Freeze again
and return to measurement mode.
4. Measure the velocity at the second point.
5. When the measurement is finished, its result will be shown on the screen.
8-22
Circumference and Area Measurement
Ellipse
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Measure the
circumference and area of circle (ellipse)-shaped objects on a 2D image.
1. Click Ellipse on the monitor or tap Ellipse on the touchscreen.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify the diameter (axis) of
the measurement area.
Repositioning Point
Tips!
Before pressing the Set button to confirm the position, you can press the Change button to
reset the position of the point.
3. Specify the size of the circle (ellipse).

Adjust the size using the trackball and then press the Set button.
The following equation is used for Ellipse measurement:
X , (a: Half Long axis, b: Half Short axis)
X Area = , (a, b: Axis)
8-23
User Manual
Trace
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Measure the
circumference and area of an irregularly shaped object on a 2D image.
1. Select Trace on the monitor or touchscreen.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to specify the start point for
tracing over the contour of the measurement area.
3. Trace the curve so that the measurement cursor returns to the start point, and then press
the Set button.
NOTE: The Trace Line must be a closed curve. If you press the Set button before tracing is
complete, a straight line will be traced between the current position and the start point,
resulting in a significant error.
The equations used for Trace measurement are as follows:
X , (N = 1, 2… last point)
X , (N = 1, 2… last point)
Editing Curves
Tips!
being traced by rotating the soft menu dial-button 5 clockwise. To restore the deleted curve,
rotate it counter-clockwise.
8-24
Closed Spline
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Specify multiple points
on a 2D image to measure the circumference and area of the resulting closed spline.
1. Select Closed Spline on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to specify as many points as desired. After specifying the last point of
the Spline, press the Set button twice to finish measuring the Spline.
At least three points must be specified before spline can be measured.
2. The circumference and area of the closed spline created with the points you have specified
will be calculated and displayed on screen.
%Stenosis(A)
StA stands for Stenosis Area, which is a basic measurement available in all Operation modes.
The area of a blood vessel is measured on a 2D image to calculate its stenosis ratio (%).
1. Select %Stenosis(A) on the monitor or touchscreen. Measure the area of the vessel outer
wall using the ‘Ellipse’ measurement method.
2. When the second cursor appears, measure the area of the stenosed vessel’s inner wall.
This measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Trace’.
3. Calculate %Stenosis(A) with the following equation:
%Stenosis(A) = (Outer Area – Inner Area) / Outer Area x 100
VolumeFlow(A)
This is a basic measurement that is only available in Spectral Doppler mode and 2D Image
mode. Specify two bars on a Spectral Doppler image and specify an ellipse in 2D Image mode
to calculate the VolumeFlow.
1. Select VolumeFlow(A) on the monitor or touchscreen. Use the trackball and the Set button
on the control panel to select two bars. This measurement is taken in the same way as ‘M
Time’. This can only be done in the Loop area.
2. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel to select an ellipse. 2D Image
Mode will activate automatically so that you can measure the ellipse. This measurement is
taken in the same way as ‘Ellipse’.
8-25
User Manual
Volume Measurement
NOTE: Since Dual Mode simultaneously displays two images on the screen, you don’t have to
return to the Operation modes to measure volume in Dual Mode.
1 Distance Volume
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Measure the volume of
an object by using only one straight line on a 2D image.
1. Select 1 Distance Volume on the monitor or touchscreen. Specify two points and measure
the length of the straight line between the points. This measurement is taken in the same
way as ‘Distance’.
2. When the measurement has been taken, the result is shown on the screen. The volume
(Vol.) will be calculated along with the length of the line.
The equations used for 1 Distance measurement are as follows:
X , (D: distance)
2 Distance Volume
an object by using two straight lines on a 2D image.
2. Measure the length of the last remaining straight line using the same method as above.
(Vol.) will be calculated along with the length of each line.
X D1 > D2, Vol =

π
⋅ D 1 ⋅ D 2 2 , (D: distance)
6
8-26
3 Distance Volume
an object by using three straight lines on a 2D image.
2. Measure the length of the remaining two straight lines using the same method as above.
(Vol.) will be calculated along with the length of each line.
X , (D: distance)
Ellipse Volume
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Measure the volume of a
cone-shaped object by using one circle (ellipse) on a 2D image.
1. Tap Ellipse Volume on the touchscreen. Specify the size of the circle (ellipse). This
measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Ellipse’.
The following equation is used for Ellipse measurement:
Ellipse+Dist Vol.
an object by using one straight line and one circle (ellipse) on a 2D image.
1. Tap Ellipse+Dist Vol. on the touchscreen. Specify the size of the circle (ellipse). This
measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Ellipse’.
The equation for measuring Ellipse+Dist Vol. is as follows:
X ,
8-27
User Manual
Disk Volume
This is a basic measurement that is available in all Operation modes. Calculate the volume
of an irregularly shaped object by measuring the area and the length of its long axis on a 2D
image.
1. Select Disk Volume on the monitor or touchscreen. Draw the contour of the area to be
measured. This measurement is taken in the same way as ‘Trace’.
2. Determine the length (L) of the major axis. This measurement is taken in the same way as
‘Distance’.
X D: The length of a straight line
X Area: The area of a circle
X Volume: Volume
4. It is calculated with the following formula:
, (D: diameter of the circle; L: length of the major axis)
D L
Editing Curves
Tips!
being traced by rotating the soft menu dial-button 5 counter-clockwise. To restore the
deleted curve, rotate it clockwise.
8-28
Measurements by Application
Press the Calculator button on the control panel.
Things to Note
Before Starting Measurement
Register Patient
X Make sure the currently registered patient information is correct. If the patient is not
registered, press the Patient button on the control panel to register the patient.
X Use the Study Information tab to enter or change a patient’s information per diagnosis
item.
X For information on the Patient Information menu and how to enter the information,
refer to ‘Patient Information’ in ‘Starting Modes of Operation’.
Check the Probe, Application, and Preset

X Check the name of the probe and the application displayed in Title area. To use a
different probe or application, press the Probe button on the control panel.
X In the Probe Selection screen, check the Preset settings.
Measurement Menu Settings

Set the related menus for convenient measurement. For menus related to measurement
and their settings, refer to the ‘Measurement Settings’ in ‘Utilities’ of this manual.
8-29
User Manual
Measurement Operations
The following gives information on the common button operations for measurements:
Select Measurement Item

Select from the measurement item menu on the touchscreen.
Change Measurement Method

If the current measurement may be taken in more ways than one, the measurement
method may be changed. While taking a measurement, you may rotate the dial-button
below the Change Tool menu on the touchscreen to change the measurement method.
Delete Trace Line

X While taking Trace Length or Trace measurements, rotating the touchscreen Undo/
Redo dial-button clockwise will delete the traced curve. To restore the deleted curve,
rotate it counter-clockwise.
X Move the trackball in the opposite direction to delete the traced line. You can only
delete the line while you are manually tracing the Doppler Spectrum.
Deleting Measurement Results

Press the Clear button on the control panel.
NOTE: The measurement results are deleted from the screen, but still shown on the report
for the corresponding application.
Printing Measurement Results

Press the established button with the Store/Print button on the control panel.
8-30
Exiting Measurement
After completing (or canceling) all in-process measurements, press the Exit button on the
control panel.
End Diagnosis
Press the End Exam button on the control panel. The study for the currently registered
patient will end, and all measurement results will be saved.
Fetus
Either click the Fetus button displayed at the top of the left menu, or rotate the dial-
button 1 to select the fetus to measure among A, B, C, and D.
Direction
Either click the Direction button displayed at the top of the left-hand menu or rotate the
dial-button 2 to select the direction of the object to measure between left and right. This
is only displayed in specific packages.
Location
Either click the Location button displayed at the top of the left-hand menu or rotate the
dial-button 3 to select the location of the object to measure from Prox, Mid, and Distal.
Trace Direction
Tap Trace Direction on the touchscreen to set the trace direction of the Doppler Spectrum.
This is activated only after Limited Trace has been performed in Spectral Doppler mode.
X Above: Only the + part of the Doppler waveform is traced.
X Below: Only the – part of the Doppler waveform is traced.
X Both: All parts of the Doppler waveform are traced.
8-31
User Manual
Measured Frame
Save the measurement frame. Rotate dial-button 1 to go to the measurement frame.
Threshold
Adjust elimination of weak signals at measurement of trace in the Spectral Doppler mode.
HR Cycle
Settings may be configured for each application at Setup > Measurement > Applications. In
Heart Rate, the number of cycles for heart rate (HR) may be specified at Heart Rate Cycle.
Specifying Measurement Result Position

Place the pointer over the measurement and press the Set button. Use the trackball to
move the measurement to the desired location, and press the Set button to place the
movement at that location.
Deleting Recent Measurement Item

Tap Delete Latest on the touchscreen to cancel the last measurement taken.
Report
Press the Report button on the control panel to switch to the Report screen.
8-32
Common Measurement Methods

This section provides information on the common measurement methods used for applications.
Measurements in Spectral Doppler mode

In general, if you trace a Doppler Spectrum, you obtain results for various measurement items
automatically. There are 3 ways to trace a Doppler Spectrum.
Also, HS50/HS60/XH50/XH60 can select a specific item under the measurement menu and
take measurements individually without tracing a Doppler Spectrum.
Auto Trace
Spectrum is traced automatically. This can be enabled in the measurement menu in
Spectral Doppler mode.
1. Press Auto Trace in the measurement menu.
2. The system traces the spectrum automatically.
Limited Trace
Specify a measurement range, and a spectrum will be traced automatically. This can be
enabled in the measurement menu in Spectral Doppler mode.
1. Select Limited Trace in the measurement menu. A bar will appear, with which you can
specify range.
2. Specify the measurement range.
Place the bar at a desired position with the trackball, and press the Set button.
3. The system traces spectrums within the specified range automatically.
8-33
User Manual
Manual Trace
A spectrum is traced manually. This can be enabled in the measurement menu in Spectral
Doppler Mode.
1. Select Manual Trace in the measurement menu. The measurement cursor will appear
over the spectrum.
2. Trace the spectrum.
Measurement by Item
In the Measurement menu, select an individual item and take a measurement.
1. Press the Calculator button on the control panel after obtaining a desired image.
2. Select the item you want from the Measurement menu. The + cursor will appear over
the spectral waveform.
3. Position the “+” cursor and press the Set button.
4. The measurement results for the selected item are displayed on the screen.
Item Category Unit Formula
PSV (Peak Systolic Velocity) Velocity cm/s
ED (End Diastolic Velocity) Velocity cm/s
MD (Minimum Diastole Velocity) Velocity cm/s
PI (Pulsatility Index) Measurement Ratio (PS-ED)/TAMAX
RI (Resistivity Index) Measurement Ratio (PS-ED)/PS or (PS-MD)/PS
PS/ED (Ratio of PS to ED) Measurement Ratio PS/ED
ED/PS (Ratio of ED to PS) Measurement Ratio ED/PS
TAMAX (Time Average Max Velocity) Velocity cm/s
TAMEAN (Time Average Mean Velocity) Velocity cm/s
8-34
Taking Measurements via AutoCalc.

Tips!
You can use Auto Calc to take measurements on predetermined item(s). Measurement
items are as follows. For information on setting measurement item(s), please refer to
‘Measurement’ in ‘Utilities’.
X Peak Systolic Velocity (PS)
X End Diastolic Velocity (ED)
X Min Diastole Velocity (MD)
X Time Averaged Peak Velocity (TAMAX)
X Time Averaged Mean Velocity (TAMEAN)
X Resistive Index (RI)
X Pulsatility Index (PI)
X Systole/Diastole Ratio (PS/ED)
X Diastole/Systole Ratio (ED/PS)
X Heart Rate (HR)
X Max Pressure Gradient (PGmax)
X Mean Pressure Gradient (PGmean)
X Velocity Time Integral (VTI)
X Peak A (Peak A)
Volume Flow Measurement

Select Volume Flow in the measurement menu.
Volume Flow can be calculated by measuring an area or distance. For information on
measuring distance or area, refer to ‘Basic Measurement’. TAMEAN (Time Avg. Mean Velocity)
value is measured automatically.
Vesl. Area (Vessel Area)

Measure the area of a blood vessel to calculate TAMEAN and Volume Flow.
Vesl. Dist. (Vessel Distance)

Measure the width of a blood vessel to calculate TAMEAN and Volume Flow.
8-35
User Manual
Stenosis Measurement
You can measure the stenosis of each blood vessel system by measuring and calculating an
area or distance.
%Stenosis(A)
Measures the area of the inner wall and the outer wall of the blood vessel. %Stenosis(A)
stands for Stenosis Area.
1. Select the %Stenosis(A) menu and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode.
2. Measure the area of the vessel’s outer wall using the Circ/Area measurement method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the area of the stenosed vessel’s inner wall.
%Stenosis(A) = (Outer Area – Inner Area) / Outer Area x 100
%Stenosis(D)
Measure the diameter of the blood vessel. Stenosis(D) stands for Stenosis Distance.
1. Select the %Stenosis(D) menu and the first cursor will appear in 2D Mode.
2. Measure the total diameter of a vessel using the Distance measurement method.
3. When the second cursor appears, measure the diameter of the vessel’s inner wall under
stenosis.
%Stenosis(D) = (Outer Distance – Inner Distance) / Outer Distance x 100
8-36
Heart Rate Measurement
HR (Heart Rate)
You can calculate heart rates for a certain period of time.
1. Select HR from the Measurement menu. A bar will appear, with which you can specify
range.
2. Specify the measurement range.
X Place the bar at a desired position with the trackball and press the Set button.
X Enter the number of cycles during the set period of time within the measurement
range.
3. Then, the system automatically measures the heart rate per minute within the
measurement range. The measurement result is displayed on screen.
8-37
User Manual
OB Measurements
NOTE:
X Ductus Venosus and Fetal HR can only be measured in Doppler Mode.
X For information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
‘Common Measurement Methods' in this chapter.
X For references on measurement items, see 'Reference Manual Part 1'.
Before Taking OB Measurements
OB Basic Information
Enter the information required for OB diagnosis in the Patient Information screen.
The basic OB information includes LMP (Last Menstrual Period) and Number of Fetuses.
Once LMP is entered, EDD (Estimated Delivery Date) and GA (Gestational Age) are
calculated automatically. LMP is required for the calculation of values such as EDD and SD
in obstetrics measurement.
X EDD (LMP) = LMP + 280 days
X GA (LMP) = Current System Date – LMP
X LMP = Ovul. Date –14
The physician may choose to override the LMP and manually enter the EDD into ‘EDD
(LMP)ʼ.
Once the expected delivery date is entered, GA (Gestational Age) is automatically
calculated and displayed. EDD (LMP) is renamed to EDD, while GA (LMP) is renamed to GA
(EDD).
Once DOC is entered, EDD (Estimated Delivery Date) and GA (Gestational Age) are
calculated automatically. EDD (LMP) is renamed to EDD (DOC), while GA (LMP) is renamed
to GA (DOC).
Once GA is entered, EDD (Estimated Delivery Date) is entered automatically. EDD (LMP) is
renamed to EDD (GA), while GA (LMP) is renamed to GA (Clin).
A maximum of four fetuses can be entered as Number of Fetuses. The default value is ‘1’. In
the case of twins, enter ‘2’.
For further information about patient information menus and how to input patient
information, refer to ‘Patient Information’ of ‘Starting Modes of Operation’.
8-38
OB Measurement Menu Settings

Set up the GA Equation, GA Table, and OB measurement menus that are used in obstetrics
measurements. The user can manually write, back up or restore GA Tables. For more
information on the GA Equation and Table, refer to the Reference Manual Part 1.
NOTE: For twins, distinguish fetuses by specifying them as Fetus A and Fetus B in the
Measurement menu. Either click the Fetus button displayed at the top of the left-hand menu
or rotate the dial-button 1 to select the fetus to measure among A, B, C, and D.
For menus related to measurement and their settings, refer to the ‘Measurement Settings’
in ‘Utilities’ of this manual.
1 Trim. Measurement Menu

When the measurements for the selected items are complete, the measurements and
gestational age are displayed on the screen. The measurement method for each item is the
same as for basic measurement. Measured items are automatically entered into the report.
Measurement Menu Item Mode Method Unit
GS All Distance measurement cm
MSD All Continuous measurement
YS All Distance measurement cm
Fetal Biometry CRL All Distance measurement cm
BPD All Distance measurement cm
FL All Distance measurement cm
AC All Circumference measurement cm
NT All Distance measurement mm
Fetal Cranuim IT All Distance measurement mm
NB All Distance measurement cm
8-39
User Manual
ALL PW Velocity measurement cm/s
S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Ductus Venosus TAmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm/s
Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm/s
Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm/s
Fetal HR PW Heart Rate bpm
Fetal HR Fetal HR M, PW Heart Rate bpm
Automatic Calculation
Some items in the measurement menu are automatically calculated based on measurements
of other items.
Measurement by Item
Each chosen item’s measurement result is calculated automatically using their
corresponding formula as follows:
Item Category Unit Formula
S/D (Ratio of PSV to EDV) Measurement Ratio |S/D|
D/S (Ratio of EDV to PSV) Measurement Ratio |D/S|
S/a (Ratio of PSV to Atrial Velocity) Measurement Ratio |S/a|
RI (Resistivity Index) Measurement Ratio |(S-D)/S|
PI (Pulsatility Index) Measurement Ratio |(S-a)/Vmean|
PLI (Preload Index) Measurement Ratio |(S-a)/S|
PVIV (Peak Velocity Index for Veins) Measurement Ratio (S-a)/D
NOTE: For reference, the Osaka University/Tokyo University methods are mainly used in Asia,
the Merz method in Europe, and the Shepard/Hadlock methods on the American continent.
8-40
2-3 Trim. Measurement Menu

When the measurements for the selected items are complete, the measurements and
gestational age are displayed on the screen. The measurement method for each item is the
same as for basic measurement. Measured items are automatically entered into the report.
GS All Distance measurement cm
MSD All Continuous measurement
CRL All Distance measurement cm
YS All Distance measurement cm
BPD, OFD All Continuous measurement
BPD All Distance measurement cm
OFD All Distance measurement cm
BPD, HC All Continuous measurement
HC All Circumference measurement cm
APAD, TAD All Continuous measurement
Fetal Biometry APAD All Distance measurement cm
TAD All Distance measurement cm
AC All Circumference measurement cm
FTA All Area measurement cm2
FL All Distance measurement cm
SL All Distance measurement cm
APTD, TTD All Continuous measurement
APTD All Distance measurement cm
TTD All Distance measurement cm
ThC All Circumference measurement cm
EFW All – –
8-41
User Manual
HL All Distance measurement cm
ULNA All Distance measurement cm
TIB All Distance measurement cm
Fetal Long Bones RAD All Distance measurement cm
FIB All Distance measurement cm
CLAV All Distance measurement cm
LV All Distance measurement cm
NT All Distance measurement mm
IT All Distance measurement mm
NB All Distance measurement cm
NF All Distance measurement cm
CEREB All Distance measurement cm
Fetal Cranium CM All Distance measurement cm
Lat Vent All Distance measurement cm
OOD All Distance measurement cm
IOD All Distance measurement cm
HW All Distance measurement cm
FMF angle All Angle calculation degree
Foot All Distance measurement cm
Ear All Distance measurement cm
Lt. Fetal Others MP All Distance measurement cm

Rt. Fetal Others Renal L All Distance measurement cm
Renal AP All Distance measurement cm
Pelvis All Distance measurement cm
8-42
Q1 All Distance measurement cm
AFI Q3 All Distance measurement cm
MVP All Distance measurement cm
ThD ap All Distance measurement cm
ThD trans All Distance measurement cm
HrtD ap All Distance measurement cm

CTAR
HrtD trans All Distance measurement cm
ThA All Area measurement cm2
HrtA All Area measurement cm2
Cervix L All Distance measurement cm

Maternal Others
Placenta Thick All Distance measurement cm

PLI
8-43
User Manual
Calculation after distance

%StD All %
measurement
Calculation after area

%StA All %
measurement
Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Umbilical A
Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Lt. Mid Cereb A
Rt. Mid Cereb A Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Lt. Uterine A PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Uterine A
ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Placenta A
MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. Fetal Carotids
Rt. Fetal Carotids PI PW Velocity measurement –
Fetal Aorta RI PW Velocity measurement –
Lt. Renal A
S/D PW Continuous measurement
Rt. Renal A
Calculate after measuring
VF(D) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Dist.

VF(A) PW ml/min
TAmean, Vesl., and Area
Fetal HR Fetal HR M Heart Rate bpm
Ductus Venosus TAmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm/s
Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm/s
Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace cm/s
8-44
AFI (Amniotic Fluid Index)

Measure the amniotic fluid index. Measurements are performed by dividing the pregnant
woman’s abdomen into four parts. The distance between the fetus and the farthest point of
each area is measured. To obtain a specific image from each quadrant plane, press the Freeze
button to go to the Operation mode. After obtaining the image, press the Freeze button again
to return to the measurement mode.
Calculating Estimated Fetal Weight (EFW)

When measurements for the following items are complete, the system uses the results to
calculate the estimated fetal weight automatically. For an equation for calculating fetal
weight, please refer to ‘Estimated Fetal Weight Formula’ in the Reference Manual Part 1.
X BPD and AC X AC and FL
X BPD, FL, and FTA X BPD, AC, and FL
X BPD, APTD, TTD, and FL X HC, AC, and FL
X BPD, APTD, TTD, and SL X BPD, HC, AC, and FL
X BPD and TTD X AC
X BPD, FL, APAD, and TAD X AC and HC
Continuous Measurement/Review for EFW Calculation

You can measure a series of OB items to calculate the EFW.
Before starting measurement

Tips!
X Make sure that the User Key has been set for EFW continuous measurements. You
can configure the User Key for EFW continuous measurements at Setup > Customize >
Buttons > User Key > EFW Measure. For more information, refer to ‘Peripheral Device
Settings’ in ‘Utilities’.
X Check EFW Reference. If it is not set, or if you want to change it, select it at Setup >
Measurement > Author > Estimated Fetal Weight.
NOTE: This function is not available in 3D mode.
8-45
User Manual
Measurement Method
1. Press User Key 1 (or User Key 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) on the control panel. The OB Measurement
menu will be displayed on screen.
2. Measure the items for EFW calculation by using the trackball and the Set button.
3. Use the trackball and the Set button on the control panel again to start the
measurement of the following items.
4. Once all measurements have been taken, the EFW is displayed on screen.
The EFW measurements taken and the order in which they are measured are as follows:
Reference Measure Item (by Order)

Campbell AC
Hadlock AC→BPD
Hadlock1 AC→FL
Hadlock2 BPD→AC→FL
Hadlock3 HC→AC→FL
Hadlock4 BPD, HC→AC→FL
Hansmann BPD→TTD
INTERGROWTH-21st AC→HC
Merz BPD→AC
Osaka BPD→FL→FTA
Persson BPD→FL→APAD→TAD
Schild HC→AC→FL
Shepard AC→BPD
Shinozuka1 BPD→FL→AC
Shinozuka2 BP→APTD, TTD→SL
Shinozuka3 BPD→APTD, TTD→FL
Tokyo BPD→APTD, TTD→FL
Review the Result of EFW Calculation

1. Press User Key 1 (or User Key 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) on the control panel. The measured items
taken for calculating EFW will be displayed on screen together with the result.
2. To remove the results from the screen, press the Clear button on the control panel.
8-46
Fetal Heart Measurements

The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. In addition,
measurement items are similar to those of cardiology measurements (Cardiac Measurements).
Measured items are automatically entered into the report.
NOTE:
‘Common Measurement Methods’ in this chapter.
X For references on measurement items, see ‘Reference Manual Part 1’.
LVEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml
LVESV A2C All Dist 20 ml

LV Vol. (Simpson)
Asc Ao All Distance measurement cm
MPA Diam All Distance measurement cm
Duct Art All Distance measurement cm
LA Diam All Distance measurement cm
RA Diam All Distance measurement cm
RVDd All Distance measurement cm

2D Echo
IVS All Distance measurement cm
LVIDd All Distance measurement cm
LVIDs All Distance measurement cm
LVPW All Distance measurement cm
HrtC All Circumference measurement cm
ThC All Circumference measurement cm
8-47
User Manual
ThD ap All Distance measurement cm
ThD trans All Distance measurement cm
HrtD ap All Distance measurement cm

CTAR
HrtD trans All Distance measurement cm
ThA All Area measurement cm2
HrtA All Area measurement cm2
Fetal HR Fetal HR M, PW Heart Rate bpm
IVSd M Distance measurement cm
LVIDd M Distance measurement cm
LVIDs M Distance measurement cm
M Echo LVPWd M Distance measurement cm
IVSs M Distance measurement cm
LVPWs M Distance measurement cm
RVDd M Distance measurement cm
Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

MPA
Duct Arteriosus PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
IVC ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Asc Aorta MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Dsc Aorta
PI PW Velocity measurement –
RI PW Velocity measurement –
8-48
Duct Venosus TAmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
E PW Velocity measurement cm/s

MV
A PW Velocity measurement cm/s
TV
Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
PLI D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
TST PW Time measurement ms

TEI
ET PW Time measurement ms
CTAR (Cardio-Thorax Area Ratio)

This measurement compares the size of the fetus’ heart in relation to the size of its thorax.
ThD ap, ThD trans, HrtD ap, and HrtD trans values are acquired to obtain the comparative
value.
8-49
User Manual
Gynecology Measurements
NOTE:
X For references on measurement items, refer to the ‘Reference Manual Part 2’.
Before Taking GYN Measurements

Enter the information required for GYN diagnosis in the Patient Information screen. Basic
information for gynecology includes Gravida, Para, Aborta, and Ectopic.
Measurement Menu
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured
items are automatically entered into the report.
Length All Distance measurement cm
Width All Distance measurement cm

Uterus
Height All Distance measurement cm
Endo.Thick All Distance measurement cm
Cervix Length All Distance measurement cm

Lt. Cyst
Rt. Cyst Width All Distance measurement cm
Lt. Ovary
Rt. Ovary Height All Distance measurement cm
8-50
Follicle #1 All Volume measurement ml
Lt. Follicle Follicle #6 All Volume measurement ml

Rt. Follicle Follicle #7 All Volume measurement ml

%StD All %
measurement

%StA All %
measurement
Lt. Ovarian A Manual Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace

Rt. Ovarian A PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. Uterine A
Rt. Uterine A
Pericystic MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Endometrial PI PW Velocity measurement –

Vol. Flow(D) PW ml/min

Vol. Flow(A) PW ml/min
S/D PW Continuous measurement –
8-51
User Manual

Mass1
Mass2 Auto Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Mass3 Limited Trace PW Doppler spectrum trace
Endo. Polyp
Lt. Ovarian Mass
PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Ovarian Mass
Uterine Fibroid1-12 ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Cervical Fibroid MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Ectopic
Most of the gynecology measurements are distance measurements and volume

measurements based on the distance measurement results. If mulle images, such as long
axis images and transverse axis images are needed, press the Freeze button to switch to Scan
Mode and obtain images from another perspective.
8-52
Cardiac Measurements
NOTE: Cardiac measurement is an optional item.
The measurement method for each item is the same as for basic measurement. Measured items
are automatically entered into the report.
NOTE:
X ‘For references on measurement items, refer to the Reference Manual Part 2.
Measurement Menu
All LV (2D) All Continuous measurement
All LVd (2D) All Continuous measurement
IVSd All Distance measurement cm
LVIDd All Distance measurement cm
LVPWd All Distance measurement cm

LV (2D)
All LVs (2D) All Continuous measurement
IVSs All Distance measurement cm
LVIDs All Distance measurement cm
LVPWs All Distance measurement cm
LV(2D) HR All Heart Rate bpm
8-53
User Manual
RVAWd All Distance measurement cm
RVIDd All Distance measurement cm
RVAd All Area measurement cm2
RVAWs All Distance measurement cm

RV (2D)
RVIDs All Distance measurement cm
RVAs All Area measurement cm2
RV Major All Distance measurement cm
RV Minor All Distance measurement cm
All LV/RV (M) M Continuous measurement
All LV (M) M Continuous measurement
LV EF(M) M Continuous measurement
IVSd M Distance measurement cm
LVIDd M Distance measurement cm
LVPWd M Distance measurement cm
IVSs M Distance measurement cm

LV (M)
LVIDs M Distance measurement cm
LVPWs M Distance measurement cm
LVET M Time measurement ms
LVPEP M Time measurement ms
LV(M) HR M Heart Rate bpm
Time Septal to PW M Time measurement ms
MAPSE M Distance measurement cm
8-54
All RV (M) M Continuous measurement
RVAWd M Distance measurement cm
RVIDd M Distance measurement cm
RVAWs M Distance measurement cm

RV (M)
RVIDs M Distance measurement cm
RVPEP M Time measurement ms
RVET M Time measurement ms
TAPSE M Distance measurement cm
LV Vol. (Simpson) LVEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml
BP HR All Heart Rate bpm
LVEDV A2C AL All Dist 20 ml
LVESV A2C AL All Dist 20 ml
HR A2C All Heart Rate bpm

LV Vol. (A/L)
LVEDV A4C AL All Dist 20 ml
LVESV A4C AL All Dist 20 ml
HR A4C All Heart Rate bpm
LVAd SAX MV All Area measurement cm2
LVAs SAX MV All Area measurement cm2
LV Vol. (Bullet) LVLd Apical All Distance measurement cm
LVLs Apical All Distance measurement cm
HR Bullet All Heart Rate bpm
8-55
User Manual
All LV Mass All Continuous measurement –
LVAd SAX PM Epi All Area measurement cm2
LVAd SAX PM All Area measurement cm2

LV Mass
LVLd apical All Distance measurement cm
LV TE a All Distance measurement cm
LV TE d All Distance measurement cm
Ao Diam (2D) All Distance measurement cm
Ao Diam(M) M Distance measurement cm
Asc Ao Diam All Distance measurement cm
Desc Ao Diam All Distance measurement cm

Aorta
Ao Arch Diam All Distance measurement cm
Ao Isth Diam All Distance measurement cm
Ao ST Junct Diam All Distance measurement cm
Ao Sinus Diam All Distance measurement cm
All LA Vol. All Continuous measurement
LA/Ao (2D) All Distance measurement cm
LA Diam (2D) All Distance measurement cm
LA/Ao(M) M Distance measurement cm
LA/Diam(M) M Distance measurement cm
LA LA Major All Distance measurement cm
LA Minor All Distance measurement cm
LAAd A2C All Area measurement cm2
LAAs A2C All Area measurement cm2
LAAd A4C All Area measurement cm2
LAAs A4C All Area measurement cm2
8-56
LAEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml
LAESV A2C All Dist 20 ml

LA Vol. (Simpson)
LAEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml
LAESV A4C All Dist 20 ml
RA Diam (2D) All Distance measurement cm
RA Major All Distance measurement cm
RA Minor All Distance measurement cm
RA RAAd All Area measurement cm2
RAAs All Area measurement cm2
RAEDV All Dist 20 ml
RAESV All Dist 20 ml
Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
LVOT LVOT Diam All Distance measurement cm
LVOT Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
LVOT VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm
LOVT HR PW Heart Rate bpm
RAEDV A2C All Dist 20 ml
RAESV A2C All Dist 20 ml

RA Vol. (Simpson)
RAEDV A4C All Dist 20 ml
RAESV A4C All Dist 20 ml
8-57
User Manual
RVOT RVOT Diam All Distance measurement cm
RVOT Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
RVOT VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm
RVOT HR PW Heart Rate bpm
AV Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
AV Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
AV Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
AV Cusp All Distance measurement cm
AV Cusp(M) M Distance measurement cm
AV Diam All Distance measurement cm
AVA Planimetry All Area measurement cm2
Q to AV Open M Time measurement ms
R-R Int M, PW Heart Rate bpm
AV AV Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
AV PHT PW Time measurement ms
AV VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm
AV AccT PW Time measurement ms
AV ET PW Time measurement ms
AV AccT/ET PW Continuous measurement
AV DecT PW Time measurement ms
Desc. Ao Vel. PW Velocity measurement cm/s
AV Acc PW Velocity measurement cm/s2
AR Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
8-58
AR Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
AR Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
AR VCW All Distance measurement cm
AR Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
AR ed Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
AR PHT PW Time measurement ms
AR VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm
AV AR AccT PW Time measurement ms
AR DecT PW Time measurement ms
AR PISA Rad C PISA-Radius cm
AVO PW Time measurement ms
AVC PW Time measurement ms
AR Jet Diam All Distance measurement cm
AR Jet Area All Area measurement cm2
AR Acc PW Velocity measurement cm/s2
All MV(M) M Continuous measurement –
MV D-E M Distance measurement cm
MV E-F Slope M Velocity measurement cm/s
MV A-C Interval M Time measurement ms
MV EPSS M Distance measurement cm
MV MV Vp M Velocity measurement cm/s
MV Ann Diam All Distance measurement cm
MV Diam1 All Distance measurement cm
MV Diam2 All Distance measurement cm
MVA Planimetry All Area measurement cm2
MV Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
8-59
User Manual
MV Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
MV Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
MV E-DT-A PW Continuous measurement
MV E/A PW Continuous measurement –
MV Peak E PW Velocity measurement cm/s
MV Peak A PW Velocity measurement cm/s
MV VTI PW Distance measurement cm
MV Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
MV PHT PW Time measurement ms
MV AccT PW Time measurement ms
MV DecT PW Time measurement ms
MV A Dur PW Time measurement ms
MV ET PW Time measurement ms
MV
MV Acc PW Velocity measurement cm/s2
MR Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
MR Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
MR Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
MR VCW All Distance measurement cm
MR Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
MR VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm
MR dp/dt PW Continuous measurement mmHg/s
MV IVRT M, PW Time measurement ms
MR PISA Rad C PISA-Radius cm
MV HR PW Heart Rate bpm
E/E’ PW Continuous measurement
8-60
TV D-E M Distance measurement cm
TV E-F Slope M Velocity measurement cm/s
TV A-C Interval M Time measurement ms
TV Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
TV Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
TV Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
TV Ann Diam All Distance measurement cm, mm
TV Diam1 All Distance measurement cm
TV Diam2 All Distance measurement cm
TVA Planimetry All Area measurement cm
Q to TV Open M Time measurement ms
TV TV Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
TV VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm
TV E/A PW Continuous measurement –
TV Peak E PW Velocity measurement cm/s
TV Peak A PW Velocity measurement cm/s
TV PHT PW Time measurement ms
TV AccT PW Time measurement ms
TV DecT PW Time measurement ms
TV Acc PW Velocity measurement cm/s2
TR Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
TR Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
8-61
User Manual
TR Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
TR VCW All Distance measurement cm
TR Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
TR VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm

TV Calculation after time
TR dp/dt PW mmHg/s
measurement
TR PISA Rad C PISA-Radius cm
RAP M, PW RAP mmHg
TV HR PW Heart Rate bpm
PV Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
PV Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
PV Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
PV Ann Diam All Distance measurement cm
PVA Planimetry All Area measurement cm2
PV Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s, m/s
PV PHT PW Velocity measurement cm/s
PV VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm
PV PV AccT/ET PW Continuous measurement
PV AccT PW Time measurement ms
PV ET PW Time measurement ms
PV DecT PW Time measurement ms
PV Acc PW Velocity measurement cm/s2
Q to PV Open M Time measurement ms
Q to PV Close M Time measurement ms
PR Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
8-62
PR Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
PR Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
MPA Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
PR VCW All Distance measurement cm
PR Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
PR PHT PW Time measurement ms

PV
PR VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm
PR AccT PW Time measurement ms
PR DecT PW Time measurement ms
PR End Vel. PW Velocity measurement cm/s
PR PISA Rad C PISA-Radius cm
PR Acc PW Velocity measurement cm/s2
All LV Tei Index PW Continuous measurement
LV TST PW Time measurement ms
MV ET PW Time measurement ms
LV IVCT PW Time measurement ms
LV IVRT PW Time measurement ms

Tei Index
All RV Tei Index PW Continuous measurement
RV TST PW Time measurement ms
RV ET PW Time measurement ms
RV IVCT PW Time measurement ms
RV IVRT PW Time measurement ms
P Vein S/D PW Continuous measurement
P Vein S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Pulm. Veins P Vein D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
P Vein A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
P Vein A Dur PW Time measurement ms
8-63
User Manual
H Vein S/D PW Continuous measurement
H Vein S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Hepatic Veins H Vein D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
H Vein A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
H Vein A Dur PW Time measurement ms
LV E’-A’-S’ PW Continuous measurement
LV Peak E’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s
LV Peak A’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s
LV Peak S’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s
LV AccT PW Time measurement ms
LV DecT PW Time measurement ms
RV E’-A’-S’ PW Continuous measurement
RV Peak E’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s
RV Peak A’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Tissue Doppler
RV Peak S’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s
RV AccT PW Time measurement ms
RV DecT PW Time measurement ms
LV Lat E’-A’-S’ PW Continuous measurement
LV Lat Peak E’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s
LV Lat Peak A’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s
LV Lat Peak S’ PW Velocity measurement cm/s
LV Lat AccT PW Time measurement ms
LV Lat DecT PW Time measurement ms
Systemic VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm
Systemic HR PW Heart Rate bpm

Qp/Qs
Pulmonic VTI PW Doppler Spectrum trace cm
Pulmonic HR PW Heart Rate bpm
8-64
MPA Diam All Distance measurement cm
LPA Diam All Distance measurement cm
RPA Diam All Distance measurement cm
SVC Diam, Exp All Distance measurement cm
SVC Diam, Insp All Distance measurement cm
SVC S/D PW Continuous measurement
SVC S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
SVC D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Shunts SVC A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
SVC A Dur PW Time measurement ms
IVC S/D PW Continuous measurement
IVC S Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
IVC D Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
IVC A Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
IVC A Dur PW Time measurement ms
PEd All Distance measurement cm
PEs All Distance measurement cm
IVC Diam, Exp All Distance measurement cm
IVC Diam, Insp All Distance measurement cm

IVC
IVC Diam, Exp(M) M Distance measurement cm
IVC Diam, Insp(M) M Distance measurement cm
8-65
User Manual
Dist 20
Trace the circumference of the heart and then draw the axis of the heart. The system
automatically draws 20 lines perpendicular to the axis to calculate the volume.
NOTE:
X MR dp/dt can be measured only at 1-3 m/s.
X In Dual 2D Mode, two images can be viewed simultaneously.
X For RVAWd, RVIDd, RVAWs, and RVIDs, see the LV measurement method.
X MPA Diam, RPA Diam, and LPA Diam are measured under Aortic Valve Level in
Parasternal Short Axis.
X C Mode is mainly used for measuring reverse cardiac blood flow.
X Since velocity data is required for measuring PISA-Radius or PISA-Alias Vel., set color
display to Velocity or Vel + Var in C mode. For relevant settings, please refer to ‘Color
Doppler Mode’ in ‘Modes of Operation’.
X Tissue Doppler can be measured in TDI Mode.
8-66
Abdomen Measurements
NOTE:
X It is convenient to calculate each measurement value on the Spectral Doppler image.
Abdomen Measurement Menu

CBD All Distance measurement cm
GB Wall All Distance measurement cm
Gallbladder Length All Distance measurement cm
Head All Distance measurement cm
Body All Distance measurement cm

Pancreas
Tail All Distance measurement cm
Duct All Distance measurement cm
Stomach Wall All Distance measurement cm
Bowel Small Bowel Wall All Distance measurement cm
Large Bowel Wall All Distance measurement cm
Lt. Kidney Vol. Length All Distance measurement cm

Rt. Kidney Vol. Height All Distance measurement cm
Liver
Spleen Width All Distance measurement cm
8-67
User Manual

%StD All %
measurement

%StA All %
Aorta measurement
Lt. RA
Rt. RA
Lt. Seg.A
Rt. Seg A Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Lt. Arc.A PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Arc A
Celiac A
Splenic A MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
C Hepatic A PI PW Velocity measurement –

R Hepatic A
L Hepatic A
SMA
IMA Calculate after measuring
Vol. Folw(D) PW ml/min

IVC
VMax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Renal V
R Potal V
M Potal V
Dur T PW Time measurement ms
L Potal V
R Hepatic V
M Hepatic V Vesl. Dist. PW Distance measurement cm
L Hepatic V
SMV
IMV Vesl. Area PW Area measurement cm2
Splenic V
RA PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Renal Aortic Ratio
Aorta PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
8-68
Pediatric Hips Measurements
Measurement Menu
NOTE: For information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
Calculation of angle after

Hip Angle Type All degree
measurement of three straight lines
8-69
User Manual
Measurement Methods
1. Specify the first straight line by using the trackball and the Set button.
Repositioning a Point
Tips!
Before pressing the Set button to confirm the position, you can press the Change button to
reset the position of the point.
2. Repeat the above process to specify two other straight lines.

3. The angle between them will be calculated automatically.
X α: The angle between the first and the second straight lines
X β: The angle between the first and the third straight lines
See the table below for Hip Joint Type information:
Type α β
1a 60 ≤ α < 90 0 < β < 55
1b 60 ≤ α < 90 55 ≤ β < 90
2a/b 50 ≤ α < 60 0 < β < 90
2c 43 ≤ α < 50 0 < β < 77
d 43 ≤ α < 50 77 ≤ β < 90
3/4 0 < α < 43
[Table 8.2 Hip Joint Type]
8-70
Urology Measurements
Before Taking Urology Measurements

Set the related menus for convenient measurement.
Refer to the ‘Setting Measurements’ section in ‘Utilities’ for additional information.
Measurement Menu
NOTE:
‘Common Measurement Methods' in this chapter.
X For references on measurement items, refer to the Reference Manual Part 2.
3 Distance
Calculate a volume by measuring three distances.
WG Prostate Length All Distance measurement cm

T-Zone
Bladder Height All Distance measurement cm
Pre Residual
Post Residual Width All Distance measurement cm
Lt. Renal Height All Distance measurement cm

Rt. Renal Width All Distance measurement cm
Renal Pelvis All Distance measurement cm
8-71
User Manual
Small Parts Measurements

NOTE:
X It is convenient to calculate each measurement value on the Spectral Doppler image.
‘Common Measurement Methods’ in this chapter..
Thyroid Measurement Menu

Lt. Thyroid Vol.
Rt. Thyroid Vol.
%StD All %
measurement
%StA All Calculation after area measurement %
Lt. Thyroid Flow ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Thyroid Flow MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Calculate after measuring TAmean,
Vesl., and Dist.
Calculate after measuring TAmean,
Vesl., and Area
Lt. Mass 1–5
Rt. Mass 1–5
8-72
Breast Measurement Menu


Lt. Mass 1–10
Rt. Mass 1–10

%StD All %
measurement

%StA All %
measurement

Lt. Breast Flow
Rt. Breast Flow


8-73
User Manual
Testis Measurements

Lt. Testis Vol.
Rt. Testis Vol.
D1 All Distance measurement cm

Epididymis
D2 All Distance measurement cm

%StD All %
measurement

%StA All %
measurement

Lt. Testis Flow
Rt. Testis Flow



Lt. Mass 1–5
Rt. Mass 1–5
8-74
Superficial Measurements

Lt. Superficial Vol.
Rt. Superficial Vol.

%StD All %
measurement

%StA All %
measurement

Lt. Superficial Flow
Rt. Superficial Flow


Vel A PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Vel B PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Lt. Mass 1–5
Rt. Mass 1–5
8-75
User Manual
Musculoskeletal Measurements
Measurement Menu
NOTE: For information on basic measurement methods, refer to ‘Basic Measurements’ and
Measurement Menu Item Method Unit
Lt. Shoulder
#1 – #10 Distance measurement cm
Rt. Shoulder
Lt. Wrist
Rt. Wrist
Lt. Knee
Rt. Knee
Lt. Ankle
Rt. Ankle
8-76
Vascular Measurements
NOTE:
X For references on measurement items, see ‘Reference Manual Part 1’.
Carotid Measurement Menu


%StD All %
measurement

%StA All %
measurement
IMT All Distance measurement mm
Average calculation after

IMT Mean All mm
distance measurement
Lt. CCA Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace

Rt. CCA
Lt. Bulb
Rt. Bulb
Lt. ICA PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. ICA ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. ECA
Rt. ECA


8-77
User Manual

%StD All %
measurement

%StA All %
measurement

Lt. Subclavian A PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Subclavian A
Lt. Vertebral A
Rt. Vertebral A MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Calculation after measurement

of TAmean, Vesl. Dist
Calculation after measurement

of TAmean, Vesl. Area
8-78
AutoIMT+
This function allows you to take IMT measurements easily and quickly.
NOTE:
X AutoIMT+ is an optional feature of this product.
X AutoIMT+ is available only under the following conditions:
– Probe: Linear Probe
– Application: Vascular
– Operation mode: 2D Freeze Mode
AutoIMT+ Screen
[Figure 8.2 AutoIMT+]
AutoIMT+ Measurement
1. After checking the probe and the application, start a carotid scan.
2. Press Freeze to obtain the desired image. Use the trackball to select the image you
want to measure the IMT on.
3. Tap AutoIMT+ on the touchscreen. The AutoIMT+ screen will appear.
8-79
User Manual
4. Use the trackball and the Set button to set a location for IMT measurement.
X Measure the length of a specific section. Press and hold the Set button at the
starting point and use the trackball to specify the end point.
X You can change the Near and Far positions of the measured area by using the
Change button on the control panel.
5. Once the measurement finishes, measurement values will be listed in a table.
6. Use the touchscreen, or the dial-button to select the measurement label, the location
of the blood vessel, and the direction of blood flow.
Setting Up Measurement Items

On the touchscreen menu, you may set up the measurement item, the location of the
blood vessel, and the direction of blood flow.
X Measurement item: Select measurement items among CCA, Bulb, ICA, and ECA. Use
the touchscreen button.
X Direction: Select the blood flow direction either left or right. Use dial-button 2.
X Location: Select Prox(Proximal), Mid(Middle), or Dist(Distal) as the location of the blood
vessel to measure. Use dial-button 3.
NOTE: Exit AutoIMT+ using following functions:

X Change Image Mode and Zoom
X Annotation, BodyMarker, Patient, SonoView, Report, Setup, Help
Measurement Result
X Max: The maximum thickness of the Intima/Adventitia pair.
X Mean: The average thickness of the Intima/Adventitia pair.
X SD: Standard Deviation
X QI: The distance ratio of the measured point in a distance for Quality Index
measurement.
NOTE: Location of measurement result window cannot be changed and it is displayed in the
position established before AutoIMT+ measurement.
8-80
Applying to the Report

AutoIMT+ measurement results are automatically applied to the report. Report/AutoIMT+
measurement results can be checked.
AutoIMT+ Measurement Analysis

1. Tapping the Analysis on the touchscreen opens Analysis screen.
2. Select the desired analysis from Framingham/CHD, Risk Factor, Normal IMT, or User
Graph by using the trackball and the Set button.
The bar that corresponds to the measurement will be displayed on each graph.
However, if the measurement is smaller than Framingham/CHD, or Risk Factor, no bar
will be displayed.
User Graph
Tips!
You can use User Graph to adjust the graph and analyze the measurement results as you
want.
3. To finish analyzing, tap the Exit button on the touchscreen.

4. The following materials were referred to when analyzing the measurements of
Auto IMT+.
Framingham/CHD
Correlation between the Framingham Risk Score and Intima Media Thickness: the Paroi
Arterielle et Risque Cardio-vasculair (PARC) Study.
Pierre-Jean Touboul, EricVicaut, Julien Labreuche, Jean-Pierre Belliard, Serge Cohen,
Serge Kownator, Jean-Jacques Portal, Isabelle Pithois-Merli, Pierre Amarenco. On behalf
of PARC Study participating physicians.
Risk Factor
Mannheim Carotid Intima-Media Thickness Consensus (2004–2006)
P.J. Touboul, M.G. Hennerici, S.Meairs, H.Adams, P.Amarenco, N.Borstein, L.Csiba,
M.Desvarieux, S.Ebrahim, M.Fatar, R.Hermandez Hernandez, M.Jaff, S.Kownator, P.Prati,
T.Rundek, M.Sitzer, U.Schiminke, J.C. Tardif, A.Taylor, E.Vicaut, K.S.Woo, F.Zannad, M.Zureik
Normal IMT
Simon A, Gariepy J, Chironi G, Megnien JL, Levenson J: Intima-media thickness: a new tool
for diagnosis and treatment of cardiovascular risk. Journal of Hypertension 20:159-169, 2002
8-81
User Manual
UE Artery Measurement Menu


%StD All %
measurement

%StA All %
measurement
Lt. Subclavian A
Rt. Subclavian A
Lt. Axillary A Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Rt. Axillary A Manual Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Lt. Brachial A PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Brachial A
Lt. Radial A
Rt. Radial A MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. Ulnar A PI PW Velocity measurement –

Rt. Ulnar A RI PW Velocity measurement –
Lt. SPA
Rt. SPA

8-82
UE Vein Measurement Menu

Lt. Internal Jugular V

Rt. Internal Jugular V
Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. Innominate V
Rt. Innominate V
Lt. Subclavian V
Rt. Subclavian V
Lt. Axillary V Dur T PW Time measurement ms
Rt. Axillary V
Lt. Brachial V
Rt. Brachial V
Lt. Cephalic V
Vesl. Dist PW Distance measurement cm
Rt. Cephalic V
Lt. Basilic V
Rt. Basilic V
Lt. Radial V
Rt. Radial V Vesl. Area PW Volume measurement cm2
Lt. Ulnar V
Rt. Ulnar V
8-83
User Manual
LE Artery Measurement Menu

Lt. CIA, Rt. CIA Calculation after distance

%StD All %
Lt. IIA, Rt. IIA measurement
Lt. EIA, Rt. EIA Calculation after area

%StA All %
Lt. CFA, Rt. CFA measurement
Lt. SFA, Rt. SFA Auto Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Lt. DF, Rt. DF Limited Trace PW Doppler Spectrum trace
Lt. Popliteal A
Rt. Popliteal A
Lt. ATA, Rt. ATA PS PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. PTA, Rt. PTA ED PW Velocity measurement cm/s

Lt. Peroneal A MD PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Rt. Peroneal A
Lt. DPA, Rt. DPA
Lt. MPA, Rt. MPA RI PW Velocity measurement –
Lt. LPA, Rt. LPA S/D PW Continuous measurement

Lt. Metatarsal A Calculate after measuring
Rt. Metatarsal A TAmean, Vesl., and Dist.
Lt. DigitalA Calculate after measuring
Rt. Digital A TAmean, Vesl., and Area
8-84
LE Vein Measurement Menu

Lt. CIV, Rt. CIV

Lt. IIV, Rt. IIV
Lt. EIV, Rt. EIV Vmax PW Velocity measurement cm/s
Lt. CFV, Rt. CFV
Lt. PFV, Rt. PFV
Lt. SFV, Rt. SFV
Lt. GSV, Rt. GSV
Lt. Popliteal V Dur T PW Time measurement ms
Rt. Popliteal V
Lt. LSV, Rt. LSV
Lt. ATV, Rt. ATV
Lt. PTV, Rt. PTV
Lt. Peroneal V Vesl. Dist PW Distance measurement cm
Rt. Peroneal V
Lt. MPV, Rt. MPV
LT. LPV, Rt. LPV
Lt. Metatarsal V
Rt. Metatarsal V Vesl. Area PW Volume measurement cm2
Lt. Digital V
Rt. Digital V
8-85
User Manual
Reports
The measurement results are summarized by application, and shown on the screen in a report
format.
Viewing Reports
Press the Report button on the control panel to switch to the Ultrasound Measure Report screen.
The measurement results are summarized by application, and shown on the screen in a report
format.
NOTE: Reports are displayed only for the applications that have measurement results.
Page
Pages are divided into Worksheet, Description, Comment, and image for each application;
opening a report will show the Preview screen by default. You can go to each section from
the Left Menu or Touch; if a section contains large amount of data to display, it will be
divided into mulle pages, which you may navigate pages using Touch or dial-button.
8-86
Report Preview
It provides report preview before print-out.
Property
Print
Set the type of Printer, Application, Print color, and Page.
Settings
You can set Header & Footer, Logo, Title, Patient Info, and Table Form of a report.
[Figure 8.3 Report Preview]
Printer
Select a USB Printer connected to the equipment.
Range
Set a page to save the print-out or images. Current Page selects the currently active page
and All Applications selects all pages.
8-87
User Manual
Application
Set application to save the Preview screen, printout, or images. Current Application will
select applications established in the worksheet, while All Application will select all
applications.
Color (Print)
Set the color of report in printout.
Color (Store)
Set the color of image to save images.
Page
Set pages to save the Preview screen, printout, or images. Echo Page will select a
landscape-formed report.
Header & Footer

Set the header and footer. Checking Show Date in Footer will display date in the bottom of
the right-hand side.
[Figure 8.4 Header & Footer]
8-88
Logo
Set a logo on the top of the report. It can be changed once it is connected to a USB.
Title
Set the title. User-selected title or a title set in the Patient will be shown.
Patient Info.
Set Patient information shown on the page. Only 1st Page shows the Patient information
only on the first page. Checking Institution will display institution in the Patient
information area.
Table Form
Set the report form. Selection of Brief will show the results only, while selection of
2 Columns will show measure items in the two columns.
[Figure 8.5 Columns]
8-89
User Manual
Editing Report (Worksheet)

When you move the focus to a value that can be edited on a Worksheet, the borders of the edit
window will be marked in blue, and Edit mode will start by clicking.
[Figure 8.6 Worksheet]
[Figure 8.7 Worksheet – Touchscreen]
8-90
Modify Measurements
After you have edited a value and moved the focus away from the value or press Enter in the
keyboard, the edited value will be applied. Edited values will be indicated with '*' in front
of them. To delete a value, click the value that you wish to delete; the Delete button will be
activated on the touchscreen. Press this button to delete the value immediately.
Default Author
Reverts to the author of Setup settings.
Delete Cell
Select and delete a measurement value.
Delete Line
Delete all values with the same label as the selected value.
NOTE: If you change the Author in a Worksheet, the GA value will be changed. The Author you
change in a Report is only valid within the Report; the Author of the Setup will be used for
calculating the GA when you are taking measurements in Measurement mode.
AV.US
If Composite GA is Average, you may select or exclude GA values from each Label Av.US
that have been used for calculation.
8-91
User Manual
Measurement Display Method

The product allows you to measure one measurement item mulle times. However, only the
first three measurement results are saved in a report.
When taking measurements for the same item more than once, measurements can be
displayed in four ways. On the Edit Report screen, you can specify or change the measurement
display method.
Go to Setup > Measurement > Application > Doppler > Display Absolute Value and select ‘On’
to display absolute values in the report.
Average
Obtain the average of the measurements and display it on the screen.
Last
Display the last measurement on the screen.
Max
Display the largest value of the measurements on the screen.
Min
Display the smallest value of the measurements on the screen.
8-92
Adding Comments
Tap Comment on the touchscreen or click Comment in the left-hand menu on the Ultrasound
Report screen. A screen in which you can enter opinions will appear.
Tap the bottom of the entry window or the Comment button on the touchscreen and a window
will open to let you select a comment you have previously entered in Setup. Select Comment in
the window and the selected text will be entered at the location of the cursor in the comment
entry window.
NOTE: Comments may be added at Setup > Report > Comment. For more information, refer to
‘Report’ in ‘Utilities’.
8-93
User Manual
[Figure 8.8 Comment]
[Figure 8.9 Comment – Touchscreen]
8-94
Print Reports
In the Preview screen, tap the Print button on the touchscreen or press Print in the left-hand
menu on Report screen. The measurement report for the selected application will be printed on a
connected printer.
NOTE: You can change the printer settings for printing measurement reports at Report >
Preview > Property > Print. For more information, refer to ‘Peripheral Device Settings’ in
‘Utilities’.
Saving Reports
In the Preview screen, tap Export on the touchscreen. Or press Export in the left-hand side of
Report screen. Export button is activated only when it is connected to a USB. Export window will
appear and save the report in the external storage media.
Export window will appear and specify the directory, drive, file name, and file format. Click OK on
the screen to save the report. Tap Cancel to cancel.
[Figure 8.10 Export]
8-95
User Manual
Store SR
Tap Store SR on the touchscreen or the Left Menu to save the Measure SR Information.
Images
Select this if you want to attach images to the report. Tap the Image button on the touchscreen
or press Image in the Left Menu on the Ultrasound Report screen to open a window where you
can select images.
[Figure 8.11 Image]
8-96
[Figure 8.12 Image – Touchscreen]
1. Select images from the thumbnail on the right.

2. When images are selected, the Add button becomes active on the touchscreen. Tap the Add
button to attach the selected images to the report. Alternatively, double-click selected
images among the thumbnails to attach the associated images.
3. If you select images attached to a report, the Delete button becomes active so that you may
delete attached images. Press the Delete All button to delete all attached images.
4. You may select 1x1, 2x2, 3x3, or 4x4 for layout.
8-97
User Manual
OB Graph
After taking OB measurements, press Report on the touchscreen or control panel. Tapping OB
Graph on the touchscreen displays the Graph screen.
Click/tap the Single or Quad button on the screen/touchscreen. Select the layout on the graph
screen. You can review the graph and trends. To return to the Report screen, tap Preview on the
touchscreen or the Left Menu.
NOTE: The graph function can only be used with OB reports.
The list of measured items appears on the right side of the screen. If you select an item, a graph
for the selected item will appear on the screen.
NOTE:
X To execute the graph function, at least one Label containing a Growth Table must be
measured, and only a Label that has been measured may display graphs.
X A graph is created based on the patient ID, LMP and measurement date.
[Figure 8.13 OB Graph]
8-98
[Figure 8.14 OB Graph – Touchscreen]
Select a Graph
Use the Trackball and the Set button to select an item from the list.
Single
A graph representing one obstetrics measurement will be displayed.
Quad
A graph representing four obstetrics measurements will be displayed.
Hide Grid
Erase the grids on a graph.
8-99
User Manual
All Fetus
Display graphs for all measured fetuses.
Current Fetus
Display graphs for the fetus currently being measured.
Trend
Tap Trend on the touchscreen. The past and present measurement values for a fetus are
displayed in the order of study date. It is shown on the graph with different markers for
different study dates.
Current
Tap Current on the touchscreen. The current measurements for a fetus are displayed by
study date.
User History
The past and present measurement values for the fetus are displayed in a table format.
Manual Trend
Display the measurement values-manually entered by the user-which are to be displayed
on the OB Growth Curve in Trend. Enter manually in Patient window.
Prev
Return to the previous page.
Next
Move on to the next page.
8-100
Standard Deviation & Percentile

Tips!
Among the OB information, the Growth table and the typical fetal distribution, for the same
number of weeks, are used to determine the following information:
X The normal distribution curve.
X The measurements for an actual fetus or a position in EFW distribution.
X Whether or not a distribution point is within the normal range.
The distribution of the number of weeks in the Growth table for the selected reference is a
normal distribution. It is laterally symmetrical around 50% (the average) and it shows the
distance from the average as a deviation. The deviation can be represented by Standard
Deviation (SD) or Percentile terms.
68.3%
68.3%
95.5%
99.7%
[Figure 8.15 Distribution of Growth Table for the Selected Week

(m: mean, σ: standard deviation)]
8-101
User Manual
When represented by SD, a point near to the average indicates a value closer to ±0 SD and
Tips! a point further away from the average indicates a value closer to the maximum or minimum
value. The greater part of the range falls within ±3 SD, with ±1 SD representing 68.3% of the
entire range. Thus it can be seen that most fetal measurements are tightly clustered around
the average value.
The Percentile represents a point in distribution from 0 to 100 inclusive. Therefore, the
average point is represented as 50 Percentile.
As shown in the figure, the average point corresponds to 0 SD (that is, the 50th Percentile).
If a point is in the range from -1 SD to +1 SD, it falls within 68.3% of the entire range. This
means that the point falls within the range from 16 to 84.
Further, if a point is in the range from -2 SD to +2 SD, it falls within 95.5% of the entire range.
Thus, the point falls in the range from 3 to 97.
The SD and Percentile are interchangeable. Percentile can be used when a fetal
measurement ranking is desired while SD can be used when the distance between actual
fetal measurements and the average measurement is sought.
While the range of Growth table references that are primarily used with OB measurement
data varies depending on the user, the typical range accepted by most users is as below:
X When references are created based on SD:
– -2.0 SD – +2.0 SD (when converted to Percentile: 2.28 Percentile – 97.72 Percentile)
X When references are created based on Percentile:
– 2.5 Percentile – 97.5 Percentile (when converted to SD: -1.96 SD – 1.96 SD)
– 5.0 Percentile – 95.0 Percentile (when converted to SD: -1.645SD – 1.645 SD)
– 10.0 Percentile – 90.0 Percentile (when converted to SD: -1.288 SD – 1.288 SD)
8-102
Description
Tap Description on the touchscreen. OB and Gyn applications have their own preset items; for
other applications, only user-added items are available.
General OB
This item only becomes active when OB measurement is available. Tap the General OB
button on the touchscreen and you can select a description for the selected item.
Early OB
This item only becomes active when OB measurement is available. Tap the Early OB button
on the touchscreen and you can select a description for the selected item.
Biophysical Profiles
5 items of Breathing, Movement, Tone, AFV, and NST may be left blank or set as 0, 1, or 2;
the sum of each item will be displayed as Total.
NOTE: Biophysicial Profile is activated only when OB measurement values exist.
Default
This value has been preset in advance by the user.
Save as Default
Save the values currently set on the screen as default values.
Clear
Delete all items.
8-103
User Manual
Fetus Compare
In the OB Study Information screen, select the Number of Fetuses to enable measurement
for each fetus when taking OB measurement. Tap the Fetus Compare button on the
touchscreen and measurement for each fetus is displayed.
[Figure 8.16 Description]
[Figure 8.17 Description – Touchscreen]
8-104
Closing Reports
Tap Exit on the touchscreen or in the Left Menu. Alternatively, press the Report button on the
control panel.
8-105
Chapter 9 Image
Managements
Cine/Loop................................................. 9-3
Annotating Images.................................. 9-5

Annotation ............................................................... 9-5
BodyMarker ........................................................... 9-10
Saving, Playing and

Transferring Images...............................9-12
Saving Images.........................................................9-12
Playing Images...................................................... 9-13
Transferring Images.............................................. 9-14
Printing Images......................................9-15
Printing Images..................................................... 9-15
SonoView Mode......................................9-16
Exam List.................................................................9-17
Review – Exam Mode............................................ 9-19
Review – Compare Mode.....................................9-23
DICOM Q/R.............................................................9-29
Cine/Loop
Images are automatically saved in the memory during scanning. The saved images are useful for
patient diagnosis and review.
The saved images can be in Cine or Loop, depending on the Operation modes.
X 2D Cine: These are images temporarily saved in all Operation modes except M Mode and
Spectral Mode.
X Trace Cine: Images that are saved in M Mode and Spectral Mode.
[Figure 9.1 Cine]
Starting and Finishing Image Review

During scanning, press the Freeze button on the control panel. The scanning is stopped and
the system switches to the image review mode screen.
Press the Freeze button again to return to the scan mode.
How to Review Images

Move the cursor to the Cine or Bar in the user information area to review an image. You can
search through saved images by moving the cursor with the trackball. The total number of
saved images and the number of the image currently being reviewed are shown next to the
bar.
9-3
User Manual
Selecting Loop
Select an image to play by pressing the Change button in the control panel.
The touchscreen menu is changed when images are reviewed.
[Figure 9.2 Reviewing Images – Touchscreen]
Cine Play
Tap Cine Play on the touchscreen. You can stop or resume playback of an image by tapping
the button.
Cine Speed
Use the Cine Speed button on the touchscreen to adjust the automatic playback speed of
2D Cine or Trace Cine. Speed may be adjusted from 6 to 300%.
NOTE: For an explanation of the other items on the touchscreen, refer to Basic Mode in
‘Modes of Operation’.
Reviewing Image in Multi-image Mode

Only the images in an active area can be reviewed. To review images in another area, change
the active area by using the Dual or Quad button on the control panel.
9-4
Annotating Images
Annotation
Enter or display text, Arrow, or BodyMarker on an image. This function is useful for differentiating
or marking a diagnosis area.
Starting Annotation Mode

Press the Text or Arrow button on the control panel.
[Figure 9.3 Annotation Mode]
Typing Text
Press the Text button in the control panel and enter text directly with the keyboard, or select
predefined text on the touchscreen.
You can move the cursor by using the trackball.
9-5
User Manual
Text Mode in Soft Menu
[Figure 9.4 Screen Keyboard]
Change App.
Tap the touchscreen or use the dial-button to change application. The text list will change
depending on the selected application.
Keyboard
Tapping the button on the touchscreen opens the on screen keyboard.
Arrow
You can enter an arrow in a place you want over an image.
Delete Last Word

Erase the last entered text. Alternatively, use the Annotation key on the keyboard.
9-6
Delete All Words

All of the entered text has been erased. Alternatively, use the Delete All key on the
keyboard.
Replace
When ‘On’, if you enter a text from the same group, the original text entered previously will
be replaced with the text entered later.
NOTE:
X Selecting Setup > Annotation > Library allows you to edit the entire page. For a more
detailed description, refer to ‘Utilities’.
X Replace button is activated only when the Annotation Group is set.
Set as Home Position

You can set the initial cursor position when Annotation Mode starts. Place the cursor on
any position of the screen and press Set as Home Position on the touchscreen.
Home Position
Pressing the Home button on the touchscreen moves you to the cursor position specified
by using the Home Position button.
Layer
Set Layer A and B.
Font Size
Select the font size to use. Select a value from 8 to 72 by using the dial-button on the
touchscreen.
Deleting Text
Press the Clear button on the control panel. All the text entered on the screen will be deleted.
Exiting Text Mode

Press the Exit button on the control panel or tap the Exit button on the touchscreen.
9-7
User Manual
Arrow Mode
You can enter an arrow over an image. This function is useful for differentiating or marking a
diagnosis area.
[Figure 9.5 Arrow Mode]
Entering Arrow
1. When pressing the Arrow button on the control panel, it is converted to the entry mode.
Or press the Arrow button in the keyboard.
2. Use the dial-button’s Arrow Type to select the type of arrow you want.
3. Move the arrow to the desired position by using the trackball.
4. To adjust the size of the arrow, use the dial-button’s Arrow Size.
5. To adjust the rotation angle of the arrow, use the dial-button’s Rotate Arrow.
6. Press the Set button to finish. Press Exit to cancel.
Arrow and Pointer Button

Tips!
Pointer function is available in Annotation mode.
9-8
Deleting Arrows
Press the Clear and Delete All Arrows button on the control panel to delete all arrows
displayed on the screen. To delete the last arrow entered, tap Delete Last Arrow on the
touchscreen.
Exiting Arrow Mode

Press the Exit button on the touchscreen or control panel.
9-9
User Manual
BodyMarker
Enter a BodyMarker over an image. This function is useful for differentiating or marking a
diagnosis area.
Entering BodyMarker Mode

When pressing Marker/Ref Knob on the control, it is converted to BodyMarker entry mode
and the touchscreen shows BodyMarker.
[Figure 9.6 BodyMarker Mode]
Inserting BodyMarker
1. BodyMarkers will appear on the touchscreen.
X The types of BodyMarker shown on the touchscreen vary depending on the selected
application.
X Up to 19 BodyMarkers can be listed on the screen at one time.
When more BodyMarkers are provided, use > button on the touchscreen to navigate the
pages
2. Tap the touchscreen button or dial button for the BodyMarker you want; the BodyMarker
will then be displayed on the image.
9-10
3. When pressing Change Lib, it can be immediately changed to a desirable application.

4. Select a desirable probe shape by using Probe Type dial-button.
5. Adjust cursor angle by using the Rotate Probe dial-button or the Angle button on the
control panel.
6. Adjust the cursor size by using Size dial-button.
7. Set the initial cursor position when BodyMarker starts. Place the cursor on the screen and
tap Store Probe Position on the touchscreen.
8. To finish entering BodyMarkers, press the Set or Exit button on the control panel. To
cancel it, press Clear on the touchscreen or tap the Delete button on the touchscreen.
Changing BodyMarker Position

1. Press the Change button on the control panel.
2. Move the BodyMarker to a desired position by using the Trackball.
3. Press the Set button on the control panel again to confirm the new position.
Deleting a BodyMarker
Press Clear on the touchscreen or tap the Delete button on the touchscreen.
Exiting BodyMarker Mode

Tap the Exit button on the control panel or touchscreen.
NOTE: Go to Setup > BodyMarker > Library to set the library of BodyMarker. For a more
detailed description, refer to ‘Utilities’.
9-11
User Manual
Saving, Playing and Transferring

Images
Saving Images
The saved images are displayed in the thumbnail area.
WARNING: You must always enter the patient ID, because all images are saved according
to patient ID. Failure to enter a patient ID may result in a loss of and/or critical errors in
previously saved images.
Saving Images
If no patient information has been entered, a Temp ID will be created and saved. The saved
images can then be edited and managed in SonoView mode.
Temp ID Setup
Tips!
For more information, please refer to ‘Utility > Setup > System > Patient’.
Saving (Still Image/Multi Frame Image)

Use the Store Clip function of U1–6 button to save it. For a detailed description for Store/
Send/Print settings, refer to ‘Utilities’.
X When frozen, specify the range of the image you want to save by using the trackball or
the Trim Start and Trim End buttons on the touchscreen, then tap the configured U1–6
buttons to save the Cine image.
X Live Mode works as shown below according to settings. For information about the settings,
please refer to ‘Utilities’.
If patient information does not exist, saving Cine in Freeze Mode will create a Temp ID for
saving.
If all frames are saved in Live Mode, the saving process is automatically finished according to
a predefined time.
The saved images are added to the thumbnail list on the right side of the screen.
9-12
Playing Images
You can play the saved images in SonoView and Operation modes.
Playing Images in SonoView
NOTE: Refer to ‘SonoView’ in this chapter.
Viewing Images in Operation Modes

Use the Pointer button on the control panel. Note that this function is available only when
there are images saved in the thumbnail list. Press the Pointer button and the cursor will
appear on the screen.
9-13
User Manual
Transferring Images
You can transfer images to a PACS system that supports DICOM. You can transfer all saved
images automatically, or select a desired image and transfer it manually. For information on the
DICOM server settings and DICOM operations, please refer to ‘Connectivity Settings' in ‘Utilities’.
Transferring Images in Operation Modes

You can transfer images automatically. Images are transferred by using the storage server
transmission method in Setup > Connectivity > DICOM. Please refer to ‘‘Connectivity Settings'
in ’Utilities’ of this manual.
Transferring Images in SonoView

You can transfer images manually. The following two methods are available:
Sending Exam
Send all images for an exam.
1. Select an exam from the Exam List.
2. Click the Send button on the left side of the screen. All images for the selected exam
will be sent.
Sending Selected Images

Select a desired image from among the images for an exam and send it out.
1. Select the image in the SonoView screen.
2. Click the Send button on the left side of the screen. The selected images will be sent.
9-14
Printing Images
NOTE:
X Use it after establishing functions in Setup > Peripherals > Printer.
X Configure the Store/Send/Print functions in Setup > Customize > Buttons before use.
Printing Images
Press the U1–6 buttons on the control panel. Images are printed via an echo printer. For
information on how to set up a printer, please refer to ‘Utilities’.
9-15
User Manual
SonoView Mode
This is the HS50/HS60/XH50/XH60’s integrated image management program. It provides image
saving/filing, preview, delete, and other PC-compatible export features.
The image file types used in this product follow the international standard DICOM (Digital
Imaging and Communication in Medicine). As a result, the PACS (Picture Archiving
Communication System) can be implemented without any additional costs, and it’s easy to
exchange image files with other hospitals or equipment.
This product supports the Bitmap file format (.bmp), which is commonly used on standard PCs,
ensuring easier exchange of image data.
Launching SonoView Mode

Press the SonoView button on the control panel. This will launch the SonoView screen.
If there are saved images available for the current exam, the information and saved images
for the exam will appear when SonoView Mode starts.
WARNING:
X Before saving images or using SonoView Mode, you must register the patient information.
X All diagnosis information in the product is saved and managed for each patient ID.
9-16
Exam List
Appears when the SonoView button is pressed. Or tap Exam List in Review Mode to see the exam
list.
[Figure 9.7 Exam List]
Enter search criteria at the top of the Exam List screen, and press Search. Search results will be
listed on the screen.
You can select an exam from the list and examine, delete, or send it.
Refer also to ‘Printing Images’ and ‘Transferring Images via DICOM’ later in the document.
You can select the data storage location. HDD, Media, and Q/R are provided.
Hide Search
Hides the Exam list.
Show Search
Shows hidden Exam list.
9-17
User Manual
Backup Exam
Gets activated when selecting an exam in HDD. Continue to back up the selected exam. Select
a drive to back up to and press Yes to continue the backup process.
X If you select the Delete Patient Information checkbox, then the patient information will be
deleted after backup.
Restore Exam
Gets activated when selecting an exam from USB storage or CD/DVD. Load the selected exam
to HDD.
Review
When one or more exams are selected, the button is activated. The review screen for the
selected exams will open. For a more detailed description, refer to ‘Review Exam Mode’.
Continue Exam
Is activated when an exam from the last 24 hours is selected. This allows you to modify the
exam.
9-18
Review – Exam Mode

Press Exam in the upper left corner of the screen.
In the Exam Mode, you can review the current or saved exam.
The image that is selected on the screen will be highlighted with a white border.
Exam Mode Screen

Exams for each patient ID are displayed by date in a tree structure on the left-hand side of the
screen. The number represents the number of saved images. To show or hide exams, use the
trackball and the Set button to select a desired ID.
[Figure 9.8 Exam Mode]
9-19
User Manual
[Figure 9.9 Exam Mode – Touchscreen]
Exam Select
Use the trackball and the Set button to select a desired exam from the list on the left-hand
side of the screen. The selected exam will be marked on the list in blue. The saved image will
also be displayed on screen.
Reviewing the Current Exam

Click Current Exam. The current exam and its images are displayed on the screen. This
button is only enabled when the patient ID is registered. Exams brought from the ExamList
can be closed by using Close or Close All button.
Reviewing Exams Performed Within the Last 24 Hours

Double-click an image. The exams that were performed within the last 24 hours and their
images, are displayed. The first performance date of the exam appears in the feedback area.
You can place measurements, annotations, and BodyMarkers on the loaded exam screen.
In addition, you can update the exam with new image scans.
Reviewing Exams Performed Prior to the Last 24 Hours

Double-click an image. The exams that were performed prior to the last 24 hours and their
images, are displayed. The first performance date of the exam appears in the feedback area.
You can place measurements, annotations, and BodyMarkers on the loaded exam screen.
However, you cannot update the exam with new image scans.
9-20
Exam Scroll
The image of the previous or next page is displayed on the screen. Access by rotating the Page
dial-button on the touchscreen. Rotating the dial-button to the left displays the previous
page image, while rotating it to the right displays the next page image.
However, this button may not be used when the number of exams saved is less than the
number of images that appear on a page under the current layout.
Closing Exam Review

Tap Close on the touchscreen. To close all exams in the list, click the Close All button.
Pan
You can use the Set button to move the image or scan within the selected image layout.
Reset
Reset the selected image or scan to the initially saved screen.
Select All
All images in the current exam will be selected.
Unselect All
All images in the selected exam will be deselected.
Favorite
After selecting an image in the Exam SonoView Mode, you'll be able to use the Favorite
button on the touchscreen.
When you select a Favorite, it will be displayed as in the top right-hand corner of the
thumbnail image.
Delete
Delete the selected image.
9-21
User Manual
Zoom
Use by rotating the Zoom dial-button on the touchscreen. You can adjust the selected images
from 3 to 200. This appears when an image is selected.
Page
Run by rotating the Page dial-button on the touchscreen. Move images of the selected exam.
Layouts
You can adjust the number of images displayed on the screen. Use the touchscreen button
that represents the layout. Up to 9 images (3×3) can be compared at the same time.
The numbers shown in the layout section indicate the column and row of where an image
will be displayed on the screen. You can change the numbers shown in the layout section to
customize the layout.
Displaying in Full Screen

Place the cursor on the image and double click the Set button to display the thumbnail
loading screen in Scan Mode.
Reviewing 3D Images
If the saved image is 3D, the 3D indicator will appear at the bottom of the image. Double
clicking the screen will start 3D View for image review.
Cine Play
Tap the Cine Play button on the touchscreen if the saved image is Cine. You can use Play,
Pause, and Stop to navigate the image forwards and backwards.
9-22
Review – Compare Mode

Press Compare in the upper left corner of the screen. In Compare Mode, you can select the
images related to an exam to compare and review them. The image that is selected on the screen
will be highlighted with a blue border.
Compare Mode Screen

As in Exam Mode, exams for each ID appear on the screen. In addition, images for the selected
exam are displayed in thumbnail format.
[Figure 9.10 Compare Mode]
9-23
User Manual
[Figure 9.11 Compare Mode – Touchscreen]
* All functions except the Page and the details below are the same as those in Exam Mode.
Select an Image
Use the trackball and the Set button to select an image from the thumbnail list. The selected
image is highlighted in blue in the list. Select a location on the screen where the image will
be displayed and then the selected image will appear.
NOTE: Only scanned data can be loaded into the image area.
Thumbnail Scroll
Images of the previous or next pages are displayed in the thumbnail list. Select the desired
image by scrolling with the trackball or using the Thumbnail Scroll dial-button on the
touchscreen. Rotating the dial-button to the left displays the previous page's images in the
thumbnail list. Rotating it to the right displays the next page’s images in the thumbnail list.
Image Scroll
The image of the previous or next page is displayed on the screen. Select the desired image by
using the trackball or using the Image Scroll dial-button on the touchscreen.
9-24
Mobile Export (Option)
Preparation
Tips!
To use Mobile Export, the system and your smartphone need to be connected via Wi-Fi.
1
3
4
5
2
6
8 9
7
[Figure 9.12 Mobile Export]
1 Patient Name, Patient ID: Display Patient Name and ID.

2 Image List: Display images available to send through Mobile Export.
3 Select/Deselect All: Select/Deselect all images to send.
4 ID/Password: Automatically create and display the ID and Password used to download
images from Web Page. The ID and Password can be modified.
5 Address: Display Web Page address to download images.
6 QR Code: Display Web Page Information with QR code to download images.
7 Status Indicator: Display the status of data conversion and transmission state.
8 Export: Send the selected images to the server.
9 Close: Close Mobile Export.
NOTE: Images that can be transferred through the Mobile Export are available only for
acquired still image or recorded video.
WARNING: Smartphones have not been cleared by the FDA for diagnostic image review
or other diagnostic use. Therefore, images viewed on a smartphone are for information or
communication purposes only.
9-25
User Manual
Printing Images
1. Press the Print button. The Print window will be displayed.
2. Select the type, printing direction, and options for the printer.
3. Click the Print button to print the image. Click Close to cancel.
Canceling a Print Job in Progress

Tips!
To cancel a print job in progress, use Setup > Peripherals > Peripherals > Printer > Printer
Setting. Select the printer with the print job you want to cancel, and press the Clear Print
Setting button. For more information, refer to ‘Utilities’ in this manual.
NOTE: If Thermal Printer is selected, Include Header and Include Page Numbers will be
inactive, and headers and page numbers will not be printed on the pages.
[Figure 9.13 Image Print]
9-26
Transferring Images via DICOM

Transfer the selected image and measurement data via DICOM. The icon is enabled only when
an image is selected. The icon is disabled in a system where DICOM is not enabled.
1. Select an image and click the Send button on the screen. The DICOM Storage window will
appear.
2. Press the Send button to transfer the selected image to the DICOM server. Click Close to
cancel.
[Figure 9.14 DICOM Storage]
9-27
User Manual
Saving Images
1. Press the Export button. Export window will open.
2. Specify the various parameters, such as directory, drive, filename and file format.
X Select the Create Patient Folder(s) checkbox to automatically create folders using
patient information.
X If the Hide Patient Information checkbox has been selected, patient information is not
displayed.
X You can select Low, Mid, or High for Image Quality.
X If you select DICOM in the File Format field, you can further specify how the file should
be saved.
– Include 3D Volume Data: Saves the file including the 3D data.
– Include DICOM SR: Saves the file including the Measure SR information.
– With DICOMDIR: Saves the file as a DICOMDIR file.
3. Click the Export button to start saving. Click the Close button to cancel.
[Figure 9.15 Image Export]
Exiting SonoView
Click the Exit button on the screen. Alternatively, you can press the SonoView button or the
Exit button on the control panel to exit SonoView Mode.
9-28
DICOM Q/R
At least one server should be registered in the DICOM Q/R settings.
NOTE: Before using this feature, make sure that DICOM Q/R is properly configured. To
configure DICOM Q/R, please refer to ‘Utilities’ and configure Setup > Connectivity > DICOM
functions before use. There is no limit on the number of DICOM Q/R servers you can register.
Run DICOM Q/R

Retrieve an image from the selected server by following this process:
1. After entering the ID in the Patient window, register or start an exam.
In the SonoView mode, enter an Exam List and select the combobox to Q/R.
2. Enter the Patient ID, Accession Number, or Last Name as a search term.
X Alternatively, search by selecting the modality you wish to find. You may select MR, CT,
Mammo, US, DR, or PET for the modality.
X You may search by designating a period. Select Period. Select either Today, Last Week,
Last Month, or Manual in the combo box. If Manual is selected, you do not have to
select date separately.
3. Press the Search button to search.
4. Patient ID, Patient Name, Modality, Exam Date, Accession Number, Description, and Series
Count will appear on the Study List search result.
5. Up to three studies can be selected from the Study List of the same Patient ID.
6. Select a study on the Study List to search within a series. Modality, Exam Date, Description,
Series No., Image Count, and Status will appear on the Series List search result.
9-29
User Manual
7. After searching for Series, select the Series you wish to retrieve. You may select or deselect
up to 10 series by using the Select All checkbox. Click Retrieve. If 10 series are selected, no
additional series can be selected.
[Figure 9.16 DICOM Q/R]
9-30
Retrieval Data Manager

1. Pressing Retrieval Manager opens the Retrieval Data Manager selection window.
2. In the Retrieval Data Manager window, select the series by using the checkbox.
NOTE: If you have not started the diagnosis, select the series in the Data Manager window by
using the checkbox and press Delete to delete. Locked exams cannot be deleted by using the
checkbox.
3. Press the SonoView button to view the selected exam image in the SonoView window.
4. This function can be used to compare data by pressing Compare.
5. Checking Show Only Selected will show the selected exams only.
6. Tap Close on the screen.
[Figure 9.17 Retrieval Data Manager]
9-31
Chapter 10
Appendix
Beyond Experience™............................................ 10-3

Cybersecurity......................................................... 10-3
Crystal Clear Cycle™............................................. 10-3
CrystalLive™.......................................................... 10-3
Dynamic Vision™................................................... 10-4
Ergonomic Transducer Design............................ 10-4
Low Noise................................................................ 10-4
Measure Navigation.............................................. 10-4
Solid State Drive (SSD)......................................... 10-4
S-Vue Transducer™.............................................. 10-5
WideScreen............................................................ 10-5
Chapter 10 Appendix
Beyond Experience™
Beyond Experience™, an integrated solution engineered to offer medical professionals a new
and outstanding experience in diagnosis, delivers enriched views, advanced intelligence, and
streamlined workflow. All of this combines to enable patient-centered care.
Cybersecurity
(Bringing peace of mind to your hospital and patients)
To address this emerging need for cybersecurity, Samsung provides a solution to support our
customers by offering the tools to protect against cyberthreats that may compromise invaluable
patient data and ultimately degrade the quality of care. Samsung’s Cybersecurity Solution strives
to abide by the CIA triad (Confidentiality, Integrity, and Availability) and takes a comprehensive
approach to providing impeccable protection with the following pillars: Intrusion prevention,
Access control, and Data protection.
Crystal Clear Cycle™
Crystal Clear Cycle™, an integrated solution for women’s health issues, represents Samsung’s
commitment to ensuring life-long healthcare for women. The Crystal Clear Cycle™ categorizes
the most significant health events for women into six stages and provides effective diagnostic
solutions at each stage.
CrystalLive™
CrystalLive™ is Samsung’s ultrasound imaging engine with enhanced image processing
capabilities including 2D image processing, 3D rendering and color signal processing. It provides
realistic and coherent images in various modes. In addition, it also offers an efficient diagnostic
environment by handling large amount of signal data quickly.
10-3
User Manual
Dynamic Vision™
Samsung presents ultrasound technologies which are optimized for diagnosis and treatment.
It features clear imaging for an accurate diagnosis, ultrasound guidance for optimal precision,
and a wide range of transducers for imaging the entire body, Samsung HS50/60, XH50/60 is one
of the advanced ultrasound systems.
Ergonomic Transducer Design

The new endocavity transducer supports a more natural grip by moving the maximum width
point to a more forward position. By adding tapered curvature at the front of the grip, the
sonographer gains more grip comfort. The length of the grip has also been increased, allowing
balanced weight distribution.
Low Noise
This exceptionally quiet device allows physical exams to be performed, including auscultation,
while the ultrasound system is turned on.
Measure Navigation
When placing a caliper, Measure Navigation automatically magnifies the area of interest using
a picture-in-picture window to allow precise placement of the calipers. This is especially useful
when measuring small structures or when accuracy is critical.
Solid State Drive (SSD)

The HS50/60, XH50/60 uses advanced solid state drives. These stable and dependable drives
allow faster bootup, better frame rates, and fast processing speeds.
10-4
Chapter 10 Appendix
S-Vue Transducer™
S-Vue Transducer™ provides more efficient piezoelectric properties, resulting in wider
bandwidths that enable better penetration and higher quality resolution.
WideScreen
WideScreen provides approximately 27% more lateral viewing information compared to normal
screen, allowing ultrasonic examination with wider view at a glance.
10-5

HS50&HS60 XH50&XH60 v2.05.00-00 En-Us

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HS50&HS60 XH50&XH60 v2.05.00-00 En-Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAMSUNG MEDISON

DIAGNOSTIC ULTRASOUND SYSTEM

Copyright © 2018 By SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD. All rights reserved.

Manufacturer: SAMSUNG MEDISON CO., LTD.

 Electromechanical Safety Standards Met

This mark certifies that the product conforms to applicable EEC

This mark certifies that the product conforms to applicable EEC

The GMP symbol indicates the Good Manufacturing Practice in

WARNING: Follow these instructions to prevent a serious accident or damage to property.

CAUTION: Follow these instructions to prevent a minor accident or damage to property.

NOTE: The accompanying information covers installation, operation, and maintenance

VERSION DATE NOTE

v2.05.00-00 2023.06.30 SW Improvement

Product Upgrade and Manual Update

If You Need Assistance

Safety Information.................................................................................................. 1-4

Electrical Safety....................................................................................................... 1-8

Biological Safety.................................................................................................... 1-24

Protecting the Environment................................................................................. 1-40

ECG (Option)........................................................................................................... 3-97

Strain+ Image (Option).........................................................................................3-117

Battery Pack Management....................................................................................4-12

Information Maintenance..................................................................................... 4-14

Chapter 6 Starting Modes of Operation

Probes and Applications......................................................................................... 6-6

Patient Information................................................................................................. 6-8

Chapter 7 Modes of Operation

Combined Mode..................................................................................................... 7-84

Multi-Image Mode................................................................................................. 7-86

3D/4D Mode........................................................................................................... 7-88

XI STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)................................................................................7-138

Basic Measurements............................................................................................... 8-9

Measurements by Application.............................................................................. 8-29

Chapter 9 Image Managements

Saving, Playing and Transferring Images.............................................................9-12

Printing Images..................................................................................................... 9-15

SonoView Mode..................................................................................................... 9-16

 Indications for Use....................................1-3

 Protecting the Environment................ 1-40

Indications for Use

Guidelines for Safe Usage

Symbols Description Symbols Description

WARNING: Warnings to prevent

Refer to the user manual. ECG port

Follow the user manual. USB port

CAUTION: Risk of electric shock Network port

Type BF applied part

Defibrillation-proof type CF Immersion-proof device:

CAUTION: Electrostatic sensitive

Power off Do not sit on the product.

Power on for part of the product Do not push the product.

Symbols Description Symbols Description

Be mindful of the space. Do not

DANGER: Do not place your

Dangerous voltage (Indicates Do not place objects heavier

Do not place heavy objects on

Do not push down on the

Federal law restricts this device

The Authorized European

The Swiss Authorized

The manufacturer’s name and

This equipment is a medical

Input port Consult the latest information.

Electromechanical Safety Standards Met

Indications for Use....................................1-3

Protecting the Environment................ 1-40

Mechanical Index (MI) Display

Thermal Index (TI) Display

Mechanical and Thermal Indices Display Precision and Accuracy

Number of Focal Zones

Color Sector Width

Color Sector Depth

Simultaneous and Update Methods

Sample Volume Depth

2D, Color, M Mode, PW and CW